Panasonic KX-TDE 100, 200, 600 IP PBX Feature Manual

® 19.1.1 Verification Code Entry)

Operating Manual References

1.3.1 Absent Message

3.1.2 Personal Programming

1.1.2 Account Code Entry

Description

An account code is used to identify outgoing CO line calls for accounting and billing purposes. The account code is appended to the Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) call record. For example, a firm can use an account code for each client to determine which calls were made for which client, and can submit a bill to the client according to the client’s account code as shown on the SMDR call record.

There are two methods of entering account codes explained below.

One of the methods is selected for each extension based on Class of Service (COS) programming.

Mode Description

Option

Forced

An extension user can enter an account code, but is not required to.

An extension user must always enter an account code before seizing a CO line.

Conditions

•

An account code can be stored in Memory Dialing (One-touch Dialing, for example).

•

Account Button

A flexible button can be customized as the Account button. The Account button is used in place of the feature number for entering an account code. This button is useful because it can be used at any time, while feature number entry is allowed only when hearing a dial tone before seizing a CO line.

•

Extension users can enter an account code at any time during a call, including after the call has been disconnected and a reorder tone is heard. However, if an account code is entered after there is no longer a reorder tone, the call will not be stored in the SMDR record.

•

If an account code is entered more than once, the code entered last is logged in the SMDR.

•

Even in Forced mode, emergency numbers can be dialed without an account code. (

® 5.1.2 Emergency

Call)

•

Proprietary telephone (PT) users can also enter an account code for incoming CO line calls during a conversation.

•

Verification Code Entry

To identify who made a CO line call for accounting and billing purposes, a verification code can be used.

This code can be used at any extension. (

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 15

1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)

PC Programming Manual References

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Account Code Entry

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Account Code Mode

PT Programming Manual References

[508] Account Code Mode

Feature Manual References

Line Access). ARS can also be turned off for the entire system.

Operating Manual References

1.2.1 Making Calls

1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)

Description

Different telephone carriers charge different rates for calls placed to different areas. Your PBX may use different telephone carriers to make calls to different areas in an effort to reduce costs.

Automatic Route Selection (ARS) is a feature which automatically selects different carriers each time a CO line call is made. In order to use ARS effectively, various ARS-related tables must be preprogrammed to tell the PBX which calls should be placed using which carriers, during which time of day.

If you do not activate ARS, if ARS is bypassed, or if you do not use multiple carriers, CO line calls will be connected via the carrier contracted for each line (default carrier).

16 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)

[Carrier Selection Procedure Flowchart]

The numbers in parentheses indicate the corresponding items found under [Programming Procedures] on the following pages.

An extension user accesses a CO line and dials a telephone number.

Is the ARS mode (1) enabled?

Yes

Is the dialed number found in the

Leading Number Exception Table (2)?

Is the dialed number found in the Leading Number Table (3)?

Yes

Checks the Routing Plan (4) to determine which carrier to use.

No (Normal CO Line Access)

Sends the telephone number as dialed.

Yes

Is the carrier found in the appropriate time block (4)?

Yes

Is there an available trunk group (5)?

Yes

Modifies the dialed number by removing the digits and following the modify commands (5).

Sends the modified number to the CO line.

Because all CO lines are busy?

Yes

Sends a busy tone.

Is normal

CO Line Access allowed?

Sends a reorder tone.

Yes

(default)

Sends the telephone number by the Idle

Line Access.

[Programming Procedures]

ARS Mode

ARS is turned on by selecting under which circumstances it operates – either when an extension user makes a call using the Idle Line Access method, or when any CO Line Access method is used (

® 3.1.16 CO

® 10.1 [8-1] System Setting— ARS Mode

® [320] ARS Mode

Leading Number Exception Table

Once ARS is activated, store the telephone numbers that will bypass ARS in the Leading Number Exception

Table.

Note that the first few digits (leading number) of a telephone number, such as an area code or local exchange, can also be stored, so that all calls to those areas or exchanges are exempted from ARS. Also

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 17

1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)

note that the CO Line Access number is always ignored by ARS and does not need to be programmed here.

Calls that are exempt from ARS are connected to the user-selected line, via the default carrier for that line.

[Programming Example: ARS Leading Number Exception Table]

Location

No.

555

556

567

Leading No.

Exception *1

® 10.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception

® [325] ARS Exception Number

In this example:

555, 556, and 567 are local exchanges. (555-XXXX, 556-XXXX, 567-XXXX)

These calls can be made using any carrier, and are therefore exempt from ARS.

Leading Number Table

Next, store the leading numbers of telephone numbers that should be routed by ARS, and assign a Routing

Plan to each leading number that will control how calls containing these leading numbers are routed.

When an extension user dials a number which contains a leading number stored in the ARS Leading

Number Table, the call will be routed the corresponding Routing Plan assigned here. Note that the CO

Line Access number is always ignored by ARS and does not need to be programmed here.

Before programming the details of each Routing Plan (explained below), you can simply assign here the same Routing Plan number to all the different leading numbers which will be routed the same way.

If a dialed number matches two or more leading numbers stored in the ARS Leading Number Table, the lowest numbered location will have priority.

[Programming Example: ARS Leading Number Table]

Location

No.

Leading

No.

1212

01181

01144

Additional

No. of Digits

Routing Plan

No.

® 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number—

Leading Number

® [321] ARS Leading Number

® 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number—

Additional Number of Digits

® 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number—

Routing Plan Number

® [322] ARS Routing Plan Table Number

Additional Number of Digits

In order for calls to be made using the desired carrier, telephone numbers dialed by extension users must be modified to meet the criteria required by the carrier. (Refer to 5. Carrier Table.) This modification usually involves removing digits and adding access codes to the beginning of the dialed number.

In situations where a preprogrammed number (such as an Itemized Billing Code) must be added automatically after the telephone number that was dialed by the extension user, set the Additional Number of Digits to a value greater than 0.

Routing Plan

18 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)

Since the preferred carrier may vary depending on the time of day, you can create an ARS-specific time table and break each day of the week into different time blocks. A different carrier can then be assigned to each time block.

Routing Plan Time Table: For each Routing Plan, a different carrier can be assigned for each time of day and each day of the week. Each day can have up to four programmable time blocks.

Routing Plan Priority: For each Routing Plan, a different carrier can be assigned a different priority for each time of day. Generally, the carrier assigned to priority 1 will be used, however, if the CO lines assigned to this carrier are busy, a different available carrier will be used according to priority level.

ARS Leading Number Table

Location

No.

Leading

No.

1212

01181

01144

Additional No.

of Digits

Routing Plan

No.

ARS Routing Plan No. 1

Monday

Time Table

Time Block A

Time Block B

Time Block C

Time Block D

9:00

12:00

17:00

23:00

Priority 1

Carrier A

Carrier C

Carrier J

Carrier

Priority 2

Carrier M

® 10.4 [8-3] Routing Plan Time—Time Setting

® [330] ARS Routing Plan Time Table

® 10.5 [8-4] Routing Plan Priority

® [331–346] ARS Routing Plan Table (1–16) (KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 only)

Carrier Table

Each carrier must be programmed in the Carrier Table. Here each carrier is assigned a carrier number, name, the CO lines it is used with, etc.

® 10.6 [8-5] Carrier—Carrier

Carrier Name: Assign a name for the carrier. Used only as a reference.

Trunk Group: Assign the trunk groups which can be used when making calls via this carrier.

Carrier Access Code: Enter the carrier’s access code. Consult carrier for details.

Removed Number of Digits: There may be circumstances where the user-dialed number must be modified in order for the carrier to connect the call. In this case, enter here the number of digits to be removed automatically from the beginning of the dialed number.

Modify Command: When a call is made using this carrier, the telephone number must be modified to meet the criteria required by the carrier in order to connect the call. Program here the commands needed to modify the user-dialed number as necessary.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 19

1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)

[Command Explanation]

Command

Description

Inserts the Carrier Access Code

Inserts the user-dialed number minus any removed digits

Analog Line: Inserts a pause

ISDN/T1 Line: Inserts a pause and changes dialing mode to tone (DTMF)

Inserts the Authorization Code for Tenant

Inserts the Authorization Code for Trunk Group

Inserts the Itemized Billing Code

[0-9, , #] You can enter any of these digits in a modify command

[Programming Example: Carrier Table]

Carrier Name

Trunk Group *2

Carrier Access Code *3

Removed No. of Digits *4

Modify Command *5

Carrier 1 Carrier 2

Carrier A Carrier J

1, 2, 3

0880

0700

CPH

In this example

Dialed number: 9-1-212-555-5555

Modification:

9 1 2125555555 0880 2125555555

Remove 1 digit

CO Line Access no. is ignored

Add the Carrier Access Code

® 10.6 [8-5] Carrier—Carrier—

Carrier Name

® [350] ARS Carrier Name

® 10.6 [8-5] Carrier—TRG 01–TRG 64 (KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200), or TRG 01–TRG 96 (KX-TDE600)

® [351] ARS Trunk Group for Carrier Access

® 10.6 [8-5] Carrier—Carrier—

Carrier Access Code

® [353] ARS Carrier Access Code

® 10.6 [8-5] Carrier—Carrier—

Removed Number of Digits

® [352] ARS Removed Number of Digits for Carrier Access

® 10.6 [8-5] Carrier—Carrier—

Modify Command

ARS Options

Authorization Code for Tenant

A Carrier Authorization Code can be assigned to each tenant.

® 10.6 [8-5] Carrier—Authorization Code for Tenant

Authorization Code for Trunk Group

A Carrier Authorization Code can be assigned to each trunk group.

® 10.8 [8-7] Authorization Code for TRG

20 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)

Itemized Billing Code

An Itemized Billing Code can be assigned for each extension and for each verification code.

If a call is not made from an extension, such as via Direct Inward System Access (DISA) or TIE line, and no verification code is used, the Itemized Billing Code assigned to location 1 in the Verification Code Table will be used.

® 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS Itemized Code

® 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS Itemized Code

® 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code— Itemized Billing Code for ARS

Conditions

CAUTION

The software contained in the ARS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognize newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service.

Failure to upgrade the premises PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognize the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and the customer’s employees from gaining access to the network and to these codes.

KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP-TO-DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA.

•

Logging Outgoing Calls by SMDR

Whether SMDR logs the user-dialed number or the ARS-modified number is determined through system programming. (

® 16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording))

® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—ARS Dial

•

ARS Data Import/Export

ARS tables and data can be copied to and from the PBX and a PC using the Maintenance Console software.

Files are saved in CSV (Comma Separated Value) format. Because of the large amounts of programming that may be necessary to use ARS effectively, you may choose to export ARS tables and data to a PC, edit them using the software of your choosing, then import the new data to the PBX. This is particularly convenient if you need to update your ARS tables for new area codes or telephone rates, or when you’d like to copy ARS tables from one PBX to another.

® 2.5.8 Tool—Import

® 2.5.9 Tool—Export

•

TRS

Toll Restriction (TRS) checks are performed before ARS number modification, so program TRS Denied

Code Tables and Exception Code Tables accordingly. (

•

When ARS Routing Takes Place

ARS routing takes place after the preprogrammed number of digits (leading number + additional number of digits) have been dialed.

PC Programming Manual References

2.5.8 Tool—Import

→ARS - Leading Digit

→ARS - Except Code

→ARS - Routing Plan

2.5.9 Tool—Export

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Extension Inter-digit

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 3— Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS Itemized Code

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS Itemized Code

8.3 [6-3] Verification Code— Itemized Billing Code for ARS

Section 10 [8] ARS

13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—ARS Dial

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 21

1.1.4 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

PT Programming Manual References

[320] ARS Mode

[321] ARS Leading Number

[322] ARS Routing Plan Table Number

[325] ARS Exception Number

[330] ARS Routing Plan Time Table

[331–346] ARS Routing Plan Table (1–16) (KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 only)

[350] ARS Carrier Name

[351] ARS Trunk Group for Carrier Access

[352] ARS Removed Number of Digits for Carrier Access

[353] ARS Carrier Access Code

Feature Manual References

® 16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail

1.1.4 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

Description

If the line is busy when a call is made, a callback ring can inform the caller when the line becomes free.

If the called party was another extension, or if the dialed number is handled by Automatic Route Selection

(ARS), the number is automatically redialed after the extension user answers the callback ring.

Conditions

•

If the callback ring is not answered within 10 seconds, callback is canceled.

•

If the extension hears a busy tone before dialing the telephone number, only the CO line or trunk group is reserved. After answering the callback ring, the extension should dial the telephone number.

•

An extension can set only one Automatic Callback Busy. The last setting is effective.

•

Multiple extension users can set this feature for the same CO line at the same time.

However, a maximum of four extension users can set this feature to one extension.

Callback ringing will be sent to extensions in the order that the feature was set. In other words, the extension that set the feature first will receive a callback ringing first.

•

This feature cannot be used for calls to a Voice Processing System (VPS).

PC Programming Manual References

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Automatic Callback Busy Cancel

4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Automatic Callback Busy

Operating Manual References

1.3.4 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)

22 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

1.1.6 Automatic Time Adjustment

1.1.5 Automatic Extension Release

Description

After going off-hook, if an extension user fails to dial any digits within a preprogrammed time period, the user will hear a reorder tone. This operation applies to intercom calls only.

This feature is also known as Automatic Station Release.

Conditions

•

A proprietary telephone (PT)/portable station (PS) user hears a reorder tone for a preprogrammed time period, and then the PT/PS returns to idle status automatically. A single line telephone (SLT) user will hear a reorder tone until he or she goes on-hook.

•

This feature works in one of the following cases:

When making an intercom call

The first digit is not dialed within a preprogrammed time period.

A digit is dialed, but subsequent digits are not dialed within a preprogrammed time period.

PC Programming Manual References

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone

→ Dial—Extension First Digit

→ Dial—Extension Inter-digit

→ Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Handset

→ Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free

1.1.6 Automatic Time Adjustment

Description

The PBX clock can be adjusted automatically in the following two ways:

Daylight Saving Time Setting

The start and end dates of Daylight Saving Time can be programmed. The PBX clock will automatically adjust itself one hour forward or backward at 2:00 A.M. on the programmed date, if enabled through system programming. At 2:00 A.M. on the start date, the clock will change to 3:00 A.M., and at 2:00 A.M. on the end date, the clock will change to 1:00 A.M.

Note

If a Timed Reminder (Remote Wake-up call) is set:

–

On the Daylight Saving Time start date, a reminder set for between 2:00 A.M. and 3:00 A.M. will not ring.

–

On the Daylight Saving Time end date, a reminder set for between 1:00 A.M. and 2:00 A.M. will ring twice.

Time Information from Telephone Company

Time information can be received when

–

An incoming or outgoing call through an ISDN line is received/made.

–

An incoming call through an analog line with Caller ID which includes time information is received.

The PBX clock will be adjusted everyday with the first call after 3:05 AM, if enabled through system programming.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 23

1.1.6 Automatic Time Adjustment

Note

If a Timed Reminder (Remote Wake-up call) is set, the setting will not ring or will ring twice depending on the adjustment.

Time Information through Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)

By connecting the PBX to an SNTP server, it is possible to receive and update the time setting. The PBX clock will be adjusted everyday at 3:05 AM, if enabled through system programming.

Conditions

[General]

•

Through system programming, it is possible to specify SNTP, ISDN, or neither method as the selected method of automatic time adjustment.

•

Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) will log call information using the PBX clock so that the logging time will be overlapped at the end of Daylight Saving Time. (

Recording))

[SNTP Time Information]

•

The time set through SNTP will apply the same to all PTs and IP-PTs connected to the PBX, regardless if an IP extension is located in another time zone.

PC Programming Manual References

4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—

Automatic Time Adjustment

4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving

Feature Manual References

9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES

17.1.4 Timed Reminder

24 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Section 2 Features and Configurations—B

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 25

2.1.1 BGM (Background Music)

2.1 B

2.1.1 BGM (Background Music)

Description

A proprietary telephone (PT) user can listen to background music (BGM) through the built-in speaker while on-hook and idle. The following audio sources are available for BGM:

•

External Music Source

•

Internal Music Source

•

Outgoing Message (OGM)

BGM—External:

BGM can also be broadcast in the office through external pagers (loudspeakers) and can be turned on and off by an extension assigned as a manager.

Conditions

[BGM]

•

Hardware requirement: User-supplied music source (when an external music source is assigned)

•

The music heard through the PT is interrupted when going off-hook.

•

Each extension user can select the audio source.

•

Through system programming, it is possible to specify the maximum number of IP-PTs connected to a

V-IPEXT card that can simultaneously perform the BGM feature. Changing this setting may affect the number of simultaneous IP extension and IP CO line calls available on the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card.

[BGM—External]

•

Hardware requirement: A user-supplied external pager

•

External pagers can be used with the following priorities:

Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

® Paging ® BGM

(

® 13.1.1 Paging, ® 17.1.2 TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station))

Installation Manual References

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

3.10.1 Connection of Peripherals

KX-TDE600

3.12.1 Connection of Peripherals

PC Programming Manual References

4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM

→ BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM2

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

→ External BGM On / Off

→ BGM Set / Cancel

4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH

→ MOH—MOH 1 (Music On Hold 1)

→ MOH—MOH 2 (Music On Hold 2)

7.2 [5-2] External Pager

26 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Operating Manual References

1.3.5 BGM (Background Music)

2.1.2 External BGM (Background Music)

2.1.1 BGM (Background Music)

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 27

2.1.1 BGM (Background Music)

28 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Section 3 Features and Configurations—C

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 29

3.1.2 Call Distribution Port Group

3.1 C

3.1.1 CA (Communication Assistant)

Description

Panasonic Communication Assistant (CA) is a CTI application usable with any telephone (except SIP extensions). A CTI server is not required to use CA. CA Client has 3 operating modes: Basic, Pro, and

Supervisor.

•

Basic Mode:

Only basic features are available, such as call control.

•

Pro Mode:

A pro user can see the presence (phone status and absent message) of other extensions.

•

ICD Group Supervisor Mode:

A supervisor can use this feature to monitor users within an ICD group from a PC.

Conditions

•

Activation keys are required to enable the application, some of which are preinstalled on the IPCMPR/

IPCEMPR card.

•

For details, refer to the documentation for CA.

Installation Manual References

3.8.4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection

PC Programming Manual References

3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR/IPCEMPR—Port Number— Built-in Communication Assistant

Server

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 9— Built-in Communication Assistant

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 9— Built-in Communication Assistant

3.1.2 Call Distribution Port Group

Description

It is possible to set which virtual port receives each call depending on the telephone number of the called party.

By assigning each port to a Call Distribution Port Group (CDPG), it is possible to select which group receives each call. CDPG settings cover all V-IPGW cards in the PBX, which allows for ports on different cards to be assigned to the same CDPG. In other words, two 8-port cards can be used as one 16-port card.

Programming Example:

To enable this feature, it is necessary to program the following 2 tables through system programming:

•

CDPG Table

- in order to assign ports to Call Distribution Port Groups.

•

Hunt Pattern Table

- in order to program a priority list of CDPG destinations for each leading number.

30 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

3.1.2 Call Distribution Port Group

[Programming Example of the CDPG Table]

V-IPGW Card Number

Port Number

Call Distribution Port Group

CDPG 1

CDPG 2

CDPG 1

CDPG 3

*1 ® 3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port—

Call Distribution Port Group

[Programming Example of the Hunt Pattern Table]

No.

Leading

Number

Call Distribution Port

Group (1st)

CDPG 1

Call Distribution Port

Group (2nd)

CDPG 4

2 20 CDPG 1 CDPG 2

300

CDPG 8

CDPG 11

…

Call Distribution Port

Group (16th)

CDPG 3

® 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern—Hunt Pattern 1–16—

Leading Number

® 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern—Hunt Pattern 1–16—

Call Distribution Port Group—1st–

16th

Note

The same CDPG can be set for several leading numbers.

Explanation:

As shown in the CDPG table above, CDPG 1 consists of Port 1 of the first card and Port 1 of the second card.

When "1023-456-7890" (leading number: 10) is dialed:

The leading number (10) is searched for in the Hunt Pattern

Table.

CDPG 1 is the 1st priority

CDPG.

The call is routed to

Port 1 of the first card.

Port 1 of the first card is busy.

The call is rerouted to

Port 1 of the second card.

Port 1 of the second card is available.

The call is answered.

If all the ports belonging to CDPG 1 are busy, the call is rerouted to the lowest-numbered available port belonging to CDPG 4, which is set as the second priority for this leading number.

Installation Manual References

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

3.4.1 Virtual Cards

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 31

3.1.3 Caller ID

KX-TDE600

3.4.1 Virtual Cards

PC Programming Manual References

3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port

3.13 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern

Feature Manual References

13.1.25 Private Network Features—VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol)

3.1.3 Caller ID

Description

The PBX can receive Caller ID information (a caller’s name and telephone number) from calls received on CO lines. This information can be shown on a proprietary telephone (PT) display when receiving a call and can be used to direct calls from specific callers to specific destinations automatically. Additionally, Caller ID information is logged in the Incoming Call Log of the extension which received the call, allowing the caller to view a record of incoming calls or make a call to a person in the call log later.

The PBX can be programmed to modify a caller’s telephone number when it is received and, for example, add a CO Line Access number or add/delete certain digits of incoming telephone numbers automatically. This allows an extension user to be able to make a call later to a telephone number logged in his or her call log without worrying about CO Line Access numbers, area codes, etc.

Note

•

The term "Caller ID" used in this Feature Manual refers to features that can receive caller information sent from the telephone company and received on analog, ISDN, and T1 lines. Your network provider may use a different name for this type of service.

•

To receive Caller ID information, you must subscribe to the telephone company’s Caller ID service and enable Caller ID for the appropriate CO line through system programming.

Caller ID to SLT Port:

Caller ID information can also be shown on a single line telephone (SLT) display. This feature is available only for SLTs compatible with FSK-type Caller ID.

Caller ID Features

There are three features which can receive Caller ID information. The available feature depends on the type of CO line receiving the call.

Feature Description Details in

Caller ID

Calling Line Identification

Presentation (CLIP)

Automatic Number

Identification (ANI)

Receives caller information sent from the telephone company over analog CO lines.

Receives caller information sent from the telephone company over ISDN lines.

Receives caller information sent from the telephone company over T1 lines.

–

® 17.1.1 T1

Line Service

32 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

3.1.3 Caller ID

Caller ID-Related Features

Feature

Calling Line Identification

(CLI) Distribution

Incoming Call Log

Description

Caller ID information received by the PBX is used to direct calls from specific callers to specific destinations. The caller’s telephone number and a destination must be assigned in the System Speed

Dialing Table.

Caller information is automatically recorded in the call log of the extension which received the call.

This information can be used to view a record of incoming calls or make calls to any number in the call log.

Details in

Automatic Caller ID Number Modification

When a call is received, the PBX can automatically modify the caller’s telephone number according to a preprogrammed set of rules (Caller ID Modification Table). This modified number will be automatically stored in the extension’s Incoming Call Log, allowing the extension user to make a call to this number later without worrying about CO Line Access numbers, area codes, etc.

Each trunk group can be assigned a modification table. Each table has ten formulas for modifying local/ international numbers, and one formula for modifying long distance numbers. When a call is received, the

PBX compares the received telephone number to the area codes programmed under "Local/International

Call Data" first. If a match is not found, the telephone number will be modified according to the method programmed under "Long Distance Code".

[Programming Example: Caller ID Modification]

<Table Selection>

Trunk

Group No.

Modification

Table

<Modification Table>

Modification Table 1

Area Code Removed No. of Digits Added No.

Local/International

212

3 0

Call Data 1

Local/International

Call Data 2

011

3 001

Local/International

Call Data 10

Long Distance

Code Data

[Not programmable]

Note

When Caller ID information is received from a call on an ISDN line and the call type is International,

National, or Subscriber, the following modification table is used instead of the above table:

<Modification Table>

International Call Data

National Call Data

Subscriber Call Data

Removed No. of Digits Added No.

0 011

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 33

3.1.3 Caller ID

Data entered under "Removed No. of Digits" and "Added No." for International, National, and Subscriber call data will be applied respectively to international, long distance, and local calls.

<Modification Flowchart>

A CO line call containing

Caller ID information is received.

Checks the Caller ID Modification Table assigned to the Trunk Group.

Yes

Is the caller's area code stored in the Caller ID Modification Table?

Modifies the number according to the method programmed in the corresponding

"Local/International Call Data" field.

Example:

Removed number of digits: 3

Added number: 9

Example:

Received number: 212 555 1234

Modified number:

9 555 1234

Modifies the number according to the method programmed in the "Long Distance

Code" field.

Example:

Removed number of digits: 0

Added number: 91

Example:

Received number: 313 555 1234

Modified number:

91 313 555 1234

Modification is complete.

Modified number is logged.

Modification is complete.

Modified number is logged.

System Speed Dialing Table

The System Speed Dialing Table can store telephone numbers, names, and CLI destinations for hundreds of callers.

Telephone Number: Contains a CO Line Access number and the caller’s telephone number. If

Automatic Caller ID Number Modification is used, telephone numbers should be stored in the System

Speed Dialing Table in their modified format in order for CLI distribution to function.

Caller’s Name: Shown on the display and logged (Incoming Call Log, Station Message Detail

Recording [SMDR]) when a call from this telephone number is received.

CLI Destination: The destination to which an incoming call from the stored telephone number is directed via the CLI distribution feature.

34 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

3.1.3 Caller ID

[Programming Example: System Speed Dialing Table]

Location

(System Speed

Dialing No.)

000

001

System Speed

Dialing Name

ABC Company

XYZ Company

Telephone No.

912125551234

913135551234

CLI Destination

200

300

® 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial—

CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number

® [001] System Speed Dialing Number

® 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial—

Name

® [002] System Speed Dialing Name

® 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial—

CLI Destination

Displaying the Caller’s Name

In addition to the System Speed Dialing Table, each extension can store names and numbers in Personal

Speed Dialing. Therefore, it is entirely possible for the same telephone number to be stored under a different name in different locations within the PBX.

When a call containing Caller ID information is received, the PBX will search for the caller’s name in the following order, then show that name on the display and log it via SMDR.

Personal Speed Dialing data of the extension which received the call

System Speed Dialing Table

The Caller ID information received from the telephone company

If a caller’s name is not stored in the PBX or sent from the telephone company, it will not be displayed or logged.

Conditions

[General]

•

Caller ID signaling type can be selected through system programming.

[Caller ID to SLT Port]

•

Hardware Requirement:

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200: An SLC8 card with an EXT-CID card installed, or a CSLC16 card

KX-TDE600: An SLC8 card with an EXT-CID card installed, a CSLC16 card, or an ECSLC24 card

•

When the caller’s number is sent to an SLT, a CO Line Access number can be automatically added to the telephone number through system programming for calling back.

•

When the caller’s number exceeds 16 digits, the SLT receives only the first 16 digits, not counting the preceding CO Line Access number (if it is programmed to be added).

•

If a call is transferred to an SLT, the transferring extension’s information will be shown on the SLT. If the transferring extension goes on-hook before the call is answered, the original caller’s information will be shown.

•

When Caller ID information such as "Private", "Out of Area", or "Long Distance" is received, this information will be shown instead of the caller’s number and name.

•

Even if the caller’s name is sent, the name may not be shown depending on the type of SLT.

•

Incoming Call Log information is not shown on the SLT.

•

Caller ID shows whether the call is an intercom or CO line call by default. This setting can be disabled through system programming.

•

A caller ID name received from the network via a PRI23 card will not be displayed on an SLT. However, if the received caller ID matches a System Speed Dialing entry, and a name is registered for that entry, it will be displayed.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 35

3.1.4 Call Hold

PC Programming Manual References

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous

→ Caller ID—Waiting to receive

→ Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— Private Network—Public Call through Private Network—Minimum

Public Caller ID Digits

4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings

5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Caller ID Modification Table

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8

→ Extension Caller ID

→ Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID

8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification

PT Programming Manual References

[001] System Speed Dialing Number

[002] System Speed Dialing Name

[490] Caller ID Signal Type

Feature Manual References

16.1.6 Speed Dialing, Personal

16.1.7 Speed Dialing, System

3.1.4 Call Hold

Description

An extension user can put a call on hold. The following Hold features are available:

Feature Description

Regular Hold

Exclusive Call Hold

Any extension can retrieve a held call.

Only the extension user who held the call can retrieve it.

The result of the holding operation can be determined through system programming. Pressing the HOLD button again just after the first time alternates the mode between Regular and Exclusive Call Hold.

Conditions

•

Call Hold Limitation

A proprietary telephone (PT) user can hold one intercom call and/or multiple CO line calls at a time. A single line telephone (SLT) user can hold either one intercom call or one CO line call at a time. By using the Call Park feature, PT and SLT users can hold multiple CO line calls and intercom calls simultaneously.

(

® 3.1.7 Call Park)

•

Music on Hold

Music, if available, is sent to the held party. (

® 11.1.4 Music on Hold)

•

Hold Recall

36 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

3.1.4 Call Hold

If a call on hold is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period, the Hold Recall tone is heard at the extension which put the call on hold. If the extension is engaged in a call, the Hold Alarm will be heard.

•

If an outside party is placed on hold and the call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period after the Hold Recall time expires, the call is automatically disconnected.

•

Automatic Call Hold

A PT can be configured through system programming to place the current call on hold when the PT user presses a CO, ICD Group, INTERCOM or PDN button to make or answer another call. If this feature is not enabled, the current call will be disconnected.

[Example of Automatic Call Hold]

It is possible to receive an incoming CO line call by pressing the flashing ICD Group button. The current intercom call (on the INTERCOM button) is placed on hold. To return to the held call, press the INTERCOM button.

•

Call Hold Retrieve Deny

Internal Call Block (

® 9.1.14 Internal Call Block) also determines which extensions’ calls an extension

user can retrieve, i.e., if extension 101 cannot call extension 201, then it cannot retrieve extension 201’s held calls either.

•

SLT Hold Mode

It is possible to choose how to hold and transfer a call with an SLT through system programming. The following methods are available:

Mode 1

Hold

Flashing the hookswitch

Going on-hook

Hold

(to be Retrieved from

Another Extension)

Flashing the hookswitch

Hold Feature No.

Going on-hook

Transfer to CO

Line

Flashing the hookswitch

CO Line Access

No.

Transfer to

Extension

Flashing the hookswitch

Extension No.

Mode 2

(Default)

Mode 3

Mode 4

Flashing the hookswitch

Hold Feature No.

Going on-hook

Flashing the hookswitch

Hold Feature No.

Going on-hook

Flashing the hookswitch

Hold Feature No.

Going on-hook

Flashing the hookswitch

Hold Feature No.

Going on-hook

Flashing the hookswitch

Hold Feature No.

Going on-hook

Flashing the hookswitch

Hold Feature No.

Going on-hook

Flashing the hookswitch

CO Line Access

No.

Flashing the hookswitch

Hold Feature No.

CO Line Access

No.

Flashing the hookswitch

Hold Feature No.

CO Line Access

No.

Flashing the hookswitch

Extension No.

Flashing the hookswitch

Extension No.

Flashing the hookswitch

Hold Feature No.

Extension No.

*1 These operations must be performed when the held call is intended to be retrieved from another extension using the holding extension number.

If one of the following occurs frequently with an SLT, choose "Mode 2", "Mode 3", or "Mode 4":

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 37

3.1.5 Call Log, Incoming a.

When an SLT user answers a call, a reorder tone is heard or no one is heard on the other end.

When an SLT user goes off-hook, a reorder tone is heard instead of a dial tone.

If a call is not terminated after going on-hook, the above cases occur. To avoid these problems, choose "Mode 2", "Mode 3", or "Mode 4". Every call will be terminated unless the Hold feature number is entered after flashing the hookswitch in Mode 2, Mode 3, and Mode 4.

•

Hold Alarm tone pattern has a default. (

® 21.2 Tones/Ring Tones)

PC Programming Manual References

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone

→ Recall—Hold Recall

→ Recall—Disconnect after Recall

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features

→ Call Hold / Call Hold Retrieve

→ Call Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Holding Extension Number

→ Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Held CO Line Number

4.18 [2-9] System Options

→Option 1— PT Operation—Automatic Hold by ICM / CO / ICD Group key

→Option 1— PT Operation—Hold Key Mode

→Option 5— SLT—SLT Hold Mode

PT Programming Manual References

[200] Hold Recall Time

Operating Manual References

1.3.6 Call Hold

3.1.5 Call Log, Incoming

Description

When a call containing Caller ID information is received by an extension, the information is shown on the telephone display, notifying the extension user of the caller’s identity. This information is also automatically logged in the Incoming Call Log of the extension, and can be viewed later or used to call that caller back.

Each extension and incoming call distribution (ICD) group has its own Incoming Call Log.

Call Log Button

The Call Log button will alert an extension user to any missed (unanswered) calls. A flexible button can be customized as the Call Log button, and will indicate the status of the Incoming Call Log for the extension or corresponding ICD group, as shown below.

Light pattern Status of the corresponding call log

Red on

Off

There are call records in the log which have not been viewed.

There are no new call records in the log.

38 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

3.1.5 Call Log, Incoming

John White

DEC.12 10:00AM MON

NEW: Not Answered

123456789

--- Caller's name (20 digits max.)

--- Date and time of a call received

--- Answering Status*

--- Caller's number (16 digits max.)

Call Log buttons

This extension

Incoming call distribution group

*: "

NEW" is displayed for call records which have not previously been viewed;

OLD" is displayed for call records which have previously been viewed.

Conditions

•

The following information is logged.

Telephone

KX-T7636/KX-T7633/

KX-T7630/KX-T7433

Information

KX-NT400/KX-NT300 series(except

KX-NT321)/KX-DT300 series

(except KX-DT321)/KX-NT136

3-line display PT except

KX-T7633/KX-T7630/

KX-T7433

KX-TD7695/KX-TD7685/

KX-TD7694/KX-TD7684/

KX-TD7690/KX-TD7680

6-line display PT

Caller's Name

Date/Time call received

Answered or

Not Answered

Confirmed or

Not Confirmed

Caller's Phone

Number

* 1

1-line or 2-line display PT

KX-NT321/KX-NT265/

KX-DT321

Wireless phone

(KX-TD7895/KX-T7885)

* 1

*1 If the caller’s name is not logged, the caller’s phone number is displayed.

If the caller’s name is logged, the caller’s phone number is not displayed.

•

If the answering destination is not the original extension (e.g., Call Pickup or FWD—No Answer), the call is logged in the Incoming Call Logs of both the original and the answering destination. If a call is forwarded to multiple extensions before being answered, the call is logged in the call logs of all the extensions it was forwarded to. If a call is forwarded to an ICD group and is not answered, the call is not logged in the call log for the ICD group.

•

Incoming Call Log for Calls to a PS

Each portable station (PS) also has an Incoming Call Log. When a call is directed to a PS, the call will be logged in the call log of the PS even when:

The PS is out of range.

The PS is turned off.

The Cell Station (CS) is busy.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 39

3.1.5 Call Log, Incoming

•

Display Lock

The Incoming Call Log of an extension can be locked through personal programming (Directory and Call

Log Lock) to prevent other users from viewing its contents. In this case, the Outgoing Call Log display, the

Personal Speed Dialing number display and the SVM Log display are also locked, and the voice messages in the user’s message box cannot be played back.

An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature. (

(Personal Identification Number))

•

Incoming Call Log Memory

The total number of incoming calls that can be logged by the PBX is limited. The maximum number of calls that can be logged in the Incoming Call Log of each extension and ICD group can be specified through system programming. When a call log is full, the oldest call will be replaced each time a call is received.

•

Automatic Caller ID Number Modification

If the PBX is programmed to automatically modify incoming telephone numbers, the modified numbers will be logged in the Incoming Call Log.

•

Incoming Call Log for Calls to an ICD Group

If a call directed to an ICD group is not answered, the call is logged in the Incoming Call Log of the ICD group. If the call is answered, it is logged in the call log of the answering extension only.

Through system programming, it is possible to select which Incoming Call Logs record call information when a member of an ICD group answers a call to the group:

–

Only the Incoming Call Log of the extension that answered the call.

–

Both the Incoming Call Log of the extension that answered the call and that of the ICD group.

PC Programming Manual References

5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Group Log / Group FWD— Incoming Call

Log Memory

5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous— Options—Call Log to ICD Group for

Answered Call

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

→Option 5— Incoming Call Display

→Option 6— Display Lock / SVM Lock

→Option 7— Incoming Call Log Memory

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

→ Type

→ Extension Number (for Call Log)

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

→Option 5— Incoming Call Display

→Option 7— Incoming Call Log Memory

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console

→ Type

→ Extension Number (for Call Log)

Feature Manual References

3.1.3 Caller ID

16.1.6 Speed Dialing, Personal

® 5.1.3 Executive Busy Override) or Data Line Security (®

Operating Manual References

1.4.1 Call Log, Incoming

3.1.2 Personal Programming

40 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

3.1.6 Call Monitor

3.1.6 Call Monitor

Description

Allows an extension user to listen to a busy extension user’s existing conversation. The user can hear the conversation but will not be heard. If desired, the monitoring user can interrupt the call to establish a three-party conference call.

Conditions

•

Class of Service (COS) programming determines extension users who can use this feature.

•

This feature is available only when the busy extension is in a conversation with another extension or outside party.

•

This feature will not function when the busy extension:

Has set Executive Busy Override Deny (

4.1.1 Data Line Security).

Is receiving an Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) (

Announcement)) or Whisper OHCA (

® 20.1.4 Whisper OHCA).

Is on a conference call (

® 3.1.18 Conference, ® 5.1.3 Executive Busy Override, ® 13.1.14 Privacy

Release).

Is on a doorphone call (

® 4.1.12 Doorphone Call).

Is using Live Call Screening (LCS) or Two-way Record (

® 19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital)

Integration).

Has a call on Consultation Hold (

® 3.1.20 Consultation Hold).

•

This feature stops when the busy extension user presses the following buttons during a conversation (

6.1.1 Fixed Buttons,

® 6.1.3 Flexible Buttons):

–

FLASH/RECALL button

–

HOLD button

–

TRANSFER button

–

CONF (Conference) button

–

DSS button

–

EFA button

–

Two-way Record button

–

Two-way Transfer button

–

One-touch Two-way Transfer button

–

Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button

PC Programming Manual References

4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Call Monitor

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Call Monitor

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

→Option 2— Data Mode

→Option 3— Executive Override Deny

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny

Feature Manual References

® 9.1.14 Internal Call Block) also determines which extensions’ calls an extension

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 41

3.1.7 Call Park

Operating Manual References

1.3.7 Call Monitor

3.1.7 Call Park

Description

An extension user can place a call into a common parking zone of the PBX. The Call Park feature can be used as a transferring feature; this releases the user from the parked call to perform other operations. A parked call can be retrieved by any extension user.

Conditions

•

Automatic Call Park

It is possible to select an idle parking zone automatically.

•

Retry

If the specified parking zone is occupied or there is no vacant zone for Automatic Call Park, the originator will hear a busy tone. Retrying is possible while hearing a busy tone by selecting another parking zone or a vacant zone.

•

Call Park Recall

If a parked call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period, the Call Park Recall tone will be heard at the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the extension which parked the call. If the destination is engaged in a call, the Hold Alarm will be heard.

•

If a parked CO line call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period (Default: 30 minutes), it is automatically disconnected.

•

Call Park Button

Pressing the Call Park button parks or retrieves a call in a preset parking zone.

Any flexible button can be customized as the Call Park button. It shows the current status of the preset parking zone as follows:

Light pattern Status

Slow red flashing

Off

A call is parked in the preset parking zone

There are no parked calls

•

Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) Button

Pressing the Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) button parks a call in an idle parking zone automatically.

Any flexible button can be customized as the Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) button.

•

Call Park Retrieve Deny

Internal Call Block (

user can retrieve from a parking zone, i.e., if extension 101 cannot call extension 201, then it cannot retrieve extension 201’s parked calls either.

PC Programming Manual References

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters

→ Recall—Call Park Recall

→ Recall—Disconnect after Recall

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Call Park / Call Park Retrieve

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

→ Type

42 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

3.1.8 Call Pickup

→ Parameter Selection (for Call Park)

→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)

6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

→ Type

→ Parameter Selection (for Call Park)

→ Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console

→ Type

→ Parameter Selection (for Call Park)

→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)

Feature Manual References

9.1.14 Internal Call Block) also cannot pick up calls ringing at those extensions.

Operating Manual References

1.3.6 Call Hold

3.1.8 Call Pickup

Description

An extension user can answer a call ringing at any other extension.

The following types of Call Pickup are available:

Type Description

Directed

Group

A specified extension’s call is answered.

A call within a specified call pickup group is answered.

Call Pickup Deny

An extension user can prevent other extensions from picking up calls ringing at his or her own extension.

Conditions

•

Call Pickup applies to:

Intercom, CO line, and doorphone calls

•

Internal Call Block

An extension which cannot call certain extensions based on Class of Service (COS) programming (

[Directed Call Pickup]

•

A user can also pick up a call to a specified extension by pressing the corresponding DSS button. This feature is only available when (1) the user’s extension is allowed to use this feature through COS programming, (2) DSS buttons for extensions or incoming call distribution (ICD) groups have this feature enabled through system programming, and (3) the light pattern of DSS buttons for incoming calls to extensions or ICD groups is set to "On or Flash" through system programming.

The light pattern of a DSS button for an incoming call to an extension or Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) group can be programmed through system programming. Call Pickup is available only when the DSS button is red flashing.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 43

3.1.9 Call Splitting

[Group Call Pickup]

•

A specified number of call pickup groups can be created, each of which consists of extension user groups.

One extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups. (

[Example]

Call Pickup Group 1 Call Pickup Group 2 Call Pickup Group 3

Extension User

Group 1

Extension User

Group 2

Extension User

Group 3

Extension User

Group 4

Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Extn. 106 Extn. 107

PC Programming Manual References

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features

→ Group Call Pickup

→ Directed Call Pickup

→ Call Pickup Deny Set / Cancel

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Call Pickup by DSS

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4

→ DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call

→ DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for Direct Incoming Call

→ DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for ICD Group Call

5.7 [3-3] Call Pickup Group

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Call Pickup Deny

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Call Pickup Deny

PT Programming Manual References

[650] Extension User Groups of a Pickup Group

Feature Manual References

Operating Manual References

1.3.9 Call Pickup

3.1.9 Call Splitting

Description

During a conversation, an extension user can call another extension while putting the original party on

Consultation Hold. The extension user can then alternate between the two parties and/or connect the original party with the third party.

44 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

3.1.10 Call Transfer

Conditions

•

When the extension user is having a conversation with one party, the other party is in consultation hold.

(

Operating Manual References

1.3.10 Call Splitting

3.1.10 Call Transfer

Description

An extension user can transfer a call to another extension or an outside party. The following features are available:

Feature

With Announcement

Without Announcement

Transferring method

Transfer is completed after announcing the transfer to the destination party.

Transfer is completed without an announcement.

After dialing the transfer destination, the originator can replace the handset once a ringback tone is heard.

Call Transfer with Announcement is also known as Call Transfer—Screened.

Call Transfer without Announcement is also known as Call Transfer—Unscreened.

Transfer Recall for Call Transfer without Announcement

If the transfer destination does not answer within the preprogrammed Transfer Recall time, the call will be redirected to the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the extension which transferred the call.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 45

3.1.10 Call Transfer

If the transfer destination has a destination set as Intercept Routing—No Answer, the call will be routed to that destination.

A call is transferred without announcement.

Does the transferrer have a Transfer Recall destination assigned?

Is the first transfer destination an extension?

Yes

Does the first transfer destination have a destination set as

Intercept Routing No Answer?

Yes

Is the intercept destination an extension, ICD group, or VM group?

Yes

The set extension, ICD group, or

VM group is memorized as the

Transfer Recall destination.

Yes

The transferrer is memorized as the

Transfer Recall destination.

Is the recall destination an extension, ICD group, or VM group?

Yes

The set extension, ICD group, or

VM group is memorized as the

Transfer Recall destination.

The Transfer Recall timer is started.

[Available destination]

Destination

Wired Extension (PT/SLT/SIP Extension/T1-OPX)

ICD Group

PS Ring Group

Floating Extension no. for SVM

VM Group (DTMF/DPT)

External Pager (TAFAS)

DISA

Analog/ISDN Remote Maintenance

Availability

(DPT only)

46 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

3.1.10 Call Transfer

Destination

Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.

Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. + Phone no.

Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line, Access with PBX Code)

Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line, Access without PBX Code)

Availability

If the transfer destination does not answer, the call is sent to Voice Mail and a message can be recorded in the mailbox of the transfer destination.

Conditions

•

When an extension is transferring a party to another destination, the party will be in consultation hold until they reach the transfer destination. (

11.1.4 Music on Hold). It is programmable whether a ringback tone or music is sent to the caller.

•

If Music on Hold is enabled, music can be sent to the held party while the call is being transferred (

•

If the transfer destination extension has set FWD to an outside party, the call will be transferred to the outside party. (

® 13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES)

•

Class of Service (COS) programming determines the extensions that are able to transfer a call to an outside party. COS can also prohibit transferring to an extension of another PBX via the TIE line service using the

PBX code method (Access with PBX Code). (

•

One-touch Transfer

One-touch Transfer can be performed by pressing a One-touch Dialing button that has been assigned the

TRANSFER command and the telephone number of the transfer destination. This is useful for transferring calls to an outside destination. (

® 11.1.2 MEMORY DIALING FEATURES)

•

Automatic Transfer by SDN Button or DSS Button

Pressing an SDN button or DSS button during a conversation with an extension or outside party can automatically transfer the call to the specified destination (

® 13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/

SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension). It is possible through system programming to prevent this

feature from operating for extension to extension calls.

PC Programming Manual References

4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM— BGM and Music on Hold—Sound on Transfer

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Recall—Transfer Recall

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Transfer to CO

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4

→ DSS Key—Automatic Transfer for Extension Call

→ Transfer—Transfer to busy Extension without BSS Operation

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Transfer Recall Destination

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Transfer Recall Destination

PT Programming Manual References

[201] Transfer Recall Time

[503] Call Transfer to CO Line

[712] Music for Transfer

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 47

3.1.11 CALL WAITING FEATURES

Feature Manual References

® 4.1.1 Data Line Security)

Operating Manual References

1.3.11 Call Transfer

1.3.49 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension

3.1.11 CALL WAITING FEATURES

Description

Used to inform a busy extension that another incoming call is waiting. The busy extension user can answer the second call by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold.

The following notification method can be assigned for each extension depending on the call waiting and the telephone type:

Call Waiting Tone: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker

OHCA: Voice from the built-in speaker

Whisper OHCA: Voice from the handset

Off: No notification.

Notification Method

Call Type

Intercom Call

CO Line Call

DPT

Call Waiting tone/

OHCA/Whisper

OHCA/Off

Call Waiting tone/Off

IP-PT

Call Waiting tone/

Whisper OHCA/Off

Other Telephone

Call Waiting tone/Off

Including a doorphone call, call via an incoming call distribution group, and a CO line call transferred from another extension.

Call Waiting is also known as Busy Station Signaling (BSS).

Conditions

•

Automatic Call Waiting

Through system programming, it is possible to select whether a call waiting tone is automatically sent to the extension when receiving CO line calls, doorphone calls, external sensor calls and hold-recall calls.

Through system programming, it is also possible to select whether extensions will receive Automatic Call

Waiting from intercom calls.

•

Call Waiting call for an extension in a VM group (DPT/DTMF) is not available.

•

Data Line Security

Setting Data Line Security cancels the Call Waiting setting. (

•

Caller Information

With the Call Waiting tone, the caller’s information flashes on the display for five seconds, followed by a

10-second pause, then flashes again for five seconds.

•

Call Waiting from the Telephone Company

Besides the Call Waiting service within the PBX, the Call Waiting tone offered by an analog line from the telephone company informs the extension user of another incoming CO line call that is waiting. He can answer the second call by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold using EFA. For details, consult your telephone company.

48 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

3.1.11 CALL WAITING FEATURES

Call Waiting Caller ID (Visual Caller ID):

When using the call waiting tone supplied by the telephone company over analog lines, the caller’s telephone number and name can be received. Either the name or the number will flash on the display for five seconds, followed by a 10-second pause, then flash again for five seconds.

Note that the received caller information will not be displayed on telephones or wireless phones connected to SLT ports.

•

OHCA and Whisper OHCA are enabled or disabled by the Class of Service (COS) of the calling extension.

•

OHCA and Whisper OHCA are not compatible with some telephone types. In such cases, a Call Waiting tone will be sent to the called extension.

Called Extension’s Call Waiting Mode

OHCA Mode of

Calling

Extension’s COS

Disable

OFF

Call Waiting

Tone

OHCA Whisper OHCA

Call Waiting tone Call Waiting tone Call Waiting tone

Enable

Call Waiting disabled

Call Waiting tone OHCA (or Call

Waiting tone)

Whisper OHCA (or

Call Waiting tone)

•

The notification receiving methods (call waiting tone, OHCA, and Whisper OHCA) are available when the called extension is having a conversation with another party. If the extension is not having a conversation but is unavailable to receive the notification (dialing a number, for example), the calling extension will be kept waiting until the called extension becomes available. Even while waiting, the calling extension will hear a ringback tone.

•

If none of these methods of receiving notification (call waiting tone, OHCA, or Whisper OHCA) are set at the called party, the caller will hear a reorder tone after trying to send a call waiting notification.

PC Programming Manual References

3.29 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type— Caller ID—Caller ID Signaling

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features

→ Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call

→ Automatic Call Waiting

4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

→ BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override

→ BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 5— Call Waiting—Automatic Call Waiting for Extension Call

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

→Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call

→Option 2— Automatic C. Waiting

→Option 4— Call Waiting Tone Type

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

→Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call

→Option 2— Automatic C. Waiting

→Option 4— Call Waiting Tone Type

Feature Manual References

3.1.5 Call Log, Incoming

3.1.12 Call Waiting Tone

12.1.3 OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement)

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 49

3.1.12 Call Waiting Tone

® 21.2 Tones/Ring Tones).

20.1.4 Whisper OHCA

Operating Manual References

1.3.12 CALL WAITING FEATURES

1.3.13 Call Waiting Tone

3.1.2 Personal Programming

3.1.12 Call Waiting Tone

Description

When an extension user attempts to call a busy extension (i.e., an extension that is ringing or having a conversation), a call waiting tone can be sent to the called extension to indicate another call is waiting.

Conditions

•

This feature functions only if the called extension has activated call waiting. If it is activated, the calling extension will hear a ringback tone.

•

One of two call waiting tones can be selected (Tone 1 or Tone 2) through personal programming (Call

Waiting Tone Type Selection).

•

A PT user can hear different Call Waiting tones for CO line calls and intercom calls if "Tone 2" has been selected through personal programming (Call Waiting Tone Type Selection). If "Tone 1" has been selected, the same Call Waiting tone will be heard for both CO line calls and intercom calls.

All Call Waiting tone patterns have a default (

PC Programming Manual References

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display

4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

→ BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override

→ BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

→Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call

→Option 2— Automatic C. Waiting

→Option 4— Call Waiting Tone Type

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

→Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call

→Option 2— Automatic C. Waiting

→Option 4— Call Waiting Tone Type

Operating Manual References

1.3.13 Call Waiting Tone

3.1.2 Personal Programming

50 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

3.1.14 CLI (Calling Line Identification) Distribution

3.1.13 CELLULAR PHONE FEATURES

Description

This PBX provides features to support the use of cellular phones and other outside destinations with the PBX.

Calls can be forwarded from virtual PSs to outside destinations such as cellular phones, and then answered as if the user was at an extension within the PBX.

The following features can be used with cellular phones and other outside extensions:

Feature Description & Reference

Outside Destinations in

Incoming Call Distribution

Group

Up to 4 cellular phones can be assigned as members of an

Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group, and receive calls to the group.

Cellular Phone XDP Parallel

Mode

® 9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations

A PT user can set up to 4 cellular phones to ring in parallel for incoming calls.

® 9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations

DISA Automatic Walking COS

Registered cellular phones are automatically recognized as PBX extensions when calling through DISA.

DISA Call Transfer From

Outside Destination

® 4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)

A cellular phone user who answers a CO line call forwarded from the PBX using DISA can transfer that call to an extension within the PBX. It is also possible to establish a Conference call, perform

Call Splitting, and page with a call on hold to transfer the call.

® 4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)

Conditions

•

The KX-NCS4910 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) for the KX-TDE100/

KX-TDE200, or the KX-NCS4950 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) for the

KX-TDE600 is required to use this feature.

Feature Manual References

19.1.2 Virtual PS

3.1.14 CLI (Calling Line Identification) Distribution

Description

Directs an incoming CO line call to a specific destination when the caller’s telephone number matches a number in the System Speed Dialing Table. Each telephone number in this table can be assigned its own Calling Line

Identification (CLI) destination.

CLI distribution allows you to direct calls from specific people to specific destinations, and has many applications. For example, you can program the PBX to automatically connect calls from priority clients to their sales representatives, or automatically connect mobile phone calls from an executive to his or her assistant.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 51

3.1.14 CLI (Calling Line Identification) Distribution

In order for CLI distribution to function, the PBX must receive Caller ID information from the telephone company.

CLI distribution works in conjunction with both Direct In Line (DIL) and Direct Inward Dialing (DID) distribution; it can be enabled or disabled for each CO line (for DIL) and for each DID number, for each time mode.

When a call has Caller ID information and CLI distribution is enabled for the current time mode, CLI distribution will direct the call to its destination, ignoring preprogrammed DIL or DID destinations.

[Programming Example: System Speed Dialing Table]

Location

(System Speed

Dialing No.)

000

001

System Speed

Dialing Name

ABC Company

XYZ Company

Telephone No.

912125551234

913135551234

CLI Destination

200

300

® 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial—

Name

® [001] System Speed Dialing Number

® 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial—

CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number

® [002] System Speed Dialing Name

® 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial—

CLI Destination

In this example:

If the caller’s telephone number is "1-212-555-1234":

The PBX looks for the number in the System Speed Dialing Table. (The CO Line Access number, "9", is disregarded.) The number is found in location 000.

If CLI distribution is enabled in the current time mode for the DID number or for the CO line carrying the call (for DIL distribution), the call is routed to its CLI destination, extension 200.

Conditions

•

If Automatic Caller ID Modification is used:

Store the modified number in the System Speed Dialing Table.

PC Programming Manual References

8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

→ Name

→ CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number

→ CLI Destination

12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL— CLI Ring for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

12.3 [10-3] DID Table— CLI Ring for DID—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

PT Programming Manual References

[001] System Speed Dialing Number

[002] System Speed Dialing Name

Feature Manual References

3.1.3 Caller ID

4.1.7 DIL (Direct In Line)

9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES

52 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)

16.1.7 Speed Dialing, System

3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)

Description

Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP):

The PBX can send a preprogrammed telephone number to the network when an extension user makes a call.

The called party can see the number on his telephone display before answering the call.

Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP):

The PBX sends a preprogrammed telephone number to the network when the extension user answers an incoming call. The caller can see the number of the answering party on his telephone display when the call is answered.

[CLIP Example]

1) Dials

"87654321".

2) "12345678" is displayed.

PBX

ISDN

Caller

CLIP No.: 12345678

Called party

CLIP No.: 87654321

[COLP Example]

1) Dials

"111222333".

ISDN

PBX

Called party

(CLIP/COLP No.:

111222333)

FWD, IRNA, etc.

Caller

3) "111222444" is displayed.

Answering party

(CLIP/COLP No.:

111222444)

2) Answers the call.

CLIP/COLP Number:

The telephone numbers sent to the network for CLIP/COLP can be assigned as follows:

•

CLIP/COLP number for each ISDN port (subscriber’s number).

•

CLIP/COLP number for each extension.

•

CLIP/COLP number for each incoming call distribution group.

Each extension can select either the CLIP/COLP number for the ISDN port or the extension to be used. The

CLIP/COLP number for the ICD group is used when making a call by pressing the ICD Group button or receiving a call which arrives at the ICD Group button.

Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) and Connected Line Identification Restriction

(COLR)

It is possible for each extension to prevent the sending of its telephone number to the network by pressing the

CLIR button, COLR button or entering the feature number.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 53

3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)

Conditions

•

The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company.

•

The CLIP/COLP number for the connected ISDN port can be used for the ISDN terminal devices which cannot be assigned their own CLIP/COLP number, such as a doorphone.

•

COLP/CLIR/COLR Assignment for Each Port

Each service can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN port of the PBX.

•

CLIR Button and COLR Button

It is possible to switch between CLIP and CLIR by pressing the CLIR button, and COLP and COLR by pressing the COLR button. A flexible button can be customized as the CLIR or COLR button.

•

The CLIP/COLP number must match the telephone number provided by the telephone company.

Otherwise it will be ignored or replaced by another number.

•

When using a private network, the extension number assigned for each extension through system programming is sent for CLIP/COLP. (

® 13.1.23 Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP (Calling/

Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification

Presentation))

•

When forwarding calls to a CO line, system programming selects whether the CLIP number of the calling party or of the forwarding extension is sent to the forward destination.

PC Programming Manual References

3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

→CO Setting— Subscriber Number

→Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT,

CCBS, E911

3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port— Subscriber Number

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features

→ COLR Set / Cancel

→ CLIR Set / Cancel

→ Switch CLIP of CO Line / Extension

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4

→ Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is transferred to CO (CLIP of Held Party)

→ Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO

5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main— CLIP on G-DN Button

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

→Main— Extension Number

→ISDN CLIP— CLIP ID

→ISDN CLIP— CLIP on Extension/CO

→ISDN CLIP— CLIR

→ISDN CLIP— COLR

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

→ISDN CLIP— CLIP ID

→ISDN CLIP— CLIP on Extension/CO

→ISDN CLIP— CLIR

→ISDN CLIP— COLR

6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Type

PT Programming Manual References

[003] Extension Number

[606] CLIP Number

54 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

3.1.16 CO Line Access

Feature Manual References

Operating Manual References

1.3.52 Private Network Features—CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)

1.3.53 Private Network Features—CLIR (Calling Line Identification Restriction)

1.3.55 Private Network Features—COLR (Connected Line Identification Restriction)

3.1.16 CO Line Access

Description

There are three methods of accessing a CO line.

Method

Idle Line Access (Local

Access)

Trunk Group Access

Description

Selects an idle CO line automatically from the assigned trunk groups.

Selects an idle CO line from the corresponding trunk group.

S-CO Line Access

Selects the desired CO line directly.

Operation

Dial the Idle Line Access number or press a L-CO button.

Dial the Trunk Group Access number and a trunk group number, or press a

G-CO button.

Dial the S-CO Line Access number and the CO line number, or press the

S-CO button.

Conditions

•

Class of Service (COS) programming determines the trunk groups available for making calls.

•

CO Line numbers can be referred on a CO line port basis.

•

Button Assignment

A flexible button can be customized as a G-CO, L-CO, or S-CO button as follows:

Type Assignable parameter

Loop-CO (L-CO)

Group-CO (G-CO)

Single-CO (S-CO)

Any trunk group that is made available for Idle Line Access through system programming is applied.

A trunk group is assigned.

A specified CO line is assigned.

It is possible to assign:

– the same CO line to the S-CO button and to a G-CO button.

– the same trunk group to more than one G-CO button.

– more than one L-CO button.

Dialing the CO Line Access number selects a CO button according to the following priority: S-CO

® G-CO

® L-CO

•

Direct CO Line Access

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 55

3.1.16 CO Line Access

If an extension user is on-hook when pressing an idle CO button, the proprietary telephone (PT) automatically enables hands-free operation mode. The user can dial without lifting the handset or pressing the SP-PHONE button or MONITOR button.

•

Group Hunting Order for Idle Line Access

An idle CO line is selected from the trunk groups assigned for Idle Line Access. If multiple trunk groups are available, the trunk group hunting sequence can be determined through system programming.

•

CO Line Hunting Order for Idle Line Access and Trunk Group Access

The CO line hunting sequence in a trunk group (from lowest numbered CO line, from highest numbered

CO line or rotation) can be determined through system programming.

•

A company name or customer name can be assigned on a CO line port basis so that the operator or extension user who is answering the call can view the destination which the caller is trying to reach before answering. This is useful, for example, when multiple companies share the same operator.

•

It is possible to identify the CO line port that has a CO line connected to it. This prevents extension users from originating a call to a CO line which is not connected.

PC Programming Manual References

3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— Connection

3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Connection

3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Connection

3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port— Connection

3.39 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port— Connection

3.43 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port— Connection

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features

→ Idle Line Access (Local Access)

→ Trunk Group Access

→ Single CO Line Access

4.13 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block

5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Line Hunting Order

5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

→ Type

→ Parameter Selection (for Single CO)

→ Parameter Selection (for Group CO)

6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

→ Type

→ Parameter Selection (for Single CO)

→ Parameter Selection (for Group CO)

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console

→ Type

→ Parameter Selection (for Single CO)

→ Parameter Selection (for Group CO)

10.1 [8-1] System Setting— ARS Mode

12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings— CO Name

PT Programming Manual References

[400] LCOT CO Line Connection

[401] LCOT CO Line Name

[409] LCOT CO Line Number Reference

[500] Trunk Group Number

56 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

3.1.17 CO Line Call Limitation

Feature Manual References

(Calling Party Control) Signal Detection), the CO-to-CO Line Call Duration timer should not be disabled,

Operating Manual References

1.2.1 Making Calls

3.1.17 CO Line Call Limitation

Description

CO line calls are limited by the following features:

Feature

Extension-to-CO Line Call

Duration

CO-to-CO Line Call (except

Unattended Conference Call)

Duration

Dialing Digit Restriction during Conversation

Description

If a call between an extension user and an outside party is established, the call duration can be restricted by the system timer selected for each trunk group. Both parties will hear warning tones at five-second intervals starting 15 seconds before the time limit. When the time limit expires, the line will be disconnected. COS programming determines whether this feature is enabled or disabled.

Whether this feature applies to outgoing calls only, or to both outgoing and incoming calls is determined through system programming.

If a call between two outside parties is established, the call duration can be restricted by the system timer selected for each trunk group.

Both parties will hear warning tones at five-second intervals starting

15 seconds before the time limit. When the time limit expires, the line will be disconnected.

If both parties involved in the CO-to-CO line call were established by an extension (e.g., an extension makes a CO line call, then transfers the call to an outside party), the time limit applied to the CO line call that was made first will be used.

While engaged in an incoming CO line call, the dialing of digits can be restricted. If the number of dialed digits exceeds the limitation, the line will be disconnected.

Conditions

•

During an Unattended Conference Call, the Unattended Conference Recall time is applied. (

3.1.18 Conference)

•

When using LCO lines that do not support Calling Party Control (CPC) signal detection (

® 3.1.22 CPC

as automatic end of call detection cannot be performed.

PC Programming Manual References

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Extension-CO Line Call Duration Limit

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 2— Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call

5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main

→ CO-CO Duration Time (*60s)

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 57

3.1.18 Conference

→ Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s)

9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous— Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits

PT Programming Manual References

[472] Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration

[473] CO-to-CO Line Call Duration

[502] CO Line Call Duration Limitation

Feature Manual References

3.1.18 Conference

Description

An extension user can establish a conference call by adding additional parties to an already existing two-party conversation. This PBX supports three-party through eight-party conference calls. Conferences with more than four parties are only possible when a PT or PS user originates the conference.

Unattended Conference:

The conference originator can leave the conference and allow other parties to continue. Establishing an

Unattended Conference allows the originator to return to the conference. Unattended Conferences can only be established by PT and PS users.

Conditions

•

When an extension is establishing a conference call the original party is put on hold.

•

CONF (Conference) Button

For a PT/PS which does not have the CONF button, a flexible button can be customized as the Conference button.

•

Unattended Conference Call Duration

The length of time that a conference call can remain unattended is restricted by the following timers:

–

Callback Start Timer

–

Warning Tone Start Timer

–

Disconnect Timer

These timers behave and operate according to the following chain of events:

When the unattended conference is established, the Callback Start Timer will begin.

When the Callback Start timer expires, the Unattended Conference originator’s extension will start to receive a callback ringing from the PBX and the Warning Tone Start Timer begins.

When the Warning Tone Start Timer expires, the remaining parties of the conference will start to hear a warning tone, the callback ringing will continue to be heard at the Unattended Conference originator’s extension, and the Disconnect Timer begins.

When the disconnect Timer expires, the conference is disconnected.

If the Unattended Conference originator returns to the conference before the line is disconnected, all timers are cleared.

•

For a Conference With Six or More Parties

The EECHO or ECHO card is required. Also the echo canceling function should be enabled through system programming.

58 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

3.1.19 Confirmation Tone

Installation Manual References

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

3.7.4 ECHO16 Card (KX-TDA0166)

KX-TDE600

3.9.6 EECHO16 Card (KX-TDA6166)

PC Programming Manual References

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf

→ Unattended Conference—Recall Start Timer

→ Unattended Conference—Warning Tone Start Timer

→ Unattended Conference—Disconnect Timer

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Transfer to CO

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 3

→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference

→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference

→ Echo Cancel—Conference

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type

6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Type

Feature Manual References

® 21.2 Tones/Ring Tones).

Operating Manual References

1.3.15 Conference

3.1.19 Confirmation Tone

Description

At the end of feature operations, the PBX confirms the success of the operation by sending a confirmation tone to extension users.

Type

Tone 1

Tone 2

Description a.

Sent when the setting is accepted.

Sent when a call is received in voice-calling mode (Alternate Receiving—

Ring/Voice). The caller’s voice will be heard after the tone.

Sent from an external paging device or an extension before being paged.

Sent when a call is received while an extension is in Hands-free

Answerback mode.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 59

3.1.20 Consultation Hold

Tone 3-1

Type

Tone 3-2

Tone 4-1

Tone 4-2

Tone 5

Description a.

Sent before a conversation is established when using the Paging feature.

Sent to the caller when a conversation is established with an extension in one of the following modes:

•

Hands-free Answerback mode

•

Voice-calling mode (Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice)

Sent when making a call to or from a doorphone.

Sent before a conversation is established when accessing the following features by the feature numbers:

•

Call Park Retrieve

•

Call Pickup

•

Hold Retrieve

•

Paging Answer

•

Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

Sent when a call changes from a two-party call to a three-party call (e.g.,

Executive Busy Override, Conference, Privacy Release, Two-way Record).

Sent when a call changes from a three-party call to a two-party call (e.g.,

Executive Busy Override, Conference, Privacy Release, Two-way Record).

Sent when a call is placed on hold (including a consultation hold).

Conditions

•

Confirmation Tone Patterns

All confirmation tone patterns have a default (

•

It is possible to eliminate each tone.

PC Programming Manual References

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 3

→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Called by Voice

→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer

→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-1 : Start Talking after Making Call / Call from Doorphone

→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-2 : Start Talking after Answering Call

→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference

→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference

→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 5 : Hold

3.1.20 Consultation Hold

Description

Consultation Hold is a condition that a party is in, when an extension is calling other parties in order to perform

Call Transfer, Conference, or Call Splitting. When the operation is completed or canceled, the consultation hold is released.

In Consultation Hold, the original call is treated as if it is on hold, allowing the extension to call a third party all on one line. In Call Hold, the party on hold and the third party are connected to the extension using separate lines.

60 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)

Feature Manual References

3.1.9 Call Splitting

® 9.1.14 Internal Call Block

3.1.18 Conference

3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)

Description

Each extension must belong to a Class of Service (COS). By assigning certain extensions to a COS, it is possible to control the behavior and privileges of extension users (allowing or denying certain extensions access to various features, extensions, and CO lines) depending on the duties appointed to them.

Many extensions can belong to the same COS by assigning each extension the same COS number, allowing the same restrictions and privileges to apply to a group of extensions.

The following features are controlled on a COS basis:

® 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)

® 4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb)—DND Override

® 3.1.8 Call Pickup

® 1.1.2 Account Code Entry

® 3.1.16 CO Line Access

® 5.1.3 Executive Busy Override

® 3.1.6 Call Monitor

® 12.1.3 OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement)

® 20.1.4 Whisper OHCA

® 17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)

® 5.1.4 Extension Dial Lock

® 20.1.1 Walking COS

® 3.1.17 CO Line Call Limitation

® 3.1.10 Call Transfer

® 4.1.11 Door Open

® 4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)

® 20.1.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

® 16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)—SMDR for Outgoing CO Line Calls

® 17.1.5 Time Service—Time Service Switching

® 11.1.1 Manager Features

® 13.1.30 PT Programming

® 13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension—SDN Key

mode, SDN Walking COS, and assigning SDN buttons through PT programming

Conditions

•

Walking COS

Extension users can make a call from extensions of a less-privileged COS by using their own COS temporarily. (

® 20.1.1 Walking COS)

PC Programming Manual References

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 61

3.1.23 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

PT Programming Manual References

2.1.8 COS Programming

[602] Class of Service

Feature Manual References

® 3.1.18 Conference), the line is disconnected. The

3.1.22 CPC (Calling Party Control) Signal Detection

Description

The Calling Party Control (CPC) signal is an on-hook indication (disconnect signal) sent from an analog CO line when the other party hangs up. To maintain efficient utilization of CO lines, the PBX monitors each line’s status and when CPC signal is detected on a line, the PBX disconnects the line and alerts the extension with a reorder tone.

Conditions

•

CPC signal detection is programmable for incoming CO line calls, and for outgoing CO line calls.

•

If your telephone company sends signals similar to CPC, it is recommended not to enable CPC signal detection on outgoing CO line calls.

•

If CPC signal is detected during a conference call (

remaining parties stay connected.

•

If CPC signal is detected during a call between a caller using the Direct Inward System Access (DISA) feature (

® 4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)) and an extension or an outside party, the line is

disconnected.

PC Programming Manual References

3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming

3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port

→ CPC Signal Detection (DID)—Outgoing, Incoming

→ CPC Signal Detection (LCO/GCO)—Outgoing, Incoming

PT Programming Manual References

[413] LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing

[414] LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time—Incoming

3.1.23 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)

Description

The PBX supports a CTI interface using the LAN port of the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card. The CTI interface allows extension users to make or receive calls with advanced features:

–

Extension users can make calls easily from a phone book in their PC.

62 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

3.1.23 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)

–

When an extension user receives an incoming call, detailed caller information can be displayed on the PC automatically.

A PC and CTI server application software, such as Panasonic Communication Assistant (CA), are required to use CTI features. The PC running the application monitors the status of the PBX and controls the PBX via the

CTI Server.

[Example]

PBX

CTI Server

LAN

IPCMPR

Card

PC PC

LAN

Conditions

•

CTI application software must be installed on the connected PC. In addition, some features may require a

KX-NCS4910 or KX-NCS4950 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version).

•

CTI Call control is not supported for SIP extensions.

For example, a SIP extension user cannot make or transfer a call using a CTI application.

•

Application Programming Interface (API)/Protocol

Type API/Protocol

Third Party Call Control

•

ECMA CSTA Phase 3

•

TAPI 2.1

•

A KX-TDE Series PBX can connect to one CTI server only.

•

For details about specific CTI features, refer to the manual for your CTI application software.

Installation Manual References

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

3.3.1 IPCMPR Card

3.8.4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection

3.10.1 Connection of Peripherals

KX-TDE600

3.3.1 IPCEMPR Card

3.10.4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection

3.12.1 Connection of Peripherals

PC Programming Manual References

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Dial Information (CTI)

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 63

3.1.23 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 6 (CTI)

64 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Section 4 Features and Configurations—D

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 65

4.1.2 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Assignment

4.1 D

4.1.1 Data Line Security

Description

Once Data Line Security is set on an extension, communication between the extension and the other party is protected from signals such as Call Waiting, Hold Recall and Executive Busy Override. Extensions which have devices connected to them such as modems or fax machines may set this feature to maintain secure data transmission, by blocking tones or other interruptions during communication.

PC Programming Manual References

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Data Line Security Set / Cancel

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2— Data Mode

Operating Manual References

1.3.17 Data Line Security

4.1.2 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Assignment

Description

It is possible to assign this PBX as a DHCP client, allowing IP addresses to be received from a DHCP server over a LAN.

Conditions

•

It is possible to enable this feature through system programming.

Notice

It is important to set your DHCP server to not change the IP addresses of the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR and

DSP cards once IP telephones are registered to the PBX. The IP telephones will not operate properly if these IP addresses are changed.

PC Programming Manual References

3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR/IPCEMPR—LAN Setting

→ DHCP Client

→ IP Address for IPCMPR Card (for KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200)/IP Address for IPCEMPR Card (for

KX-TDE600)

→ IP Address for VoIP-DSP

66 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

4.1.4 Dial Tone

4.1.3 Dial Mode Selection

Description

The dialing mode (rotary or tone) can be selected for each analog CO line through system programming regardless of the originating extension (under contract with the telephone company).

Mode Description

DTMF (Dual Tone

Multi-Frequency)

Pulse Dial (Rotary)

Numbers dialed by an extension user are transmitted to the CO line using analog tones.

Numbers dialed by an extension user are transmitted to the CO line using analog pulses.

Conditions

•

Pulse to Tone Conversion

It is possible for an extension user to temporarily switch from Pulse mode to DTMF mode in order to access special services such as computer-accessed long distance calling or voice mail services. To switch to

DTMF mode, wait for a preprogrammed time period (Default: 5 seconds) after the CO line is connected, or press . This feature works only on CO lines set to Pulse mode. DTMF mode cannot be changed to

Pulse mode.

•

It is possible to select a pulse rate for the CO line port which has been set to Pulse mode. There are two pulse rates: Low (10 pps) and High (20 pps).

•

It is possible to assign the minimum duration of the DTMF signal sent to the CO line port which has been set to DTMF mode.

PC Programming Manual References

3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port

→ Dialing Mode

→ DTMF Width

→ Pulse Speed

3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port

→ CO Dial Mode

→ DTMF Width

→ CO Pulse Speed

PT Programming Manual References

[410] LCOT Dialing Mode

[411] LCOT Pulse Rate

[412] LCOT DTMF Minimum Duration

4.1.4 Dial Tone

Description

The following dial tones inform extension users about features activated on their extensions:

Each dial tone type has two frequencies, such as dial tone 1A and dial tone 1B.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 67

4.1.4 Dial Tone

Type

Tone 1A/1B

Tone 2A/2B

Tone 3A/3B

Tone 4A/4B

Description

A normal dial tone is heard when:

No features listed for dial tones 2 through 4 has been set, or

Automatic Route Selection (ARS) is used.

This tone is heard when:

•

There are messages that have previously been listened to and no new

messages recorded by the Simplified Voice Message (SVM) feature.

•

Any of the features below are set.

•

Absent Message

•

BGM

•

Call Forwarding (FWD)

•

Call Pickup Deny

•

Call Waiting

•

Do Not Disturb (DND)

•

Extension Dial Lock

•

Executive Busy Override Deny

•

Hot Line

•

Timed Reminder

This tone is heard when:

•

A called PS is being searched for.

•

The recording time used by the Simplified Voice Message (SVM) feature

reaches the limit.

•

Any of the features below are performed.

•

Account Code Entry

•

Consultation Hold

•

Answering a Timed Reminder call with no message

This tone is heard when new messages have been recorded for the extension.

*1 Active even when distinctive dial tones are disabled.

Conditions

•

Dial Tone Type A/B

Through system programming, it is possible to select dial tone type A or B for dial tones 1 through 4.

If "Type A" is selected, all dial tones 1 through 4 will become dial tone type A.

The dial tone type for the ARS feature can be selected separately. If "Type A" is selected for ARS, dial tone 1A will be heard. If "Type B" is selected, dial tone 1B will be heard.

•

Distinctive Dial tone

Distinctive dial tones can be disabled. When disabled, dial tone 1 will be heard in all cases except those marked with "*1" in the table above.

•

Dial Tone Patterns

All dial tone patterns have a default (

® 21.2 Tones/Ring Tones).

•

Only dial tone 1 is sent to the extensions in a VM (DPT/DTMF) group. (

® 19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group)

PC Programming Manual References

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 3

→ Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone

68 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

4.1.5 Dial Tone Transfer

→ Dial Tone—Dial Tone for Extension

→ Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS

4.1.5 Dial Tone Transfer

Description

An extension assigned as the manager can change the TRS level (

® 17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)) for an

extension user temporarily. After that, the extension user can make his call.

[Example]

A hotel guest calls the front desk and asks for the telephone’s toll restriction to be lifted in order to make an international call.

(3) Make a CO line call

(2) Change

TRS level

Guest Room

(CO line call restricted)

(1) Call

Toll Restriction button

Front Desk

(Extension assigned as a manager)

Conditions

•

The modified TRS level only applies to the next one call placed at the user’s extension.

•

Toll Restriction Button

A manager extension must store the TRS level granted by the Dial Tone Transfer beforehand, when assigning a flexible button as the Toll Restriction button.

PC Programming Manual References

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

→ Type

→ Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)

6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

→ Type

→ Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console

→ Type

→ Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)

Feature Manual References

Operating Manual References

2.1.1 Dial Tone Transfer

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 69

4.1.6 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)

4.1.6 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)

Description

Directs a call on a public CO line assigned as a Direct Inward Dialing (DID) line to a preprogrammed destination according to the call’s DID number, which is based on the telephone number dialed by the caller. When a call reaches its destination via DID distribution, the DID name will be displayed on the proprietary telephone (PT), allowing extension users to easily see whom a call is directed to. Each DID number has a destination for each time mode.

DID distribution allows you to use your telephone numbers for specific purposes. For example, you can direct calls from customers’ fax machines to your office fax machine automatically, or allow your overseas customers to be automatically connected to specific operators. Incoming calls with DID numbers that match extension numbers at this PBX will be sent to the corresponding extension. Incoming calls with DID numbers that match extensions at other PBXs or CO line access numbers will be sent to the corresponding TIE line or CO line.

[Method Flowchart]

A CO line call is received on a DID line.

Is the DID number found in the DID Table?

Yes

Does the call have Caller ID information and is CLI distribution enabled for the DID number in the current time mode?

Yes

Does the DID number match an extension number?

Yes

The call is routed to the extension.

Yes

Has the caller been stored in the System Speed

Dialing Table and has a CLI destination been assigned?

The call is routed to its

CLI destination.

Is a DID destination assigned for the current time mode?

Yes

The call is routed to the

DID destination.

Does the DID number match an extension number at another PBX or CO

Line Access no.?

The call is routed to an operator (Intercept

Routing—No Destination).

The call is routed to the TIE line or

CO line.

Yes

70 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

4.1.6 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)

[Programming Example: DID Table]

Location

DID No.

123-4567

123-2468

DID

Name

Sales

Judy

Day

Enable

CLI Distribution

Lunch Break

Disable Enable

Night

Disable

Enable Disable Disable Disable

Day

105

102

DID Destination

Lunch Break

100 105

100 102

Night

100

® 12.3 [10-3] DID Table—

DID Number

® [451] DID Number

® 12.3 [10-3] DID Table—

DID Name

® [452] DID Name

® 12.3 [10-3] DID Table—

CLI Ring for DID—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

® 12.3 [10-3] DID Table—

DID Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

® [453] DID Destination

In this example:

If the DID number is "123-4567":

The PBX looks for the DID number in the table and finds it in location 1.

The PBX checks the time mode.

In day mode: Calling Line Identification (CLI) distribution is enabled. The call is routed to its CLI destination, if assigned. If not assigned, the call is routed to the DID destination, extension 105, and "Sales" is displayed.

In lunch mode: CLI distribution is disabled. The call is routed to the DID destination, extension 100, and "Sales" is displayed.

Note

Tenant numbers and VM trunk group numbers (not shown here) can also be programmed in the DID

Table.

The tenant number programmed here is used only to determine the Time Table used by each DID number; selecting tenant 3 means the DID number will use Time Table 3, for example. The VM trunk group number set here is used to determine the Incoming Call Service and greeting message used by the Voice

Processing System (VPS) during the current time mode. (

3.1.14 CLI (Calling Line Identification) Distribution

Conditions

•

To use this feature, DID must be assigned as the distribution method for the desired CO line port.

PC Programming Manual References

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—DID

12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DID/TIE

→ Distribution Method

→ DID/TIE—Remove Digit

→ DID/TIE—Additional Dial

12.3 [10-3] DID Table

PT Programming Manual References

[451] DID Number

[452] DID Name

[453] DID Destination

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 71

4.1.7 DIL (Direct In Line)

Feature Manual References

9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES

17.1.5 Time Service

System (VPS) during the current time mode. (19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration)

4.1.7 DIL (Direct In Line)

Description

Directs an incoming public CO line call to a preprogrammed destination based on the CO line carrying the call.

Each CO line has a destination for each time mode.

[Method Flowchart]

A CO line call is received.

Does the call have

Caller ID information and is CLI distribution enabled for the CO line in the current time mode?

Yes

The call is routed to its

CLI destination.

Has the caller been stored in the System Speed

Dialing Table and has a CLI destination been assigned?

Is a DIL destination assigned for the current time mode?

Yes

The call is routed to the

DIL destination.

The call is routed to an operator (Intercept

Routing—No Destination).

72 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

4.1.7 DIL (Direct In Line)

[Programming Example: DIL Table]

The table can be programmed for each CO line.

Port No.

(CO Line No.)

Day

Enable

CLI Distribution

Lunch Break

Disable Enable

Night

Disable

02 Enable Disable Disable Disable

Day

101

102

DIL Destination *1

Lunch Break

100 101

100 102

Night

100

® 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL—

DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

® [450] DIL 1:1 Destination

In this example:

If a CO line call is received on CO line 01:

In day mode: Calling Line Identification (CLI) distribution is enabled. The call is routed to its CLI destination, if assigned. If not assigned, the call is routed to the Direct In Line (DIL) destination, extension 101.

In lunch mode: CLI distribution is disabled. The call is routed to the DIL destination, extension 100.

Note

Tenant numbers and VM trunk group numbers (not shown here) can also be programmed in the DIL

Table.

The tenant number programmed here is used only to determine the Time Table used by each CO line; selecting tenant 3 means the CO line will use Time Table 3, for example. The VM trunk group number set here is used to determine the Incoming Call Service and greeting message used by the Voice Processing

Conditions

•

To use this feature, DIL must be assigned as the distribution method for the desired CO line port.

PC Programming Manual References

12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL

→ DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

→ Tenant Number

→ VM Trunk Group No.

PT Programming Manual References

[450] DIL 1:1 Destination

Feature Manual References

3.1.14 CLI (Calling Line Identification) Distribution

9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES

17.1.5 Time Service

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 73

4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)

4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)

Description

An outside caller can access specific PBX features as if the caller is an SLT extension user in the PBX, when the incoming call destination is a DISA floating extension number assigned to each DISA message. The caller can have direct access to features such as:

•

Placing an intercom call to an extension, operator or any floating extensions (e.g., modem for remote system administration, an external pager for TAFAS).

•

Calling an outside party via the PBX.

•

Operating some PBX remote features (e.g., FWD).

74 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)

[Flowchart]

A DISA call from an outside party is received.

Is there a port available?

Yes

(DISA Delayed

Answer time expires)

The PBX answers the call.

(DISA Mute & OGM Start Time

after Answering expires)

The OGM plays and the PBX starts to receive the DTMF signaling.

The call is routed to an operator, etc. (DISA Intercept when All

DISA Ports are busy)

Is the first digit dialed?

(DISA First Digit Time

When No Dial expires)

What method is assigned for

DISA Intercept Routing No Dial?

Operator

The call is routed to an operator.

Disable

The call is disconnected.

AA-0, AA-9

The call is redirected to the destination assigned to AA-0 or AA-9.

Yes

The OGM stops.

C C

Is a second digit dialed?

(DISA Second Digit Time for

Automated Attendant expires)

Yes

The PBX receives the dialed digits and checks the dialed number.

Is the first dialed digit assigned a destination for the DISA AA service?

Yes

The call is routed to the destination.

What is the DISA security mode?

Continued on next page

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 75

4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)

What is the dialed number?

Extension No./

Floating

Extension No.

CO Line Access No.

+ Telephone No.

Feature No.

(Absent Message,

FWD, etc.)

Other

The feature is set.

The dialed number is sent to the CO line.

Continued from previous page

CO Line Security

Is the dialed number an extension number or floating extension number?

All Security

Yes

Is the Walking COS/Verification

Code Entry feature number dialed?

Yes

Is the correct

PIN entered?

Reorder tone

Yes

Does the caller press while hearing the reorder tone (Call Retry)?

Yes

The call is disconnected.

(DISA Reorder

Tone time

expires)

Is the extension in DND mode?

Yes

Is the extension busy?

The call is directed to the extension.

The caller hears a ringback tone.

Yes

Is Call Waiting mode on?

Yes

Does the caller press while hearing a ringback tone (Call Retry)?

Yes

Does the destination answer the call?

Yes

The call is established.

(DISA Intercept

time expires)

The call is routed to the intercept destination.

(DISA Intercept Routing

No Answer)

Does the destination answer the call?

Yes

(DISA Disconnect

Time after

Intercept expires)

Continued on next page

The call is established.

The call is disconnected.

Feature numbers are available only when the Walking COS feature is used.

Continued on next page

76 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)

Continued from previous page

Intercept Routing

What method is assigned for DISA Intercept

Routing DND?

Busy tone OGM

(Busy Tone /

DND Tone

Continuation

time expires)

Does the caller press while hearing a busy tone (Call Retry)?

Yes

The message for the DND mode is sent to the caller.

The call is disconnected.

The call is routed to the intercept destination.

(Intercept Routing DND)

Is an Intercept

Routing Busy destination assigned?

Yes

The call is routed to the intercept destination.

(Intercept Routing Busy)

Is a DISA Busy

Message assigned?

Yes

The message for busy is sent to the caller.

Busy tone

(Busy Tone /

DND Tone

Continuation

time expires)

Does the caller press while hearing a busy tone (Call Retry)?

Yes

The call is disconnected.

DISA Intercept Routing—No Dial

If the caller fails to dial any digits within a preprogrammed time period (DISA 1st Dial Time for Intercept) after hearing the outgoing message (OGM), one of the following can be selected through system programming:

Disable: The call will be terminated.

Operator: The call will be redirected to the operator.

AA-0, AA-9: The call will be redirected to the destination assigned to that AA number.

® 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— DISA—No Dial Intercept Timer

® [211] DISA Intercept Time

® 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1— DISA Intercept—Intercept when No Dial after

DISA answers

DISA Built-in Automated Attendant Number (DISA AA Service)

After listening to the outgoing message (OGM), the caller may dial a single digit (DISA AA number). The destination for each DISA AA number can be assigned for each message. It is also possible to assign other

DISA floating extension numbers as the destination (Multistep DISA AA Service).

If the caller dials a second digit within a preprogrammed time period (DISA 2nd Dial Time for AA), the DISA

AA service is not employed.

7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message— 1 Digit AA Destination (Extension Number)—Dial 0–9

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA

Outgoing Message (OGM)

When a call arrives on a DISA line, a prerecorded DISA message will greet and guide the caller.

Any extension assigned as the manager can record outgoing messages (OGMs). (

® 12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing

Message))

[Programming Example]

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 77

4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)

Outgoing

Message

(OGM)

No.

Floating

Extn. No.

501

502

Automated Attendant No.

100 301 200 103 202 101 102 400 104 205

® 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message—

Floating Extension Number

® [730] Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number

® 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message—

1 Digit AA Destination (Extension Number)—Dial 0–9

® 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message—

Busy / DND Message No.

DISA Security Mode and Available Features

If the DISA AA service is not employed, the caller may access the PBX features by entering the feature numbers. To prevent others from accessing the PBX features, it is possible to assign DISA security.

® 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System— DISA Security—DISA Security Mode

® [732] DISA Security Mode

The features available depend on the preprogrammed DISA security mode as follows:

TIE Line Call

Security Mode

Intercom

Call

Without PBX Code With PBX Code

CO Line Call

All Security

CO Line Security

No Security

ü ü ü

Busy/

DND

Message

No.

ü : Available

*1 If CO line call is available, Account Code Entry (

® 1.1.2 Account Code Entry) is also available.

Note

DISA AA service and Operator Call (

® 12.1.5 Operator Features) are available for any security mode.

Security Mode Override by Verification Code Entry

If the caller performs Verification Code Entry (

® 19.1.1 Verification Code Entry) while hearing a DISA

message, the security mode can be temporarily changed to No Security mode.

Entry method:

Verification Code Entry feature number + + verification code + verification code PIN

After changing mode, the new mode remains in force for the duration of the call.

DISA Intercept Routing—Busy

If the first destination called by the outside party is busy, the call is redirected as follows:

The call is redirected to the Intercept Routing—Busy destination assigned to the first destination.

If an Intercept Routing—Busy destination is not assigned to the first destination and a prerecorded DISA

Busy Message is assigned, the caller will hear the DISA Busy Message.

If neither an intercept destination nor a DISA Busy Message is assigned, the caller will hear a busy tone.

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When

Called Party is Busy

78 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)

DISA Intercept Routing—DND

If the destination called by the outside party is in DND mode and Idle Extension Hunting is not available, one of the following can be selected through system programming:

Busy Tone: The caller will hear a busy tone.

Enable: DND will redirect the call to the preprogrammed destination on an extension basis.

OGM: An outgoing message (OGM) will be sent to the caller. The message for DND mode can be assigned for each outgoing message (OGM) which has a DISA floating extension number.

7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System— DISA Intercept—Intercept when destination through DISA sets

DND

DISA Intercept Routing—No Answer

If a destination is not available to answer a DISA call within a preprogrammed time period (DISA Intercept time) after the call is reached, the call will be redirected to the programmed destination by the Intercept feature.

If the intercept destination is not available to answer the call within a preprogrammed time period (DISA

Disconnect Time after Intercept) after the DISA Intercept time expires, the call will be disconnected.

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf

® DISA—Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

® DISA—Disconnect Timer after Intercept

® [604] Extension Intercept Destination

Walking COS Through DISA

If the caller performs Walking COS (extension number and PIN entry) while hearing a DISA message, the security mode can be temporarily changed to No Security mode (

® 20.1.1 Walking COS). After performing

Walking COS, the following features are available, using the settings of the specified extension:

•

Intercom call

•

TIE line call

•

CO line call

•

Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) setting (

® 4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb), ® 6.1.6 FWD

(Call Forwarding))

•

Incoming Call Distribution Group Log-in/Log-out (

® 9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out)

•

Absent Message setting (

® 1.1.1 Absent Message)

•

Extension Dial Lock (

•

Time Service Switching Mode (

® 3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation))

Note

When making a CO line call using Walking COS through DISA, the CLIP number for that call will be that of the extension seized by Walking COS. (

DISA Automatic Walking COS

Registered outside destinations such as cellular phones can be automatically recognized as PBX extensions when calling through DISA. When the Caller ID of a received CO line call matches an entry in the System

Speed Dialing Table, the calling telephone is given Walking COS authorization as assigned to the corresponding CLI destination extension. Therefore, the "CLI destination" setting in the System Speed Dialing

Table is used here to specify the target extension that the calling telephone will be recognized as for Walking

COS.

[Programming Example of DIL Table]

CLI DIL Destination

CO Line

No.

Day Lunch ...

...

01 Disable Disable ...

Day

501

(DISA)

Lunch

501

(DISA)

...

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 79

4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)

CO Line

No.

Day

CLI

Lunch

...

Day

DIL Destination

Lunch

...

"CLI" must be set to Disable, to allow incoming calls to be received by DISA.

12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

→

DIL— DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

→

CLI for DIL— CLI Ring for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

[Programming Example of System Speed Dialing Table]

Location

000

Name

J. Smith

CO Line Access +

Telephone Number

912341115678

001

: :

CLI Destination

200

8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

→

CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number

→

CLI Destination

In this example, calls received on CO line 01 are routed to the DISA OGM with floating extension number 501.

If the number of the received call (after modification according to the Caller ID table) is "1-234-111-5678", the call originator is recognized as extension 200, and the Walking COS feature is automatically activated.

System programming is required to enable this feature.

SMDR

The call information for DISA is recorded as the one of the DISA floating extension numbers. (

® 16.1.3 SMDR

(Station Message Detail Recording))

Conditions

CAUTION

There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made using the CO-to-CO Line Call feature of DISA.

The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.

To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:

Enabling DISA security (CO Line Security or All Security).

Keeping passwords (verification code PINs/extension PINs) secret.

Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.

Changing PINs regularly.

•

Hardware Requirement:

An OPB card, and MSG4 card or ESVM4 card

•

DISA Delayed Answer Time

It is possible to set the Delayed Answer time so that the caller will hear a ringback tone within a preprogrammed time period first before hearing an outgoing message (OGM).

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Recall—Hold Recall

[209] DISA Delayed Answer Time

•

Call Retry

80 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)

While hearing a ringback, reorder, or busy tone, retrying the call is possible by pressing " ". System programming selects whether pressing " " during a CO-to-CO line conversation returns to the DISA top menu or sends a DTMF tone.

•

DISA Mute Time

It is possible to set the Mute time until the outgoing message (OGM) plays and the PBX starts to receive the DTMF signaling after the caller reaches the DISA line.

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— DISA—Mute & OGM Start Timer after answering

•

End of Call Detection

If a call through DISA is routed to a CO line, DISA can be used to detect the end of the call. This function can be disabled through system programming. If disabled, DISA is released when the CO-to-CO line connection is made.

7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1

→

CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Public CO

→

CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Private Network

The following three types of tone detection can be enabled for each trunk group to disconnect a CO-to-CO line call via DISA.

–

Silence Detection

→

5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection— DISA Tone Detection—Silence

→

[475] DISA Silence Detection

–

Continuous Signal Detection

→

5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection— DISA Tone Detection—Continuous

→

[476] DISA Continuous Signal Detection

–

Cyclic Signal Detection

→

5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection— DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic

→

[477] DISA Cyclic Signal Detection

•

CO-to-CO Line Call Duration Limitation

For a call between two outside parties, even if end of call detection cannot be performed, the call can be disconnected by a system timer (

® 3.1.17 CO Line Call Limitation). If the timer expires, the line will be

disconnected unless the originating caller extends the time by sending any DTMF signaling. The caller can prolong the call duration within the preprogrammed time period and preprogrammed number of times.

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf

→

DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Counter

→

DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time

® [210] DISA CO-to-CO Line Call Prolong Time

•

Automatic DISA Activation

DISA can be set through system programming to automatically activate for the following types of CO-to-CO line calls, to enable detection of the end of the call.

–

When a CO line call is forwarded to another CO line

–

When a CO line call is transferred to another CO line

–

When a CO line call to an incoming call distribution group is answered by an outside destination member

7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1

→

CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Public CO

→

CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Private Network

Before the call is made, the PBX confirms that a DISA port is available. If no DISA ports are available, the call is not routed to a CO line. For transferred calls or calls to an ICD Group, if the DISA port has become unavailable when the CO-to-CO line conversation is actually established, the call is established without

DISA.

When using this feature, the CO-to-CO Line Call Limitation timer should be enabled. In addition, prolonging the call through DTMF signaling is not available.

•

DISA Call Transfer from Outside Destination

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 81

4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)

An outside party such as a cellular phone can transfer a CO line call to an extension at the PBX by pressing "#" + extension number, if DISA is connected by the Automatic DISA Activation feature. This feature can be enabled or disabled through system programming. It is also possible to establish a

Conference call (

® 3.1.18 Conference), perform Call Splitting (® 3.1.9 Call Splitting), and page with a

call on hold to transfer the call (

® 13.1.1 Paging).

7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1

→

CO-CO with DISA—Transfer by DTMF "#" (Activation Key Required)

→

CO-CO with DISA—Return to DISA Top Menu by DTMF "*"

–

The KX-NCS4910 or KX-NCS4950 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) is required to use this feature.

–

DISA security mode should be set to No Security or CO Line Security.

–

If the called extension does not answer, is busy, or is in DND mode, the DISA Intercept feature operates.

–

The party on hold can use the Call Retry feature.

–

End of Call Detection does not operate after dialing "#".

–

Calls can only be transferred to extensions (not including floating extensions) within the PBX. If the transferred call is forwarded to another outside destination, COS settings are ignored.

–

If the call is transferred to an ICD group, the call will wait in a queue until answered, but the Queuing

Time Table will not function.

–

When using this feature, do not use the Executive Busy Override feature to interrupt the established call.

•

DISA Reorder Tone Duration

It is possible to set the DISA Reorder Tone Duration time. This specifies the length of time that a reorder tone will be sent to the caller. When the timer expires, the call will be disconnected. Call Retry is possible during the DISA Reorder Tone Duration time.

® 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— DISA—Reorder Tone Duration

•

Call Deny

Extensions can deny DISA calls on a COS basis.

® 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Accept the Call from DISA

•

Verification Code PIN Lock/Extension PIN Lock

If the wrong PIN is entered three times, the line will be disconnected. If the wrong PIN is entered a preprogrammed number of times successively, that extension or verification code will become locked, and even entering the correct PIN will not unlock it. Only an extension assigned as the manager can unlock it.

In this case, the PIN will be unlocked and cleared.

® 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Extension PIN—Lock Counter

•

DISA Automatic Walking COS

The KX-NCS4910 or KX-NCS4950 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) is required to use this feature.

•

Each outgoing message (OGM) can be assigned a name through system programming for programming reference.

® 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message— Name

® [731] Outgoing Message (OGM) Name

Installation Manual References

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

3.7.1 OPB3 Card (KX-TDA0190)

3.7.5 MSG4 Card (KX-TDA0191)

3.7.6 ESVM4 Card (KX-TDA0194)

KX-TDE600

3.9.1 OPB3 Card (KX-TDA0190)

3.9.4 MSG4 Card (KX-TDA0191)

82 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)

3.9.5 ESVM4 Card (KX-TDA0194)

PC Programming Manual References

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf

→ DISA—Delayed Answer Timer

→ DISA—Mute & OGM Start Timer after answering

→ DISA—No Dial Intercept Timer

→ DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA

→ DISA—Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

→ DISA—Disconnect Timer after Intercept

→ DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Counter

→ DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time

→ DISA—Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message

→ DISA—Reorder Tone Duration

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Extension PIN—Lock Counter

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Accept the Call from

DISA

5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection

→ DISA Tone Detection—Silence

→ DISA Tone Detection—Continuous

→ DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System

7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message

8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

→ CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number

→ CLI Destination

12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

→DIL— DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

→CLI for DIL— CLI Ring for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

PT Programming Manual References

[209] DISA Delayed Answer Time

[210] DISA CO-to-CO Line Call Prolong Time

[211] DISA Intercept Time

[475] DISA Silence Detection

[476] DISA Continuous Signal Detection

[477] DISA Cyclic Signal Detection

[604] Extension Intercept Destination

[730] Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number

[731] Outgoing Message (OGM) Name

[732] DISA Security Mode

Feature Manual References

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 83

4.1.9 Display Information

9.1.12 Intercept Routing—No Destination

Operating Manual References

1.3.18 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)

1.3.73 Walking COS

4.1.9 Display Information

Description

A display proprietary telephone (PT) can relay the following information to the user while making or receiving calls:

Display Item Display Example Condition

The extension number and name of the calling or called extension, or Incoming Call

Distribution (ICD) Group

Status of the called extension

123: Tom Smith

123: Busy

The number and name of the optional device

D02: 1st Door

The telephone number dialed

1234567890

The received call information

Caller’s name

Caller’s number

CO line number/name

Original Destination, if the call is forwarded

DID name

ABC Company

12345678

Line 001: Sales

®102:Mike

Panasonic*

Duration of the current CO line call

Line 001 11:02’28

–

The first line message can be either (a), (c), or (e) at each extension through system programming.

These can be displayed in turn by pressing the

TRANSFER button or

DISP Soft button.

–

Conditions

•

Multilingual Display

Each extension can select its display language through personal programming (Display Language

Selection).

•

Display Contrast

The display contrast can be adjusted through personal programming (Display Contrast Selection). This is available only for digital proprietary telephones (DPTs) and IP proprietary telephones (IP-PTs).

•

Display Backlight

Some extensions can select whether to turn the display backlight on or off through personal programming

(Display Backlight Selection). For details, refer to the manual for your telephone.

•

Characters (name) or digits (number) exceeding the display’s limitations are not displayed. Although in this case information may not be displayed properly, the received information is not altered.

84 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb)

PC Programming Manual References

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 5— PT Feature Access—No. 1–8

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 5

→ Display Language

→ Incoming Call Display

→ Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 5

→ Display Language

→ Incoming Call Display

→ Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking

12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings— CO Name

Operating Manual References

3.1.2 Personal Programming

4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb)

Description

An extension user can make use of the DND feature. If this feature is set, calls will not arrive at the extension, but will arrive at another extension using the Idle Extension Hunting feature (

® 9.1.9 Idle Extension Hunting)

or the Intercept Routing—Busy/DND feature (

® 9.1.11 Intercept Routing). When a destination cannot be

found, the calling extension will hear the DND tone, while the calling outside party will hear a busy tone.

Conditions

•

DND for CO Line Calls/Intercom Calls

The DND feature can be set for CO line calls, for intercom calls, or for both of them by the extension user.

•

DSS button in DND Mode

The DSS button light will turn red if the assigned extension has set DND.

•

DND Override

An extension in DND mode can be called by other extension users who are allowed to override DND in their COS.

•

Paging DND

It is programmable whether the PBX pages extensions in DND mode through system programming. (

13.1.1 Paging)

•

Intercept Routing—Busy/DND

If a call arrives at an extension in DND mode, the call can be redirected to a preprogrammed destination by the Intercept Routing—Busy/DND feature.

•

Idle Extension Hunting

While searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group, any extension that has DND set will be skipped. The call will go to the next extension in the group, not the Intercept Routing—Busy/

DND destination.

•

If (1) a CO line call via the ELCOT/LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) card arrives at an extension in DND mode and (2) the Intercept Routing—Busy/DND destination is not available and (3) there is no available extension in the idle extension hunting group, then the original extension in DND mode will ring.

•

Calls from a doorphone arrive at the extension even when the extension is in DND mode.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 85

4.1.11 Door Open

PC Programming Manual References

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Tone Length—Busy Tone / DND Tone

4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

→ BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override

→ BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— DND Override

6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND

6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND

PT Programming Manual References

[507] DND Override

Feature Manual References

Operating Manual References

1.3.19 DND (Do Not Disturb)

4.1.11 Door Open

Description

Using an extension telephone, an extension user can unlock a door for a visitor.

The door can be unlocked by extension users who are allowed to unlock the door in Class of Service (COS) programming. While engaged on a doorphone call, any extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor in.

(

Conditions

•

Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied door opener installed on each door.

•

A door opener can unlock a door even if no doorphone is installed.

•

Door Open Duration

An opened door will remain unlocked for a preprogrammed length of time.

Installation Manual References

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

3.9.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays

KX-TDE600

3.11.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays

PC Programming Manual References

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— Doorphone—Open Duration

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Door Open

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Door Unlock

86 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

4.1.12 Doorphone Call

PT Programming Manual References

[207] Door Unlock Time

[512] Permission for Door Open Access

Feature Manual References

Operating Manual References

1.3.20 Door Open

4.1.12 Doorphone Call

Description

A visitor can use a doorphone to call its preprogrammed destination. Extension users can call a doorphone.

Conditions

•

Hardware Requirement:

An optional doorphone, the OPB card and DPH card

•

Call Destination

The destination of doorphone calls can be assigned to each doorphone port for each time mode. The Time

Table is determined by the tenant number assigned to each doorphone port. (

® 9.1.14 Internal Call Block)

The following destinations cannot be the destination for doorphone calls:

–

Floating Extension no. for SVM

–

DISA

–

Analog/ISDN Remote Maintenance

•

Class of Service (COS) programming determines the doorphone ports that are able to make an outgoing

CO line call.

•

Internal Call Block determines which extensions can call a doorphone. (

•

Ring Duration

If an incoming doorphone call is not answered within a preprogrammed time period, ringing stops and the call is canceled.

•

Call Duration

The duration of doorphone calls can be restricted by a system timer. If the timer expires, the call will be disconnected.

•

Door Open

While engaged on a doorphone call, an extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor in. (

4.1.11 Door Open)

•

A doorphone number can be referenced for each doorphone port.

Installation Manual References

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

3.7.1 OPB3 Card (KX-TDA0190)

3.7.2 DPH4 Card (KX-TDA0161)

3.9.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 87

4.1.12 Doorphone Call

KX-TDE600

3.9.1 OPB3 Card (KX-TDA0190)

3.9.2 DPH4 Card (KX-TDA0161)

3.11.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays

PC Programming Manual References

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf

→ Doorphone—Call Ring Duration

→ Doorphone—Call Duration

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Doorphone Call

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 3— Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Called by Voice

7.1 [5-1] Doorphone

PT Programming Manual References

[720] Doorphone Call Destination

[729] Doorphone Number Reference

Operating Manual References

1.3.21 Doorphone Call

88 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Section 5 Features and Configurations—E

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 89

5.1.1 EFA (External Feature Access)

5.1 E

5.1.1 EFA (External Feature Access)

Description

Normally, an extension user can only access features within the PBX. However, when performing External

Feature Access (EFA) the extension user performs features outside of the PBX, such as using the transfer services of the telephone company or host PBX. When EFA is performed, the PBX sends a flash/recall signal to the telephone company or the host PBX (

® 8.1.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone

Company from a Host PBX)).

This feature is only available on CO line calls.

This feature is performed by pressing the EFA button or the FLASH/RECALL button that is set to EFA mode

(

® 6.1.2 Flash/Recall/Terminate).

Conditions

•

Flash/Recall Time

The Flash/Recall time can be assigned for each CO line port.

•

EFA Button

A flexible button can be customized as the EFA button.

•

It is possible to perform this feature by entering the feature number while the current call is placed on

Consultation Hold (e.g., is going to be transferred to an extension of the host PBX).

(

PC Programming Manual References

3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Flash Time

3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port— Flash Time

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— External Feature Access

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode during CO Conversation

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode during CO Conversation

6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Type

9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous— TRS Check after EFA

PT Programming Manual References

[417] LCOT Flash/Recall Time

Feature Manual References

Restriction)), even when:

Operating Manual References

1.3.22 EFA (External Feature Access)

90 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

5.1.3 Executive Busy Override

5.1.2 Emergency Call

Description

An extension user can dial preprogrammed emergency numbers after seizing a CO line regardless of the restrictions imposed on the extension.

Conditions

•

A specified number of emergency numbers can be stored.

•

Emergency numbers may be called, regardless of Toll Restriction (TRS) level (

® 17.1.6 TRS (Toll

– in Account Code—Forced mode (

® 1.1.2 Account Code Entry)

– in Extension Dial Lock (

® 3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation))

•

CLIP Number Notification

When dialing an emergency number, the preassigned CLIP number for the extension will be sent as a location identification number. (

The CLIP number assigned to the extension will be sent regardless of the settings such as CLIR or CLIP number assigned to an ISDN port to be used. This feature is only available when using a PRI line, with

E911-compatible services.

PC Programming Manual References

9.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial

PT Programming Manual References

[304] Emergency Number

Feature Manual References

® 4.1.1 Data Line Security).

5.1.3 Executive Busy Override

Description

Allows an extension user to interrupt an existing call to establish a three-party conference call.

Executive Busy Override Deny

It is possible for extension users to prevent their calls from being interrupted by another extension user.

Conditions

•

Class of Service (COS) programming determines the extension users who can use Executive Busy

Override and set Executive Busy Override Deny.

•

This feature will not function when the busy extension:

Has set Executive Busy Override Deny or Data Line Security (

Is being monitored by another extension (

® 3.1.6 Call Monitor).

Is receiving an Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) (

Announcement)) or Whisper OHCA (

® 20.1.4 Whisper OHCA).

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 91

5.1.4 Extension Dial Lock d.

Is on a conference call (

® 3.1.18 Conference, ® 13.1.14 Privacy Release).

Is on a doorphone call (

® 4.1.12 Doorphone Call).

Is using Live Call Screening (LCS) or Two-way Record (

® 19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital)

Integration).

Has a call on consultation hold (

® 4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)).

•

This feature is not available for a CO-to-CO line call via Direct Inward System Access (DISA).

PC Programming Manual References

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Executive Override Deny Set / Cancel

4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Executive Busy Override

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

→Extension Feature— Executive Busy Override

→Programming & Manager— Executive Busy Override Deny

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny

PT Programming Manual References

[505] Executive Busy Override

[506] Executive Busy Override Deny

Feature Manual References

Restriction)) so that other users cannot make inappropriate CO line calls. An extension personal identification

Operating Manual References

1.3.23 Executive Busy Override

5.1.4 Extension Dial Lock

Description

An extension user can change the Toll Restriction (TRS) level of the telephone (

® 17.1.6 TRS (Toll

number (PIN) is used to unlock the telephone (

® 5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)).

This feature is also known as Electronic Station Lockout.

Conditions

•

This feature also restricts changing the Call Forward (FWD) destination. (

® 6.1.6 FWD (Call

Forwarding))

•

Remote Extension Dial Lock

Overrides Extension Dial Lock. If an extension assigned as the manager sets Remote Extension Dial Lock on an extension that has already been locked by the extension user, the user cannot unlock it. If a manager extension unlocks an extension that has been locked by the extension user, the extension will be unlocked.

This feature is also known as Remote Station Lock Control.

•

TRS Level

COS programming determines the TRS level for Extension Dial Lock.

92 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

5.1.5 Extension Feature Clear

•

Other features can also temporarily change an extension’s TRS level, similar to Extension Dial Lock. If an extension is locked, the TRS level determined by the following features takes priority. The numbers below

(1 through 3) indicate the priority of each feature, with 1 having the highest priority, and 3 having the lowest.

Dial Tone Transfer (

® 4.1.5 Dial Tone Transfer)

TRS Override by System Speed Dialing (

® 19.1.1 Verification Code Entry, ® 20.1.1 Walking COS)

Verification Code Entry/Walking COS (

PC Programming Manual References

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features

→ Extension Dial Lock Set / Cancel

→ Remote Extension Dial Lock Off

→ Remote Extension Dial Lock On

PT Programming Manual References

[510] TRS Level for Extension Dial Lock

Feature Manual References

® 5.1.4 Extension Dial Lock) and the extension personal identification number (PIN)

Operating Manual References

1.3.24 Extension Dial Lock

3.2.2 Manager Programming

5.1.5 Extension Feature Clear

Description

Extension users can clear the following features set on their own telephone at once:

Features

Absent Message

BGM

FWD

/DND

Call Pickup Deny

Call Waiting

Data Line Security

Executive Busy Override Deny

Log-in/Log-out

Message Waiting

Paging Deny

After Setting

Off

Allow

Enable (Call Waiting tone)

Off

Allow

Log-in

All messages left by other extensions will be cleared.

Allow

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 93

5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)

Features

Paralleled Telephone

Hot Line

Timed Reminder

Paired SLT will ring.

Off

Cleared

After Setting

*1 These features can be programmed to not be canceled by Extension Feature Clear.

This feature is also known as Station Program Clear.

Conditions

•

Extension Dial Lock (

(

® 5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)) will not be cleared by this feature.

•

If dial tone 2 is heard after Extension Feature Clear:

After performing Extension Feature Clear, Call Waiting will be enabled if "Extension Clear: Call

Waiting" is set to "Clear" through system programming. In this case, dial tone 2 will be heard when going off-hook. (

® 4.1.4 Dial Tone)

PC Programming Manual References

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Extension Feature Clear

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 2

→ Extension Clear—Call Waiting

→ Extension Clear—Fwd/DND

→ Extension Clear—Hot Line (Pickup Dial)

Operating Manual References

1.3.25 Extension Feature Clears

5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)

Description

Each extension user can be assigned a personal identification number (PIN) through system programming or personal programming (Extension PIN [Personal Identification Number]). This PIN is used to set features or access the extension remotely.

The following features require a valid PIN:

Live Call Screening (LCS)

(

® 16.1.6 Speed Dialing, Personal), Personal Speed Dialing

Incoming and Outgoing Call Log Display Lock (

Display Lock (

® 3.1.5 Call Log, Incoming)

Walking Extension (

® 20.1.2 Walking Extension)

Extension Dial Lock (

Walking COS (

® 20.1.1 Walking COS)

Walking COS through DISA (

13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone)

*1 If an extension user has assigned an extension PIN, the PIN is required when activating this feature.

94 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

5.1.7 Extension Port Configuration

Conditions

CAUTION

There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX. The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX. To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:

Keeping PINs secret.

Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.

Changing PINs regularly.

•

Extension PIN Lock

If the extension PIN is entered incorrectly three times, the line will be disconnected. If an incorrect PIN is entered a preprogrammed number of times, the PIN will be locked. Only an extension assigned as a manager can unlock a PIN, after which it will be reset. In this case, the PIN will be unlocked and cleared.

This feature is also known as Station Password Lock.

•

Remote Extension PIN Clear

If an extension user forgets his or her PIN, a manager can clear (reset) the PIN, and the extension user can assign a new PIN.

•

Extension PIN Display

It is possible to select whether to show the extension PIN on the display through system programming. By default, it is shown as dots.

PC Programming Manual References

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Extension PIN—Lock Counter

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Extension PIN Set / Cancel

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 1— PT LCD—Password / PIN Display

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN

PT Programming Manual References

[005] Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

Operating Manual References

3.1.2 Personal Programming

3.2.2 Manager Programmingf

5.1.7 Extension Port Configuration

Description

There are three types of extension ports, used to connect digital proprietary telephones (DPTs), analog proprietary telephones (APTs), single line telephones (SLTs), Cell Stations (CSs), DSS Consoles, and Voice

Processing Systems (VPS) to the PBX. The devices which can be connected to each type of port are listed below.

DPT Port: DPT, DSS Console, Panasonic VPS which supports DPT (Digital) Integration, and PT-interface

CS (e.g., KX-TDA0141)

SLT Port: SLT and Panasonic VPS which supports DTMF Integration

Super Hybrid Port: DPT, APT, SLT, DSS Console, Panasonic VPS, and PT-interface CS

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 95

5.1.8 External Relay

EXtra Device Port (XDP):

A Super Hybrid port can be used as an XDP port, allowing two telephones (a DPT and an SLT) to be connected to the same port of the PBX. This XDP port can be used in one of the following modes:

Mode

Parallel Mode

XDP Mode

Description

The DPT and an SLT share the same extension number so that they can act as one extension. The SLT uses the extension data

(extension number, Class of Service [COS], etc.) of the DPT. (

The DPT and SLT have different extension numbers and act as independent extensions. To use XDP mode, XDP mode must be enabled for the port through system programming. (

13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone)

Conditions

•

Automatic Detection on Super Hybrid Port

A DPT, SLT, or PT-interface CS connected to a Super Hybrid port can be detected automatically without any programming. An APT connected to a Super Hybrid port can be detected automatically when XDP mode has been disabled.

•

A DSS Console or a Panasonic VPS which supports DPT (Digital) Integration can also be connected with an SLT in XDP mode.

•

APT and SLT in Parallel Mode

An APT and an SLT can also be connected to a Super Hybrid port and used in parallel mode.

•

Digital XDP

A DPT can be connected to another DPT and act as an independent extension with its own extension number. (

•

Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

A PS can be used in Wireless XDP Parallel mode with a wired telephone.

(

•

DSS Console and Paired Telephone Assignment

When a DSS Console is connected, a PT must be paired with the DSS Console through system programming.

PC Programming Manual References

3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Pair Extension

PT Programming Manual References

[007] DSS Console Paired Telephone

[600] EXtra Device Port (XDP) Mode

5.1.8 External Relay

Description

By turning external device relays on and off, the PBX can control external devices such as alarms.

96 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

5.1.8 External Relay

When an extension user enters the External Relay Control feature number, the specified relay turns on for a preprogrammed length of time. When this timer expires, the relay turns off automatically. This gives the PBX simple control over other equipment, allowing an extension user to, for example, activate an alarm from his extension.

If the relay cannot be accessed (for example, because use is not permitted by COS, or the port is not in service), a reorder tone will be heard at the extension.

Conditions

•

Hardware Requirement:

An external relay device, OPB card and EIO card

•

Some devices may be unable to communicate correctly with the PBX. Confirm compatibility with the manufacturer of a device before installing it.

•

Each external relay port has a COS assigned. This and the COS of an extension determine the extension users who can use External Relay Control.

•

The length of time that a relay is turned on can be specified separately for each relay through system programming.

•

If the same or another extension tries to access an external relay that has already been switched on, the timer for that relay is reset.

Installation Manual References

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

3.7.1 OPB3 Card (KX-TDA0190)

3.7.3 EIO4 Card (KX-TDA0164)

3.9.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays

KX-TDE600

3.9.1 OPB3 Card (KX-TDA0190)

3.9.3 EIO4 Card (KX-TDA0164)

3.11.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays

PC Programming Manual References

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— External Relay Access

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— External Relay Access

7.6 [5-4] External Relay

Feature Manual References

Operating Manual References

1.3.27 External Relay

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 97

5.1.9 External Sensor

5.1.9 External Sensor

Description

External sensing devices, such as security alarms or smoke detectors, can be connected to the PBX. When the PBX receives input from a sensor, a call is made to the preset destination, alerting the extension user.

The available destinations of a sensor call are as follows:

[Available Destinations]

Destination

Wired Extension (PT/SLT/T1-OPX)

SIP Extension

ICD Group

PS Ring Group

Floating Extension no. for SVM

VM Group (DTMF/DPT)

External Pager (TAFAS)

DISA

Analog/ISDN Remote Maintenance

Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.

Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. + Phone no.

Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line, Access with PBX Code)

Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line, Access without PBX Code)

Availability

When the call is answered, if distinctive dial tones are enabled, dial tone 3 is heard, which continues until the user goes on-hook. If the sensor call is not answered within a specified time, the call will be canceled. It is possible to set a different ring tone pattern for calls received from each external sensor, to distinguish between them.

Conditions

•

Hardware Requirement:

An external sensor, OPB card and EIO card

•

Some devices may be unable to communicate correctly with the PBX. Confirm compatibility with the manufacturer of a device before installing it.

•

After a sensor has been activated, the PBX will ignore any further alerts from the same sensor for the duration specified by a timer. This timer can be set separately for each sensor.

•

As long as the previous sensor call is still being performed, any further alerts from the same sensor are ignored.

•

The assigned sensor name and/or number are shown on the display of PTs and PSs when a sensor call is received.

•

If the destination of a sensor call has set FWD, the sensor call will be redirected to the FWD destination.

However, if the FWD destination is not supported as the destination of a sensor call (e.g., an outside party), the call will be received at the original destination. (

® 8.1.1 Hands-free Answerback)

98 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

5.1.9 External Sensor

•

The following features cannot be used when a sensor call is received:

–

Alternate Receiving—Voice (

® 9.1.13 Intercom Call)

–

Hands-free Answerback (

–

Consultation Hold/Call Hold (

® 3.1.20 Consultation Hold, ® 3.1.4 Call Hold)

–

Call Transfer (

® 5.1.3 Executive Busy Override)

–

Executive Busy Override (

•

Sensor call information is output on SMDR.

Installation Manual References

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

3.7.1 OPB3 Card (KX-TDA0190)

3.7.3 EIO4 Card (KX-TDA0164)

3.9.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays

KX-TDE600

3.9.1 OPB3 Card (KX-TDA0190)

3.9.3 EIO4 Card (KX-TDA0164)

3.11.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays

PC Programming Manual References

3.44 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property

→ Input Signal Decision Time

→ Input Signal Detection Reopening Time

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— External Sensor—Ring Duration

4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others— External Sensor—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

7.7 [5-5] External Sensor

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 99

5.1.9 External Sensor

100 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Section 6 Features and Configurations—F

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 101

6.1.1 Fixed Buttons

6.1 F

6.1.1 Fixed Buttons

Description

Proprietary telephones (PTs), DSS Consoles, and Add-on Key Modules feature a wide variety of feature buttons and Line Access buttons, explained below.

Note that certain models do not feature certain buttons.

For a description of the buttons found on portable stations (PSs), please refer to the Operating Instructions for each PS.

[PT and Add-on Key Module]

Button Usage

Used to adjust the volume of the ringer, speaker, handset and headset, and also adjust the display contrast. The Navigator Key and Jog Dial can also be used to select data from the Call Directory and the System

Feature Access Menu on the display.

Navigator Key,

Jog Dial,

Volume Key

ENTER

CANCEL

PROGRAM

FLASH/RECALL

HOLD

SP-PHONE (Speakerphone)

MONITOR

MESSAGE

REDIAL

TRANSFER

Used to confirm the selected item.

Used to cancel the selected item.

Used to enter and exit programming mode.

Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up (Flash/Recall mode or Terminate mode), or used to send a flash/recall signal to the telephone company or host PBX to access external features (External Feature Access mode). This button can also be used as a CANCEL button while on-hook.

Used to place a call on hold.

Used for hands-free operation. Also used to switch between handset and hands-free operation.

Used for hands-free dialing. Also used to monitor the other party’s voice in hands-free mode.

Used to leave a Message Waiting indication or call back the party who left the Message Waiting indication.

Used to redial the last number dialed.

Used to transfer a call to another party.

102 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

6.1.1 Fixed Buttons

Flexible CO

INTERCOM

AUTO ANS (Auto Answer)/

MUTE

VOICE CALL/MUTE

AUTO DIAL/STORE

CONF (Conference)

FWD/DND

PAUSE

Button Usage

Used to access a CO line or trunk group when making or receiving a call according to the button’s preprogrammed CO Line Access method

(Default: S-CO). Can also be customized as a different feature button.

Used to make or receive intercom calls.

Used to receive an incoming call in hands-free mode, or used to mute the built-in microphone or handset during a conversation.

Used to monitor an intercom call automatically (a hands-free conversation is not possible). Also used to mute the handset during a conversation.

Used for System/Personal Speed Dialing and storing program changes.

Used to establish a multiparty conversation.

Used to set Call Forwarding (FWD) or Do Not Disturb (DND).

Used to insert a dialing pause in a stored number. Also used as the

Program button on analog proprietary telephones (APTs) which do not have the PROGRAM button.

Used to select the item displayed on the bottom line of the display.

Used to select the displayed item or to call the displayed number.

Used to access the second level of Soft button items.

Used to change the current display to access various features.

Used to switch the page for the Self Labeling feature (KX-NT366 only).

Soft

SELECT

SHIFT

MODE

NEXT PAGE

[DSS Console]

Button

ANSWER

RELEASE

Flexible CO

Flexible DSS (Direct Station

Selection)

PF (Programmable Feature)

Usage

Used to answer an incoming call, or place the current call on hold and answer another call with a one-touch operation.

Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation, or to complete a Call Transfer.

Used to access a CO line or trunk group when making or receiving a call according to the button’s preprogrammed CO Line Access method.

Can also be customized as a different feature button.

Used to call an extension with a one-touch operation. Each button is programmed to correspond to an extension. DSS buttons can also be customized as other different feature buttons.

Used to access a preprogrammed feature with a one-touch operation.

(no default)

Conditions

•

Certain buttons are equipped with a light to indicate the status of the corresponding line or feature.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 103

6.1.2 Flash/Recall/Terminate

6.1.2 Flash/Recall/Terminate

Description

A proprietary telephone (PT) user can use the FLASH/RECALL button (Flash/Recall mode or Terminate mode) or Terminate button (Terminate mode) to disconnect the current call and originate another call without hanging up.

Flash/Recall Mode: Disconnects the line and the extension user hears the dial tone from the line used last.

For example, if a CO line call is disconnected, the extension user will hear a new dial tone from the same CO line.

Terminate Mode: Disconnects the line and the extension user hears a dial tone via the preferred CO line.

(

® 10.1.3 Line Preference—Outgoing)

Conditions

•

FLASH/RECALL Button Mode

One of the following modes can be selected for each extension through system programming:

–

Flash/Recall mode

–

Terminate mode

–

EFA mode (

® 5.1.1 EFA (External Feature Access))

•

Terminate Button

Any flexible button can be customized as the Terminate button.

•

Disconnect Time (Only for Flash/Recall Mode)

The amount of time between successive accesses to the same CO line is programmable for each CO line port.

•

This feature generates a Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) call record (

® 16.1.3 SMDR (Station

Message Detail Recording)), restarts the call timer, inserts a pause, and checks the Toll Restriction (TRS)

level (

® 17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)) again.

•

The Terminate feature will be performed when pressing the FLASH/RECALL button regardless of the mode that the FLASH/RECALL button has been set to, in the following situations:

–

When a call is made using ARS. (

–

When a CO line call is made with the INTERCOM button.

–

When a CO line call is made with an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) group button.

PC Programming Manual References

3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Disconnect Time

3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port— Disconnect Time

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode during CO Conversation

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode during CO Conversation

6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Type

PT Programming Manual References

[418] LCOT Disconnect Time

Feature Manual References

104 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

6.1.3 Flexible Buttons

6.1.3 Flexible Buttons

Description

Flexible buttons are customized through either system or personal programming. They can then be used to make or receive intercom or CO line calls or be used as feature buttons, as follows:

[Button Usage]

Button

Single-CO (S-CO)

Group-CO (G-CO)

Loop-CO (L-CO)

Direct Station Selection (DSS)

Network Direct Station Selection

(NDSS)

One-touch Dialing

Incoming Call Distribution (ICD)

Group

Message

FWD/DND (External/Internal/

Both)

Group FWD (External/Internal/

Both)

Account Code Entry (Account)

Conference

Terminate

External Feature Access (EFA)

Call Park

Usage

Used to access a specified CO line for making or receiving calls.

(

Used to access an idle CO line in a specified trunk group for making calls. Incoming calls from CO lines in the assigned trunk group arrive at this button. (

Used to access an idle CO line for making calls. Incoming calls from any CO line arrive at this button. (

® 13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network

Used to call an extension with a one-touch operation. (

9.1.13 Intercom Call)

Used to access an extension at another PBX within the same network. (

Direct Station Selection))

Used to call a preprogrammed party or access a feature with a one-touch operation. (

® 12.1.4 One-touch Dialing)

Used to access a specified incoming call distribution (ICD) group for making or receiving calls. (

DND Button, Group FWD Button)

Used to leave a Message Waiting indication or call back the party who left the Message Waiting indication. (

® 11.1.3 Message

Waiting)

Used to set the FWD or DND feature for the extension. The feature is applied to CO line calls, intercom calls, or both. (

® 6.1.7 FWD/

Used to set the FWD feature for a specified ICD group. The feature is applied to CO line calls, intercom calls, or both. (

® 6.1.7 FWD/

DND Button, Group FWD Button)

Used to enter an account code. (

® 1.1.2 Account Code Entry)

Used to establish a multiparty conversation. (

3.1.18 Conference)

Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging up. (

® 6.1.2 Flash/Recall/Terminate)

Used to send a flash/recall signal to the telephone company or host

PBX to access external features. (

® 5.1.1 EFA (External Feature

Access))

Used to park or retrieve a call in a preset PBX parking zone. (

3.1.7 Call Park)

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 105

6.1.3 Flexible Buttons

Button Usage

Call Park (Automatic Park Zone)

Used to park a call in an idle PBX parking zone automatically. (

3.1.7 Call Park)

Call Log

Used to show a log of received calls. (

® 3.1.5 Call Log, Incoming)

Log-in/Log-out

Hurry-up

Used to switch between Log-in and Log-out status. (

® 9.1.3 ICD

Group Features—Log-in/Log-out)

Used to redirect the longest waiting call in the queue of an ICD group to the overflow destination. (

® 9.1.6 ICD Group Features—

Queuing)

Wrap-up

System Alarm

Time Service

Answer

Used to switch between Wrap-up/Not Ready and Ready modes.

(

® 9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out)

Used to display a PBX error. (

® 10.1.4 Local Alarm Information)

Used to change or display the current time mode (day/lunch/break/ night). (

® 8.1.3 Headset Operation)

Used to answer an incoming call. (

Release

Toll Restriction

Calling Line Identification

Restriction (CLIR)

Headset

Two-way Transfer

Connected Line Identification

Restriction (COLR)

Time Service Switching Mode

(Automatic/Manual)

Two-way Record

One-touch Two-way Transfer

Live Call Screening (LCS)

Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation, or to complete a Call Transfer. (

® 8.1.3 Headset Operation)

Used to change the Toll Restriction (TRS) level of other extension users temporarily. (

® 4.1.5 Dial Tone Transfer)

Used to switch between CLIP and CLIR services. (

® 3.1.15 CLIP

(Calling Line Identification Presentation),

® 13.1.23 Private

Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP (Calling/Connected Line

Identification Presentation) and CNIP/CONP (Calling/Connected

Name Identification Presentation))

Used to switch between COLP and COLR services. (

13.1.23 Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP (Calling/

Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/CONP

(Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation))

Used to turn headset mode on/off while idle.

Used to switch between hands-free mode and headset modes during a conversation. (

® 8.1.3 Headset Operation)

Used to switch between Automatic Switching and Manual Switching mode. (

19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration)

Used to record a conversation into your own mailbox. (

Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified extension. (

DPT (Digital) Integration)

Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified extension with a one-touch operation. (

® 19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT

(Digital) Integration)

Used to monitor your own voice mailbox while a caller is leaving a message and, if desired, intercept the call. (

® 19.1.4 Voice Mail

106 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

Button Usage

Voice Mail (VM) Transfer

Check-in

Check-out

Used to transfer a call to the mailbox of a specified extension. (

19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration,

® 19.1.5 Voice Mail

DTMF Integration)

Used to switch the status of extensions from Check-out to Check-in.

(

® 15.1.3 Room Status Control)

Used to switch the status of extensions from Check-in to Check-out.

(

® 15.1.3 Room Status Control)

Cleaned-up

CTI

Used to switch the room status of extensions between Ready and

Not Ready. (

® 15.1.3 Room Status Control)

Used to access CTI features. (

® 3.1.23 CTI (Computer Telephony

Integration))

Primary Directory Number (PDN)

Used to make and receive both outside and intercom calls. (

13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory

Number) Extension)

Secondary Directory Number

(SDN)

Used to show the current status of another extension, call the extension, and pick up or transfer calls to it. (

® 13.1.7 PDN (Primary

Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension)

One-touch Feature Setting Buttons: Pressing these buttons while on-hook changes the feature settings. The new mode will be displayed for a preprogrammed time period.

Conditions

•

The Flexible button lights of the KX-T7040 and KX-T7240 DSS Consoles can be either "Off" or "Red On".

If a button is customized as a button which shows other light patterns, these patterns will be indicated as "Red On".

PC Programming Manual References

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— PT Display—PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy

6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button

6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console

Operating Manual References

3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons

6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

Description

To dial another extension user or to access PBX features, the access numbers (extension numbers or feature numbers) are required.

There are three types of numbering plans:

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 107

6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

Flexible Numbering (available while a dial tone is heard)

Flexible Numbering (available while busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard)

Fixed Numbering (available while dialing or talking)

Flexible Numbering (available while a dial tone is heard)

Extension numbers and feature numbers which are available while a dial tone is heard can be customized for easy use. The numbers must not conflict. It is also possible to use default (Pattern 1 or Pattern 2) shown in the following table:

Extension Numbers: Extension numbers consist of leading numbers and additional numbers.

Extension numbers (consisting of "0" through "9") can be assigned as follows:

•

Numbering schemes: 1-64

•

Leading number: up to three digits

•

Additional number: up to two digits (default: two digits)

[Example]

If the number "3" is programmed as a leading number for the 1st extension numbering scheme, and "XX" is programmed as the additional digits, extension numbers 300 through 399 are available.

Feature Numbers: Up to four digits, consisting of 0-9, " ", and "#"

Other PBX Extension Numbers (Other PBX Extension Number [TIE] 01 through 16): Up to three digits, consisting of 0-9, " ", and "#"

[Flexible Numbering Table (available while a dial tone is heard)]

Feature

Extension Numbering Scheme 1—Leading Number

Extension Numbering Scheme 2—Leading Number

Extension Numbering Scheme 3—Leading Number

Extension Numbering Scheme 4—Leading Number

Extension Numbering Scheme 5—Leading Number

Extension Numbering Scheme 6—Leading Number

Extension Numbering Scheme 7—Leading Number

Extension Numbering Scheme 8—Leading Number

Extension Numbering Scheme 9—Leading Number

Extension Numbering Scheme 10—Leading Number

Extension Numbering Scheme 11—Leading Number

Extension Numbering Scheme 12—Leading Number

Extension Numbering Scheme 13—Leading Number

Extension Numbering Scheme 14—Leading Number

Extension Numbering Scheme 15—Leading Number

Default

None

Pattern 1

(with )

KX-TDE100/

KX-TDE200

KX-TDE600

None

Pattern 2

(without )

None

108 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

Feature

Extension Numbering Scheme 16—Leading Number

Extension Numbering Scheme 17—Leading Number

Extension Numbering Scheme 18—Leading Number

Extension Numbering Scheme 19—Leading Number

Extension Numbering Scheme 20—Leading Number

Extension Numbering Scheme 21—Leading Number

Extension Numbering Scheme 22—Leading Number

Extension Numbering Scheme 23–64—Leading

Number

Operator Call

Idle Line Access (Local Access)

Trunk Group Access

TIE Line Access

Redial

Speed Dialing—System/Personal

Personal Speed Dialing—Programming

Doorphone Call

Group Paging

External BGM on/off

Outgoing Message (OGM) playback/record/clear

S-CO Line Access

SVM—Personal Greeting Message playback/record/

clear

Parallel Telephone Mode set/cancel

Group Call Pickup

Directed Call Pickup

TAFAS—Calls through an External Pager

Group Paging answer

Automatic Callback Busy cancel/CCBS cancel

User Remote Operation/Walking COS/Verification

Code Entry

Default

Pattern 1

(with )

KX-TDE100/

KX-TDE200

KX-TDE600

None

Pattern 2

(without )

None

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 109

6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

Feature

Wireless XDP Parallel Mode set/cancel

Account Code Entry

Call Hold/Call Hold Retrieve

Call Hold Retrieve—Specified with a Holding Extension

Number

Call Park/Call Park Retrieve

Call Hold Retrieve—Specified with a Held CO Line

Number

Door Open

External Relay

External Feature Access

Preventing (not showing) the telephone number when

making outside calls (KX-HGT100 only)

Showing the telephone number when making outside

calls (KX-HGT100 only)

COLR set/cancel

CLIR set/cancel

Switch CLIP of the CO Line/Extension

Message Waiting set/cancel/callback

FWD/DND set/cancel—Both

FWD/DND set/cancel—External

FWD/DND set/cancel—Internal

FWD/DND No Answer Timer set

Group FWD set/cancel—Both

Group FWD set/cancel—External

Group FWD set/cancel—Internal

Call Pickup Deny set/cancel

Paging Deny set/cancel

Walking Extension/Enhanced Walking Extension

Data Line Security set/cancel

Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call off/BSS/OHCA/

Whisper OHCA

Default

Pattern 1

(with )

KX-TDE100/

KX-TDE200

KX-TDE600

7 0

7 1

7 2

710

711

712

713

714

715

716

720

721

727

730

731

714

715

716

720

721

727

730

731

7 0

7 1

7 2

710

711

712

713

Pattern 2

(without )

714

715

716

720

721

727

730

731

7 0

7 1

7 2

710

711

712

713

110 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

Feature

Automatic Call Waiting set/cancel

Executive Busy Override Deny set/cancel

Not Ready Mode on/off

Log-in/Log-out

Incoming Call Queue Monitor

Hot Line program/set/cancel

Absent Message set/cancel

BGM set/cancel

Remote Wake-up Call

Timed Reminder set/cancel

Printing Message

Extension Dial Lock set/cancel

Time Service Switch

Remote Extension Dial Lock off

Remote Extension Dial Lock on

NDSS Monitor Release (Centralized BLF Monitor

Cancel)

Extension Feature Clear

Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) set/

cancel

Dial Information (CTI)

Other PBX Extension Number (TIE) 01–16

Quick Dialing 1–80

Default

Pattern 1

(with )

KX-TDE100/

KX-TDE200

KX-TDE600

732

733

732

733

735

736

739

735

736

739

740

750

751

760

761

740

750

751

760

761

780

782

783

784

780

782

783

784

Pattern 2

(without )

760

761

780

782

783

784

732

733

735

736

739

740

750

751

790

799

790

799

790

799

None

*1 SIP extension users can use these feature numbers. If these feature numbers do not work properly with the KX-HGT100, ensure that the firmware of the KX-HGT100 and the MPR software file version of the PBX are updated to their latest versions.

These settings are unrelated to PBX feature numbers and are set directly via the telephone. If the number set to the telephone is also used as a PBX feature number, the number functions as the telephone's feature number, and not as a PBX feature number. See 4.6.1 Registering IP Telephones in the IP Networking Guide for programming details.

It is possible to register Quick Dialing numbers that overlap with other registered numbers. This is used for the Automatic

Rerouting of VoIP Calls To Public CO Line feature.

Flexible Numbering (available while a busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard)

Feature numbers which are available while a busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard can be customized for easy use. The numbers should be one digit (0-9, " ", or "#") and must not conflict. For a list of the default settings, refer to the following table:

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 111

6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering

[Flexible Numbering Table (available while a busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard)]

Feature Default

Call Waiting/DND Override

Executive Busy Override

Message Waiting set

Call Monitor

Automatic Callback Busy

Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice

1 or 2

SIP extensions cannot perform DND Override or Message Waiting but can be the recipient of them.

To use Call Waiting/DND Override, both "1" and "2" are available by default.

Fixed Numbering (available while dialing or talking)

Features which are available while dialing or talking have fixed numbers, as shown in the following table:

[Fixed Numbering Table (available while dialing or talking)]

Feature Fixed Numbering

Pulse to Tone Conversion

Conference

Door Open

*1 SIP extensions cannot establish conferences but can participate in them.

Conditions

•

The following are examples of feature number conflicts: 1 and 11, 0 and 00, 2 and 21, 10 and 101, 32 and

321, etc.

•

Feature number + Additional number (Parameter)

Certain flexible feature numbers require additional digits to make the feature active. For example, to set

Call Waiting, the feature number for "Call Waiting" must be followed by "1" and to cancel it, the same feature number should be followed by "0".

•

Rotary single line telephone (SLT) users cannot dial feature numbers which include " " or "#".

•

Portable station (PS) users cannot use the following features:

–

Personal Speed Dialing

–

OGM playback/record

–

S-CO Line Access

–

Parallel Telephone Mode set/cancel

–

Walking Extension

–

BGM set/cancel

–

Timed Reminder

PC Programming Manual References

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main

→Extension

112 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

6.1.5 Floating Extension

→Features

→Other PBX Extension

4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial

4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

PT Programming Manual References

[100] Flexible Numbering

Feature Manual References

13.1.26 PS Connection

17.1.2 TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any

Operating Manual References

4.2.1 Feature Number Table

6.1.5 Floating Extension

Description

Virtual extension numbers can be assigned to resources to make them as easily accessible as extensions.

These numbers are referred to as "floating extension numbers" and can be assigned as a destination of incoming calls, intercepted calls, etc.

This feature is also known as Floating Station.

Device

Resource

External Pager

Default

600

Outgoing Message

(OGM)

Simplified Voice

Message (SVM)

Description

Used as the destination for the Trunk Answer

From Any Station (TAFAS) feature. (

Station))

Used to play messages for callers via the

Direct Inward System Access (DISA) feature.

(

Access))

Used to access message boxes associated with extensions. (

® 16.1.8 SVM (Simplified

Voice Message))

5 + two-digit

OGM number

SVM card 1:

591

SVM card 2:

592

Analog Remote

Maintenance

Used to access PC programming mode through a modem on a PC.

599

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 113

6.1.5 Floating Extension

Group

Resource

Incoming Call

Distribution (ICD)

Group

PS Ring Group

Description

Used to call an ICD group. (

® 9.1.1 ICD

GROUP FEATURES)

Default

6 + two-digit group number

VM (DPT) Group

VM (DTMF) Group

Used to call a PS ring group. (

® 13.1.29 PS

Ring Group)

Used to call a VM (DPT) group.

Used to call a VM (DTMF) group.

—

500 (VM [DPT]

Group 1)

—

Conditions

•

Certain resources which are assigned a floating extension number can also be assigned a name.

PC Programming Manual References

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Extension

5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main

→ Floating Extension Number

→ Group Name

5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings— Floating Extension No.

5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings— Floating Ext. No.

5.24 [3-9] PS Ring Group— Floating Extension Number

7.2 [5-2] External Pager— Page Number 1, Page Number 2—Floating Extension Number

7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message— Floating Extension Number

13.1 [11-1] Main—Remote— Remote—Analog Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number

PT Programming Manual References

[623] Incoming Call Distribution Group Name

[660] VM Group Floating Extension Number

[700] External Pager Floating Extension Number

[730] Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number

[731] Outgoing Message (OGM) Name

[811] Modem Floating Extension Number

[812] ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number

Feature Manual References

13.1.6 PC Programming

® 9.1.14 Internal Call Block), the FWD feature will not

114 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)

6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)

Description

Extensions and incoming call distribution groups can forward their calls to preset destinations. There are several different types of forwarding, and the circumstances under which the calls are forwarded for each type differ as follows:

Type Circumstance

All Calls

Busy

No Answer

Busy/No Answer

Any time

Follow Me:

When an extension user fails to set this feature before leaving the desk, this feature can be set from the destination extension.

When the extension user’s line is busy.

When the extension user does not answer within a preprogrammed time.

When the extension user’s line is busy or the user does not answer within a preprogrammed time.

Depending on the type of incoming intercom or CO line calls, it is possible to set a different destination for each.

Incoming

Intercom Calls

Extension

Forwards to

Another Extension

Incoming CO

Line Calls

Available Forwarding Type:

All Calls

Busy

No Answer

Busy/No Answer

Forwards to

Outside Party

ICD Group

Incoming

Intercom Calls

Forwards to

Another Extension

Incoming CO

Line Calls

Forwards to

Outside Party

Available Forwarding Type: All Calls

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 115

6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)

[Available Destinations]

Destination

Wired Extension (PT/SLT/SIP Extension/

T1-OPX)

ICD Group

PS Ring Group

Floating Extension no. for SVM

VM Group (DTMF/DPT)

External Pager (TAFAS)

DISA

Availability

Condition for Original Extension/

Incoming Call Distribution Group

Only available when FWD to extension is allowed through COS programming.

Analog/ISDN Remote Maintenance

Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.

Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. +

Phone no.

Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line,

Access with PBX Code)

–

Only available for incoming CO line calls. Incoming intercom and doorphone calls cannot be forwarded to a DISA floating extension number.

–

Only available when FWD to CO line is allowed through COS programming.

ü Only available when FWD to CO line is allowed through COS programming.

– Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line,

Access without PBX Code)

If an extension user is not permitted by COS to call a certain extension (

function if that extension is set as the forwarding destination.

Conditions

[General]

•

FWD for CO Line Calls/Intercom Calls

The extension user can set the FWD feature for CO line calls, for intercom calls, or for both.

•

FWD from Incoming Call Distribution Group (Group FWD)

COS programming determines the incoming call distribution groups that can use this feature.

•

FWD to CO Line

COS programming determines the extensions or incoming call distribution groups that can forward calls externally.

The original extension’s Toll Restriction and ARS still apply to the forwarded call.

•

CO Line Call Duration

The duration of a CO line call can be restricted by a system timer. CO line call duration is assigned separately for calls between an extension user and an outside party, and calls between two outside parties.

If the timer expires, the line will be disconnected. (

® 3.1.17 CO Line Call Limitation)

•

Multiple FWD

Calls can be forwarded up to four times. The following forwarding features are counted as Multiple FWD:

116 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)

–

FWD—Busy or Busy/No Answer (when the destination extension is busy), or All Calls

–

Idle Extension Hunting—Overflow

–

Intercept Routing—Busy/DND (when the destination extension is busy or in DND mode)

–

Incoming Call Distribution Group—Overflow

Incoming call

Original destination

In the above illustration, forwarding stops at extension E. However, forwarding can go farther in the following cases:

–

If a destination extension rings, and then the call is redirected to the forward destination by the FWD

—No Answer or Busy/No Answer feature.

–

If a destination extension rings, and then the call is redirected to the intercept destination by the

Intercept Routing—No Answer feature.

–

If a call waits in a queue of an incoming call distribution group, and then the call is redirected to the overflow destination by the Queuing Time Table. (

® 9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing)

In the above cases, the forwarding counter resets to zero, and the call can be forwarded up to four times again from the destination extension described above.

Incoming call

Original destination

3 1

FWD—No Answer

•

Boss & Secretary feature

It is possible to call the original extension from the destination extension regardless of the forward setting.

FWD—All Calls

Incoming call

Boss

(Original)

Call or transfer a call

Secretary

(FWD destination)

•

Message Waiting

While calls are forwarded, Message Waiting information is not forwarded. The Message button light turns on at the originally called extension. (

® 11.1.3 Message Waiting)

•

Idle Extension Hunting

Idle Extension Hunting applies to calls forwarded to a busy extension in an idle extension hunting group.

[All Calls and Busy]

•

If the forward destination is not available to answer a call, this feature is canceled and the original destination will ring for the following type of call:

–

Doorphone call

–

CO line calls via the ELCOT/LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) cards

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 117

6.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button

[No Answer and Busy/No Answer]

•

No Answer Time

The number of rings before the call is forwarded is programmable for each extension.

[Follow Me]

•

This feature is only available when the original extension has set "

Remote Operation by Other

Extension" to "Allow" through COS programming.

PC Programming Manual References

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— FWD No Answer Timer Set

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

→CO & SMDR— Call Forward to CO

→Programming & Manager— Group Forward Set

→Optional Device & Other Extensions— Remote Operation by Other Extension

5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main

→ CO-CO Duration Time (*60s)

→ Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s)

5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Group Log / Group FWD

6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND

6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND

PT Programming Manual References

[472] Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration

[473] CO-to-CO Line Call Duration

[504] Call Forwarding to CO Line

[605] Call Forwarding—No Answer Time

Feature Manual References

9.1.5 ICD Group Features—Overflow

9.1.9 Idle Extension Hunting

Operating Manual References

1.3.29 FWD (Call Forwarding)

6.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button

Description

The FWD/DND fixed button, or a customized flexible button, can display the FWD/DND setting status of the extension. Using this button, the FWD status and DND status of the extension can be temporarily set or canceled without clearing FWD destination settings.

FWD/DND Button Types

Multiple types of FWD/DND buttons can be customized on an extension.

118 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

6.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button

FWD/DND for

Extension

Type Description

FWD/DND—Internal Works for incoming intercom calls

FWD/DND—External Works for incoming CO line calls

FWD/DND—Both Works for all incoming calls

[Button Status]

The FWD/DND button shows the current status as follows:

Light Pattern

Red on

Slow red flashing

Off

DND on

FWD on

FWD/DND off

Status (default)

The functions assigned to the "on" and "flashing" patterns can be changed through system programming.

Group FWD Button Types

The FWD feature for the incoming call distribution group can be customized on a flexible button. Multiple types of Group FWD buttons can be customized on an extension.

Type Description

FWD for Incoming Call

Distribution Group

Group FWD—Internal

Group FWD—External

Group FWD—Both

Works for incoming intercom calls

Works for incoming CO line calls

Works for all incoming calls

[Button Status]

The Group FWD button shows the current status as follows:

Light Pattern Status (default)

Red on

Off

FWD on

FWD off

FWD/DND Setting by Fixed FWD/DND button

Pressing the fixed FWD/DND button in idle status allows the extension user to set the following items for FWD/

DND:

•

FWD/DND for CO line calls

The FWD/DND status for CO line calls to that extension can be switched temporarily without clearing the

FWD destination. During setting, the LED of the button shows the current CO line call FWD/DND status.

The forwarding type and destination for CO line calls can also be set.

•

FWD/DND for intercom calls

The FWD/DND status for intercom calls to that extension can be switched temporarily without clearing the

FWD destination. During setting, the LED of the button shows the current intercom call FWD/DND status.

The forwarding type and destination for intercom calls can also be set.

•

FWD—No Answer timer

The length of time until unanswered calls are forwarded can be modified. This setting is applied to both intercom and CO line call forwarding.

•

FWD for Virtual PS

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 119

6.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button

If the extension is the first registered extension in an Incoming Call Distribution Group, the extension user can set the FWD destination and forwarding status (on/off) for up to 4 virtual PSs preregistered to the group.

(

® 19.1.2 Virtual PS)

These settings are only available when FWD/DND buttons are set through system programming to FWD/DND

Setting mode.

Conditions

•

When FWD/DND buttons are set to FWD/DND Cycle Switch mode, pressing the FWD/DND button cycles the FWD/DND setting.

In this mode, when intercom calls are set to be handled differently from CO line calls (forwarding type, forward destination, DND on/off):

in idle mode, the light patterns of the FWD/DND—Both button (including FWD/DND button [fixed button]) and the Group FWD—Both button will indicate the setting for either CO line calls or intercom calls, but not both.

the FWD and DND icons on a PS display reflect the settings for CO line calls only.

pressing the FWD/DND—Both button (including FWD/DND button [fixed button]) or the Group FWD—

Both button will be ignored.

•

When both the FWD and DND features are assigned simultaneously, pressing the button changes the settings as follows:

FWD DND Off

•

A FWD/DND button customized on a flexible button is always in FWD/DND Cycle Switch mode, and the mode cannot be changed.

PC Programming Manual References

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features

→ FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension

→ FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO

→ FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from Extension

→ Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension

→ Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO

→ Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from Extension

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 1

→ PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED

→ PT Fwd / DND—DND LED

→ PT Fwd / DND—Fwd/DND key mode when Idle

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—FWD / DND

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

→ Type

→ Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both))

→ Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External))

→ Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal))

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings— FWD / DND Reference

6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

→ Type

→ Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both))

→ Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External))

→ Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal))

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console

→ Type

120 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

→ Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Both))

→ Extension Number (for Group Fwd (External))

→ Extension Number (for Group Fwd (Internal))

Feature Manual References

6.1.1 Fixed Buttons

® 9.1.9 Idle Extension Hunting)

Operating Manual References

3.1.2 Personal Programming

6.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 121

6.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button

122 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Section 7 Features and Configurations—G

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 123

7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES

7.1 G

7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES

Description

This PBX supports various types of groups.

Trunk Group

CO lines can be grouped into trunk groups based on carrier, CO line type, etc. Several settings can be assigned on a trunk group basis. All CO lines belonging to a trunk group follow the programming for that trunk group.

® 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings

® [402] LCOT Trunk Group Number

Each CO line can belong to only one trunk group. CO lines are assigned to a trunk group based on their port numbers (for ELCOT/LCOT and PRI cards) or their channel numbers (for T1 cards).

Extension User Group

Extensions can be grouped into extension user groups. Extension user groups then compose the following groups:

Tenant (

® 17.1.3 Tenant Service)

Call Pickup Group (See below.)

Paging Group (See below.)

Every extension must belong to one extension user group and cannot belong to more than one extension user group.

® 5.6 [3-2] Extension Group

® [603] Extension User Group

Assignable Extensions: Proprietary telephone (PT)/single line telephone (SLT)/portable station (PS)/

T1-OPX

[Example]

Extension User

Group 1

Extension User

Group 2

Extension User

Group 3

Extension User

Group 4

Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Extn. 106 Extn. 107

Call Pickup Group

Using the Group Call Pickup feature, extensions can answer any calls within the call pickup group to which they belong. One extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups. (

® 3.1.8 Call Pickup)

® 5.7 [3-3] Call Pickup Group

® 5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting

® [650] Extension User Groups of a Pickup Group

124 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES

[Example]

Call Pickup Group 1

Extension User

Group 1

Call Pickup Group 2

Extension User

Group 2

Call Pickup Group 3

Extension User

Group 3

Extension User

Group 4

Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Extn. 106 Extn. 107

Paging Group

Using the Paging feature, extensions can make a page to any paging group or answer a page to their own groups. One extension user group or external pager (loudspeaker) can belong to several paging groups.

(

® 13.1.1 Paging)

® 5.9 [3-4] Paging Group

® 5.10 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting

® 5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager

® [640] Extension User Groups of a Paging Group

[Example]

Paging Group 1 Paging Group 2 Paging Group 3 Paging Group 4

Extension User

Group 1

Extension User

Group 2

Extension User

Group 3

Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Pager 1 Pager 2

Idle Extension Hunting Group

If a called extension is busy or in Do Not Disturb (DND) mode, Idle Extension Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle member of the same idle extension hunting group. Members are programmed through system programming. When calls are received, idle extensions are automatically searched for according to a preprogrammed hunting type: Circular Hunting or Terminated Hunting. (

® 5.16 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group

® 5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List

® [680] Idle Extension Hunting Type

® [681] Idle Extension Hunting Group Member

Incoming Call Distribution Group (ICD Group)

An ICD group is a group of extensions which receives incoming calls directed to the group. Each ICD group has a floating extension number (default: 6 + two-digit group number) and name. One extension can belong to multiple ICD groups.

® 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

® 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List

® [623] Incoming Call Distribution Group Name

Assignable Extensions: PT/SLT/PS/T1-OPX/PS ring group

(

® 19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group)

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 125

7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES

[Example]

ICD Group 1

(Floating Extn. No. 601,

Name: Sales 1)

ICD Group 2

(Floating Extn. No. 602,

Name: Sales 2)

Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102

Extn. 103 Extn. 104

Extn. 105 Extn. 106 Extn. 107

VM Group

There are two types of VM groups, explained below.

Type

VM (DPT) Group

VM (DTMF) Group

Description

A group of DPT ports which use Voice Mail DPT (Digital)

Integration features.

One DPT port can belong to only one group.

A group of SLT ports which use Voice Mail DTMF Integration features.

One SLT port can belong to only one group.

(

® 5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings

® 5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings

® 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

® 5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings

® 5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List

® [660] VM Group Floating Extension Number

[Example]

PBX

DPT

Port

SLT

Port

DPT

Port

DPT

Port

DPT

Port

DPT

Port

VM (DPT) Group

SLT

Port

SLT

Port

SLT

Port

SLT

Port

VM (DTMF) Group

VPS

(DPT [Digital] Integration)

VPS

(DTMF Integration)

PS Ring Group

A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions which receives incoming calls directed to the group. Each group has a floating extension number and name assigned through system programming. One PS can belong to multiple PS ring groups. (

® 13.1.29 PS Ring Group)

5.24 [3-9] PS Ring Group

126 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List

PS Ring Group 1

Floating Extension No. 301

Name: Sales 1

PS Ring Group 2

Floating Extension No. 302

Name: Sales 2

PS 1

(Extn. 601)

PS 2

(Extn. 602)

PS 3

(Extn. 603)

PS 4

(Extn. 701)

PS 5

(Extn. 702)

7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES

PC Programming Manual References

Section 5 [3] Group

PT Programming Manual References

[402] LCOT Trunk Group Number

[603] Extension User Group

[620] Incoming Call Distribution Group Member

[622] Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number

[623] Incoming Call Distribution Group Name

[640] Extension User Groups of a Paging Group

[650] Extension User Groups of a Pickup Group

[660] VM Group Floating Extension Number

[680] Idle Extension Hunting Type

[681] Idle Extension Hunting Group Member

Feature Manual References

® 9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution)

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 127

7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES

128 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Section 8 Features and Configurations—H

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 129

8.1.1 Hands-free Answerback

8.1 H

8.1.1 Hands-free Answerback

Description

A proprietary telephone (PT) user with a speakerphone or optional headset can talk to a caller without lifting the handset. If the user receives a call in Hands-free Answerback mode, a hands-free conversation is established in the following method:

Intercom Call

Type

CO Line Call

Answering Method

Established immediately after a beep tone at the called extension and the caller hears a confirmation tone.

Established after a specified number of rings, a called extension hears a beep tone.

Conditions

•

Hands-free Answerback applies to:

Intercom calls and CO line calls, including calls directed to an incoming call distribution group (ICD) in UCD or Priority Hunting distribution method. (

•

Hands-free Answerback for CO Line Calls

System programming is required to use this feature.

•

Hands-free Answerback for Calls From an Extension That Placed a CO Line Call on Consultation

Hold

Calls from an extension that placed a CO line call on Consultation Hold can be treated by this feature as either intercom calls or CO line calls, depending on system programming. If treated as intercom calls, the call will be established immediately.

When transferring a call from an analog CO line, users are strongly recommended to perform a screened transfer, so that the outside caller is not automatically connected to an extension using Hands-free

Answerback when the extension user is absent.

•

Secret Monitor

The beep tone heard by the called party before answering can be eliminated through system programming.

•

Alternate Receiving/Calling Mode (Ring/Voice) Override

Hands-free Answerback overrides the Alternate Receiving mode preset on the telephone and the Alternate

Calling mode from the caller.

•

Hands-free Answerback with Headset

The Hands-free Answerback feature can also be used with a headset.

PC Programming Manual References

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free

4.18 [2-9] System Options

→Option 1— PT Operation—Automatic Answer for Call from CO after

→Option 3— Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer

→Option 4— Transfer—Automatic Answer for Transferred Call

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

→Option 5— Automatic Answer for CO Call

→Option 6— Forced Automatic Answer

130 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

8.1.3 Headset Operation

Feature Manual References

9.1.13 Intercom Call

Operating Manual References

1.3.30 Hands-free Answerback

8.1.2 Hands-free Operation

Description

A proprietary telephone (PT) user can talk to another party without lifting the handset. Pressing specific buttons, such as REDIAL, automatically activate hands-free mode.

Conditions

•

PTs with the MONITOR Button

PTs with the MONITOR button can dial in hands-free mode but cannot have hands-free conversations.

PC Programming Manual References

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4— LCS Answer Mode

8.1.3 Headset Operation

Description

This PBX supports headset compatible proprietary telephones (PTs). A PT user can talk to another party hands-free and without lifting the handset by using an optional headset.

For connection and operation, refer to the Operating Instructions for the headset.

This feature is also known as Handset/Headset Selection.

Conditions

•

If headset mode is on, pressing the SP-PHONE button activates the headset, not the built-in speaker.

•

To set the headset mode on a digital proprietary telephone (DPT), use personal programming (Headset

Operation) or press the Headset button. To set headset mode on an analog proprietary telephone (APT), use the handset/headset selector located on the telephone and/or on the headset.

•

Headset Button

Any flexible button on a DPT can be customized as the Headset button. The Headset button can be also assigned to a flexible button on an APT, but the button will have no function.

•

Answer/Release Button

A flexible button can be customized as an Answer button or a Release button. Such buttons are useful for headset operation. It is possible to answer an incoming call by pressing the Answer button. While hearing a call waiting tone during a conversation, pressing the Answer button enables one to answer the second call by placing the current call on hold. Pressing the Release button enables one to disconnect the line during or after conversation, or to complete a Call Transfer.

•

It is possible to change from headset mode to hands-free mode or vice versa during a conversation by pressing the Headset button.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 131

8.1.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)

•

Headset users cannot use the following features:

–

Automatic Redial (

® 15.1.1 Redial, Last Number)

–

Receiving the Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) (

Announcement))

–

Receiving Whisper OHCA (

® 20.1.4 Whisper OHCA)

PC Programming Manual References

3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— Headset OFF/ON

3.43 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port—IP-PT Registration and De-registration— Headset OFF/

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Type

Feature Manual References

® 13.1.4 Pause Insertion).

Operating Manual References

1.3.32 Headset Operation

3.1.2 Personal Programming

8.1.4 HOSPITALITY FEATURES

Description

This PBX has several features that support its use in a hotel-type environment, where extensions correspond to guest rooms.

Feature Description

Room Status Control

Remote Wake-up Call

SMDR for External Hotel

Application

An extension designated as the hotel operator can set the check-in status of rooms remotely.

An extension designated as the hotel operator can set a timed reminder for a room remotely.

Hospitality feature data, including check-in, check-out, and timed reminder times, can be output to SMDR for use in a PC-based hotel application.

Details in

8.1.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone

Company from a Host PBX)

Description

This PBX can be installed behind an existing PBX (host PBX) by connecting the extension ports of the host

PBX to the CO line ports of this PBX (behind PBX). A Host PBX Access code is required for the behind PBX to access the telephone company (e.g., to make outside calls) through the host PBX. The CO line access number of the host PBX should be stored as a Host PBX Access code on a trunk group of the behind PBX.

132 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

8.1.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)

A preprogrammed Pause time will be automatically inserted between the user dialed Host PBX Access code and the subsequent digits (

[Example]

Telephone Company

Host PBX

Access Code: 0

Host PBX

Outside Party

(01-23-4567)

Idle Line

Access No.: 9

TRG1

PBX

Extn. 101 Extn. 102

Dials "0-01-23-4567".

Host PBX

Access Code

Telephone

No.

Dials "9-0-01-23-4567".

Idle Line

Access No.

Telephone No.

Host PBX

Access Code

Dials "9-101".

Idle Line

Access No.

Extn. No.

of the Host PBX

Note

In this example, "0" should be assigned as a Host PBX Access code for trunk group (TRG) 1 of this PBX.

Conditions

•

TRS

TRS checks only the dialed telephone number excluding the Host PBX Access code when accessing the telephone company through the host PBX. (

•

ARS

A pause is not automatically inserted between the user-dialed access code and the subsequent digits when

ARS mode is enabled. (

•

SMDR

The dialed number including the Host PBX Access code will be recorded on Station Message Detailed

Recording (SMDR) only if the modified number setting is selected in the ARS setting for SMDR.

•

When a Host PBX Access code is assigned to a trunk group, calls to extensions of the host PBX are not recorded on SMDR.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 133

8.1.6 Hot Line

•

A Host PBX Access Code can be used to record only long distance calls on SMDR when a CO line port is connected directly to the telephone company (not a host PBX). This is allowed when the long distance code (e.g., "0") is assigned as the Host PBX Access code. All local calls (e.g., calls that do not require a "0" to be dialed first) are treated as extensions of the telephone company and do not get recorded on

SMDR, because in this case this PBX recognizes the telephone company as the host PBX. Therefore, only long distance calls are recorded on SMDR.

PC Programming Manual References

5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Host PBX Access Code

13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—ARS Dial

PT Programming Manual References

[471] Host PBX Access Code

Feature Manual References

8.1.6 Hot Line

Description

An extension user can make an outgoing call by simply going off-hook, if the user has previously stored the telephone number or the extension number.

If the Hot Line feature is set and the user goes off-hook, a dial tone is generated for a specified time assigned through system programming and then dialing starts. During this waiting time the user can dial another party, overriding the Hot Line feature.

This feature is also known as Pickup Dialing.

Conditions

•

Compatible Telephone

Proprietary telephone (PT), single line telephone (SLT), T1-OPX, and portable station (PS)

PC Programming Manual References

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Program Set / Cancel

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2

→ Pickup Dial Set

→ Pickup Dial No.

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2

→ Pickup Dial Set

→ Pickup Dial No.

PT Programming Manual References

[204] Hot Line Waiting Time

134 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Feature Manual References

® 17.1.5 Time Service) and the music source

Operating Manual References

1.3.34 Hot Line

8.1.6 Hot Line

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 135

8.1.6 Hot Line

136 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Section 9 Features and Configurations—I

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 137

9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES

9.1 I

9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES

Description

An incoming call distribution group is a group of extensions programmed through system programming.

® 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List

® [620] Incoming Call Distribution Group Member

An incoming call distribution group receives calls directed to the group. Each incoming call distribution group has a floating extension number (default: 6 + two-digit group number).

Incoming calls directed to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to the member extensions in the group using a distribution method. When a preprogrammed number of extensions in the group are busy, the incoming calls can wait in a queue.

Each incoming call distribution group and member extensions can be programmed as desired to handle incoming calls. Calls to the group can be monitored by an extension assigned as a supervisor.

5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

→

Main

→

Overflow Queuing Busy

→

Overflow No Answer

→

Miscellaneous

Group

No.

Floating

Extn. No.

601

602

Group

Name

Sales

Engineering

B C D

Distribution

Method

Max. No. of

Busy Extensions

(No. of Agents)

Queuing

Call

Capacity

Hurry-up

Level

Ring

UCD

Max.

Overflow

Time

Overflow Destination

Day

100

200

Lunch Break Night

103

203

100

200

100

200

Tenant

No.

® [622] Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number

® [623] Incoming Call Distribution Group Name

® [624] Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method

® [632] Maximum Number of Agents

® [628] Queuing Call Capacity

® [629] Queuing Hurry-up Level

® [626] Overflow Time

® [625] Destination for Overflow Time Expiration/[627] Destination When All Busy

The tenant number is required to determine the time mode (day/lunch/break/night) (

(for Music on Hold) for each group.

138 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES

Queuing Feature

Five calls are waiting in the queue. (Calls

4 through 8)

Call Distribution

Calls are distributed using the assigned method.

Calls arrive at ICD group 1.

Overflow Feature

a) Sends a busy tone (Busy on Busy), or b) Redirects to the overflow destination.

Manual Queue Redirection

The longest waiting call in a queue can be redirected to the overflow destination by pressing the Hurry-up button.

Supervisor

Extension*

Extn.

100

Extn.

101

Monitors or controls the status of the ICD group.

Extn.

102

Extn.

103

Extn.

104

Extn.

105

ICD Group 1

Floating extension no.: 601

Name: Sales

Agents: 3

Logged-in

Extn.

105

Logged-out

® 9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing

® 9.1.7 ICD Group Features—Supervisory

® 9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out

Group Call Distribution [

® 9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution]

Incoming calls are distributed using one of the following methods:

Distribution Method

Uniform Call Distribution

(UCD)

Priority Hunting

Ring

Description

Calls are distributed evenly to a different extension each time a call is received.

An idle extension is searched for in the specified order, always starting from the same location.

All extensions in the incoming call distribution group ring simultaneously.

Queuing Feature [

® 9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing]

If a preprogrammed numbers of extensions in an incoming call distribution group are busy, a preprogrammed number of additional calls can wait in a queue.

While calls are waiting in the queue, an outgoing message (OGM) or Music on Hold can be sent to the waiting callers.

VIP Call [

® 9.1.8 ICD Group Features—VIP Call]

It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups so that incoming calls can be received in priority order.

Overflow Feature [

® 9.1.5 ICD Group Features—Overflow]

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 139

9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES

A call is redirected to a preprogrammed destination when it cannot be answered or queued (Intercept

Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group). It is also possible to send a busy tone

(Busy on Busy) or disconnect the line.

Incoming Call Distribution Group Controlling Feature

Feature Description & Reference

Log-in/Log-out

Member extensions can join the group to handle calls (Log-in) or leave the group for a break

(Log-out).

They can leave the group temporarily when they are away from their desks, to prevent calls being sent to their extensions.

Supervisory Feature Incoming Call Queue

Monitor

Log-in/Log-out

Monitor and Remote

Control

® 9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out

The supervisor extension can monitor various information about the incoming calls for each incoming call distribution group on his display.

® 9.1.7 ICD Group Features—Supervisory

Monitor: The supervisor extension can monitor the log-in/log-out status of the group members.

Remote Control: The supervisor extension can change the status of the members.

® 9.1.7 ICD Group Features—Supervisory

Conditions

•

One extension can belong to multiple incoming call distribution groups.

•

ICD Group button

An Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group button can be assigned on a flexible button for each incoming call distribution group. It receives the incoming calls to the group.

One extension can have more than one ICD Group button of the same or different incoming call distribution groups (Multiple ICD Group). If all ICD Group buttons in the same incoming call distribution group are occupied, the next incoming call will be held in a queue or will overflow. If the ICD Group button is not assigned, incoming calls will arrive at the INTERCOM, CO or PDN button.

The mode of ICD Group buttons can be selected through system programming, as follows:

–

Standard Mode (Group DN Button Mode)

An extension can have an ICD Group button for an incoming call distribution group that the extension does not belong to through system programming. However, the ICD Group button will not receive calls to that group.

–

Enhanced Phantom Button Mode

An extension can join an ICD Group just by creating a button for that group, even if the extension was not previously registered as a member. When the button is created, the extension will be automatically registered in the lowest-numbered available member slot for the group. Calls to the group can be received at the extension with no further programming. If no member slots are available for that group, the button cannot be created and an alarm tone will be heard.

When creating an ICD Group button in this mode, the user can also specify the delayed ringing settings.

If an extension user deletes the last ICD Group button at his extension for a certain group, he will also be deregistered as a member from that group.

•

Group FWD

140 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution

The FWD feature can be assigned on an incoming call distribution group basis.

•

COS for Incoming Call Distribution Groups

Each incoming call distribution group is assigned a COS number. Group FWD to an outside party can be enabled or disabled for each COS. The COS for incoming call distribution groups is also used for the

Internal Call Block feature; when an extension user calls an incoming call distribution group, the PBX checks the COS of the calling extension against the COS of the incoming call distribution group (

9.1.14 Internal Call Block).

PC Programming Manual References

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings

→CO & SMDR— Call Forward to CO

→Programming & Manager— Group Forward Set

5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

→Main

→Overflow Queuing Busy

→Overflow No Answer

→Miscellaneous

5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous— Options—ICD Group Key Mode

5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List

PT Programming Manual References

[620] Incoming Call Distribution Group Member

[621] Incoming Call Distribution Group Delayed Ringing

[622] Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number

[623] Incoming Call Distribution Group Name

[624] Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method

[625] Destination for Overflow Time Expiration

[626] Overflow Time

[627] Destination When All Busy

[628] Queuing Call Capacity

[629] Queuing Hurry-up Level

[630] Queuing Time Table

[631] Sequences in Queuing Time Table

[632] Maximum Number of Agents

Feature Manual References

3.1.11 CALL WAITING FEATURES)

9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution

Description

Incoming calls directed to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to the member extensions using the selected distribution method until a preprogrammed number of extensions (agents) are busy with calls.

When incoming calls exceed the number of available extensions, calls enter a queue (

® 9.1.6 ICD Group

Features—Queuing).

Distribution Method

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 141

9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution

One of the three distribution methods below can be assigned to each incoming call distribution group.

Distribution Method Description

Uniform Call Distribution

(UCD)

Calls are distributed evenly to a different extension each time a call is received. Extensions are hunted in a circular way in the preprogrammed order for the group, starting at the extension after the extension that received the last call.

Extn.

Received the last call.

Starts searching from extn. B. (Skips extn. A.)

Extn.

Priority Hunting

Depending on system programming, calls can be directed to the longest idle extension. This is known as Automatic Call Distribution (ACD).

An idle extension is searched for using the preprogrammed order for the group.

1st Priority 2nd Priority 3rd Priority ...Priority

Extn.

Always searches beginning with the first extension assigned to the group.

Ring

All extensions in the group ring simultaneously.

Delayed Ringing:

Delayed ringing or no ringing can be programmed for each extension in the group. The call can be answered by pressing the flashing button even if no ring or a delayed time is set.

Extn.

Immediately ring simultaneously.

Delayed Ringing:

Rings after a specified time delay.

Call Waiting for Incoming Call Distribution Group (Group Call Waiting)

When there are no available extensions in an incoming call distribution group, the group members can receive the Call Waiting tone. To use this feature:

•

Select the Group Call Waiting mode through system programming. This determines the distribution method for waiting calls.

•

Member extensions must assign the Call Waiting mode individually, or they will not be notified. (

142 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution

[How the Group Call Waiting Feature Activates]

Programming Conditions

Group Call

Waiting Mode

Distribution

Group Call

Distribution Method

UCD

All

Priority Hunting

Ring

UCD/Priority Hunting/

Ring

Group Call Waiting

Distribution Method

UCD

Result

Capable

Telephone

PT/PS with idle

Priority Hunting

Not available*

ICD Group button

Any telephone

Ring

* Incoming calls enter the queue immediately. Member extensions do not receive the Call Waiting tone.

[Example]

•

Group Call Waiting mode: All

Group call distribution method for idle extensions: UCD

All extensions hear the Call

Waiting tone (Ring).

[ICD Group Button for Group Call Waiting]

The way that the Group Call Waiting feature works depends on the Group Call Waiting Distribution method as follows:

Ring: The Group Call Waiting feature activates for all busy member extensions (even when the extensions do not have ICD Group buttons) simultaneously for only one incoming call—additional calls will wait in a queue.

UCD/Priority Hunting: The Group Call Waiting feature activates on an idle ICD Group button located on busy member extensions in a certain order. (This order depends on the type: UCD or Priority

Hunting.) Calls will arrive at idle buttons until all ICD Group buttons are occupied—additional calls will wait in a queue.

Note

In method b), if an extension has one or more ICD Group buttons for an incoming call distribution group and all the ICD Group buttons on the extension are occupied, the Group Call Waiting feature for the group will not work at the extension.

ICD Group 1

(Floating extension no.: 601)

ICD Group 2

(Floating extension no.: 602)

ICD Group 1; 601 (Call Waiting)

ICD Group 2; 602 (Answering the Call)

No Reply Redirection (UCD or Priority Hunting Method)

If a call received at a member extension is not answered within a preprogrammed time period (No Answer time), the call will be redirected to the next member extension. If there is no idle group member, the call queues at the target extension until a group member becomes available.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 143

9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out

Conditions

•

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

When a KX-NCS4910 or KX-NCS4950 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) is installed in the PBX, and the distribution type is set to Uniform Call Distribution, it is possible to select whether incoming calls are distributed to idle extensions evenly in order (UCD), or to the extension that has been idle the longest (ACD).

•

FWD/DND Extension

System programming for each incoming call distribution group is required to skip or ring extensions which have the FWD or DND feature set. If set to ring, the FWD/DND settings are ignored. (

® 4.1.10 DND (Do

Not Disturb),

® 9.1.8 ICD Group Features—

•

The Group Call Waiting feature cannot be used with the VIP Call feature (

VIP Call) and/or Wrap-up feature (

® 9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out). To use the VIP Call

feature and/or Wrap-up feature, Call Waiting mode on each extension should be off.

PC Programming Manual References

5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Line Hunting Order

5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

→Main— Distribution Method

→Main— Call Waiting Distribution

→Miscellaneous— Extension No Answer Redirection Time

→Miscellaneous— Maximum No. of Busy Extension

5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous— Options—Longest Idle Distribution

(Activation Key Required)

5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List

PT Programming Manual References

[621] Incoming Call Distribution Group Delayed Ringing

[624] Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method

[632] Maximum Number of Agents

9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out

Description

Members of an incoming call distribution group can join (Log-in) or leave (Log-out) the group manually.

They can leave the group temporarily when they are away from their desks, to prevent calls being sent to their extensions. They can return to the group when they are ready to answer calls.

Wrap-up:

While logged in, a member extension can have a preprogrammed time period automatically for refusing calls after completing the previous call (Wrap-up time). While the Wrap-up timer is active, calls to all incoming call distribution groups to which the extension belongs will skip the extension so that the extension user can perform necessary tasks such as reporting on the previous call.

Wrap-up mode can also be activated manually (Not Ready) by pressing the Wrap-up button.

144 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out

[Log-in/Log-out and Wrap-up Status Example]

Incoming call Incoming call Incoming call

Extn.

101

Ready

Extn.

102

Extn.

103

Extn.

104

Extn.

105

Extn.

106

Ready Not Ready Wrap-up Ready

Logged-in

Extn.

102

Logged-out

Call arrives

Ready

Waiting for call

Wrap-up button pressed

Answering a call

Call completed

Wrap-up time expires

Not Ready

Finishing paperwork/ temporary break

Wrap-up button pressed

Wrap-up

Finishing paperwork

Conditions

•

It is programmable whether the last remaining logged-in extension can log out.

•

Log-in/Log-out Button

A flexible button can be customized as the Log-in/Log-out button with the following parameters:

Light Pattern

Parameter Usage

Red on Off

No parameter

Floating extension number of a specified incoming call distribution group

(All)

Used with an ICD Group button, or with the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group, or with (All).

Used to log in to or out of the specified incoming call distribution group.

Used to log in to or out of all incoming call distribution groups to which the extension user belongs.

—

Log-out

Status

After Log-out

Operation

—

Log-in Status

After Log-in

Operation

•

If an ICD Group button is assigned, it also shows the log-in/log-out status of the corresponding group. The light pattern is the same as the Log-in/Log-out button that includes the group number.

•

Wrap-up Timer

–

Two wrap-up timers can be programmed, an ICD Group member wrap-up timer and an extension wrap-up timer. System programming selects which timer is used. When the ICD Group member wrap-up timer is selected, the timer is only activated after calls to the extension through an ICD Group.

When the extension wrap-up timer is selected, the timer is activated after all calls to or from the extension, including a retrieved call on hold.

–

Only calls from ICD Groups cannot be received during the wrap-up time. Other calls are received as normal.

–

The wrap-up timer does not work for SIP extensions or PS Ring Groups.

•

Wrap-up Button

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 145

9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out

A flexible button can be customized as the Wrap-up button. It shows the current status as follows:

Light pattern Status

Slow red flashing

Red on

Off

Wrap-up

Not Ready

Ready (Wrap-up mode cancel)

•

When a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode completes a call, neither the PS nor its wired telephone can have Wrap-up time. (

® 9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution).

•

Automatic Log-out

A member extension may be logged out automatically, if the Unanswered time expires a preprogrammed number of times consecutively. The number of consecutive unanswered calls can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group. If the extension is a member of more than one incoming call distribution group, the unanswered number is counted across all corresponding incoming call distribution groups. It is possible to return to log-in mode manually.

The Automatic Log-out feature does not work for extensions in an incoming call distribution group using the Ring distribution method (

•

Log-in/Log-out Monitor

The supervisor extension can monitor and control the log-in/log-out status of the incoming call distribution group members. (

® 9.1.7 ICD Group Features—Supervisory)

•

Log-in/Log-out Information on SMDR

Log-in/Log-out information can be printed out on SMDR. (

® 16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail

Recording))

PC Programming Manual References

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features

→ Log-in / Log-out

→ Not Ready (Manual Wrap-up) Mode On / Off

5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous

→ No. of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log-out

→ Last Extension Log-out

5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous— Options—Wrap-up Timer based on

5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List— Wrap-up Timer

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

→ Type

→ Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)

→ Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out)

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer

6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

→ Type

→ Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)

→ Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out)

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console

→ Type

→ Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)

→ Extension Number (for Log-in/Log-out)

13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— Print Information—Log-in / Log-out

146 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations

Feature Manual References

Operating Manual References

1.3.38 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out

9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations

Description

Up to 4 outside parties or destinations at another PBX can be assigned as members of an Incoming Call

Distribution (ICD) Group, using the following method: A virtual PS is registered as a member of the ICD Group.

Then, the telephone number of the outside destination is specified as the FWD—All Calls destination. Calls to the ICD Group will also ring at the outside destination as if that destination were an extension within the PBX.

This is useful in situations such as the following:

•

An extension user can have his PT and multiple cellular phones ring together for calls.

•

An employee who is not in the office, but is still available to answer calls, can receive calls to an ICD Group.

Cellular

Company

Telephone Company

PBX-2 PBX-1

TIE

ICD Group

Virtual PS 1

Virtual PS 4

Virtual PS 2

Virtual PS 3

Cellular Phone XDP Parallel

The extension registered first in an ICD Group can program the Forward settings for CO line calls to up to 4 virtual PSs through PT programming. Using this feature, an extension user can assign his cellular phone to ring with his PT, so that he can easily receive CO line calls even when not at his desk.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 147

9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations

Conditions

•

The KX-NCS4910 or KX-NCS4950 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) is required to use this feature.

•

For this feature to be activated, the following conditions must be met:

–

A virtual PS is assigned as a member of the ICD Group. (

® 19.1.2 Virtual PS)

–

The forwarding type of the virtual PS is set to All Calls. (

® 9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call

–

The forwarding destination is an outside party, including an extension at another PBX in the network.

–

FWD to CO line is allowed through COS programming for the virtual PSs.

–

The distribution method for the ICD Group is set to Ring. (

Distribution)

•

Up to 4 virtual PSs can be assigned to a single ICD Group. If more than 4 are assigned, the 4 virtual PSs with the lowest member numbers are available.

•

ELCOT/LCOT CO lines and channels of a T1 CO line set to LCOT do not support this feature.

•

Calls to an ICD Group will ring at a virtual PS even if all of the other extensions assigned to the group are busy.

•

If all members of an ICD Group are virtual PSs, and CO lines are available but the called parties are all busy, neither the queuing or overflow features will operate. Therefore, it is recommended that at least one

PT or SLT is also assigned to an ICD Group.

•

To log in to or out of a group, a virtual PS user can access the PBX through DISA, enter the Walking COS feature number (if required), and access log-in/log-out settings.

•

Delayed ringing can be assigned for virtual PSs in the same way as for other extensions.

•

The wrap-up time feature is not available for virtual PSs.

•

When forwarding calls to a public CO line, system programming selects whether the CLIP number of the calling party or of the virtual PS is sent to the forward destination.

When calling using a private network, the CLIP number of the calling party will always be sent.

•

DSS button for Cellular Phone XDP Parallel

The DSS button light of the extension registered first in an ICD Group will turn red if the parallel cellular phone:

– is on a CO line call that was received via the ICD Group.

– is on a CO line call that was made using the Walking COS Through DISA feature. (

® 4.1.8 DISA

(Direct Inward System Access))

PC Programming Manual References

3.47 [1-2] Portable Station—PS Registration and De-registration

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Call Forward to CO

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO

5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main

→ Floating Extension Number

→ Distribution Method

5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List

→ Extension Number

→ Delayed Ring

6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND

PT Programming Manual References

[620] Incoming Call Distribution Group Member

[621] Incoming Call Distribution Group Delayed Ringing

[622] Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number

[624] Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method

148 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

9.1.5 ICD Group Features—Overflow

[690] PS Registration

Feature Manual References

13.1.18 Private Network Features—Network ICD Group

19.1.2 Virtual PS

9.1.5 ICD Group Features—Overflow

Description

When waiting calls exceed the waiting queue capacity, they may be redirected to a preprogrammed destination or a busy tone may be sent to the callers by the following features:

Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group

Busy on Busy

Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group

Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group works in one of following conditions:

There is no space in the waiting queue.

The Queuing Time Table is not assigned and there are no extensions logged in.

An Overflow command is assigned to the Queuing Time Table.

The Overflow time expires.

Manual Queue Redirection is performed.

[Available Destination]

The overflow destinations can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group and each time mode

(day/lunch/break/night) (

® 17.1.5 Time Service). The destination can be assigned as follows, depending

on the above conditions.

•

For a) and b):

® 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Overflow Queuing Busy—

Queuing Busy—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night

® [627] Destination When All Busy

•

For c), d), and e):

® 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Overflow No Answer— Time out

& Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night

® [625] Destination for Overflow Time Expiration

Destination Availability

Wired Extension (PT/SLT/SIP Extension/T1-OPX)

ICD Group

PS Ring Group

Floating Extension no. for SVM

VM Group (DTMF/DPT)

External Pager (TAFAS)

DISA

Analog/ISDN Remote Maintenance

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 149

9.1.5 ICD Group Features—Overflow

Destination

Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.

Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. + Phone no.

Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line, Access with PBX Code)

Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line, Access without PBX Code)

Availability

Busy on Busy

The Busy on Busy feature works when the destination for the Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming

Call Distribution Group feature is not assigned in one of the following conditions:

There is no space in the Waiting queue.

The Queuing Time Table is not assigned and there are no extensions logged-in.

[Example of a)]

There are five assistants in a shop. When the answering agent number is "2", and the queuing call number is "0":

If two of the assistants are talking on the phone, the next caller will hear a busy tone to prevent the caller from thinking that there is no one in the shop or that the shop is closed.

Conditions

[Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group]

•

If the Overflow time expires, and the overflow destination is unavailable: a.

If the CO line call arrives through the ELCOT/LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) card:

(1) If the call was once in a queue and an outgoing message (OGM) was sent to it, or the call reached an incoming call distribution group by using the DISA feature (

Access)): The line is disconnected.

(2) In all other cases: Redirection is ignored and the Overflow timer activates again.

If the call arrives through another card: Redirection is ignored and the Overflow timer activates again.

[Busy on Busy]

•

If a CO line call arrives through the ELCOT/LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) card, a busy tone will not be sent to the caller.

PC Programming Manual References

5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

→Overflow Queuing Busy

→Overflow No Answer

5.14 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table

PT Programming Manual References

[625] Destination for Overflow Time Expiration

[626] Overflow Time

[627] Destination When All Busy

[628] Queuing Call Capacity

[632] Maximum Number of Agents

150 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing

Feature Manual References

9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing

Description

When a preprogrammed number of extensions in an incoming call distribution group are busy, additional incoming calls can wait in a queue. The number of calls which can wait in the queue is programmable.

While calls are waiting in the queue, the calls are handled by the Queuing Time Table, which can be assigned for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) (

® 17.1.5 Time Service). This PBX supports a specified number

of Queuing Time Tables which each have a specified number of sequences (specific commands which are performed when a caller enters a queue). The following commands can be assigned to each sequence when making a Queuing Time Table:

[Command Table]

Command Description Condition

OGM xx

Wait

Sequence c

An outgoing message is sent to the caller. "xx" applies to the OGM number.

The caller waits for the specified time while hearing a ringback tone or Music on Hold.

After the OGM, Music on Hold will be sent and the next event in the sequence will be activated.

If an OGM has not been sent to the caller, the caller hears a ringback tone.

If an OGM has been sent to the caller, the caller hears Music on

Hold.

None

Overflow

Disconnect

None

(No command)

Redirects to sequence c. "c" applies to the sequence number.

Redirects to the overflow destination.

Disconnects the line.

Redirects to the next sequence.

None

If assigned as sequence 01, the

Queuing Time Table will not be activated.

[Programming Example of Queuing Time Table]

Sequence

Queuing Time

Table No.

Sequence 01 Sequence 02 Sequence 03 Sequence 04

OGM 01

OGM 02

Wait 30 s

OGM 03

OGM 04

Overflow

None

: : : :

...

® 5.14 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table—

Queuing Sequence—Sequence 01–16

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 151

9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing

® [631] Sequences in Queuing Time Table

If a call has not reached a destination by the time the final sequence is completed, the call will be disconnected.

Explanation for Queuing Time Table 01:

The call enters the queue.

Sequence 01

OGM 01 is played.

Thank you for calling Panasonic.

All of our agents are currently handling other calls. Please hold the line. We will answer your call shortly.

Queuing Time Table 01

Sequence 02

Music on Hold is played for

30 seconds.

Sequence 03

OGM 03 is played.

We are sorry to keep you holding.

All of our agents are still handling other calls. We are transferring you to the

Sequence 04

The call is redirected to the overflow destination.

The call is answered by the overflow destination.

The call is connected to an agent as soon as one becomes available.

Conditions

•

If the call is transferred to the incoming call distribution group and is handled by the Queuing Time

Table:

Transfer Recall will not occur even if the Transfer Recall time expires.

•

Manual Queue Redirection

It is possible to redirect the longest waiting call in a queue to the overflow destination by pressing the

Hurry-up button. (If the call is already ringing at an extension, it will not be redirected.)

This feature is also known as Hurry-up Transfer.

•

Hurry-up Button

A flexible button can be customized as the Hurry-up button. The number of calls queuing before Manual

Queue Redirection may be performed is programmable. The button shows the current status as follows:

Light Pattern Calls in the Waiting Queue

Off

Red on

Rapid red flashing

No queued call

At or under the assigned number for Hurry-up

Over the assigned number for Hurry-up

PC Programming Manual References

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Incoming Call Queue Monitor

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— Transfer—Transfer to busy Extension without BSS Operation

5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

→Overflow Queuing Busy

→Overflow No Answer

→Queuing Time Table

→Miscellaneous— Extension No Answer Redirection Time

→Miscellaneous— Maximum No. of Busy Extension

5.14 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table

5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings— Call Waiting on VM Group

5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings— Others—Call Waiting on VM Group

152 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

9.1.7 ICD Group Features—Supervisory

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

→ Type

→ Extension Number (for Hurry-up)

6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

→ Type

→ Extension Number (for Hurry-up)

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console

→ Type

→ Extension Number (for Hurry-up)

PT Programming Manual References

[628] Queuing Call Capacity

[629] Queuing Hurry-up Level

[630] Queuing Time Table

[631] Sequences in Queuing Time Table

[632] Maximum Number of Agents

Feature Manual References

9.1.5 ICD Group Features—Overflow

Operating Manual References

1.3.40 ICD Group Features—Manual Queue Redirection

9.1.7 ICD Group Features—Supervisory

Description

An extension preprogrammed as a supervisor (supervisor extension) can monitor and control each member’s status within the incoming call distribution group using a 6-line display PT.

Feature

Incoming Call Queue Monitor

Log-in/Log-out Monitor and

Remote Control

Description

The supervisor extension can monitor the status of an incoming call distribution group with the display.

Monitor: The supervisor extension can monitor the log-in/log-out status of the incoming call distribution group members through the corresponding DSS button light.

Remote Control: The supervisor extension can change the status of the members by pressing the corresponding DSS button.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 153

9.1.7 ICD Group Features—Supervisory

[Example]

<Incoming Call Queue Monitor Display>

JAN.31 08:13AM FRI

601:Sales Section

Waiting Calls Now :00006

Max. Waiting Time :05'10

--- Date and time

--- ICD group's floating extension number and name

--- Number of calls waiting in the queue

--- Elapsed waiting time of the call queuing the longest

EXIT LOG SPRVS

Since JAN.29 09:10AM

Total Calls :00996

Overflow Calls :00131

Lost Calls :00039

Average Waiting :02'12

EXIT CLEAR

--- Monitoring starting date and time

--- Total number of incoming calls

--- Total number of overflowed calls

--- Total number of lost calls

--- Average queuing time

<Log-in/Log-out Monitor/Remote Control Mode with DSS Button light>

JAN.31 08:13AM FRI

601:Sales Section

Waiting Calls Now :00006

Max. Waiting Time :05'10

With

EXIT

Log-in/Log-out Monitor

DSS buttons show the status of the corresponding group members.

Light pattern

Green on

Status

Log-in (Ready)

Slow Green Flashing Log-in (Not Ready)

Red on Log-out

Off Extension in another ICD group

Log-in/Log-out Remote Control

Pressing a DSS button changes the extension's status as follows:

Status

Log-out

Light pattern

Red on

Log-in (Ready) Green on

Conditions

•

Available Extension as a Supervisor Extension a.

One supervisor extension can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group, but it need not belong to the group.

One extension can be the supervisor extension of more than one incoming call distribution group.

•

Available Paired DSS Console

This feature is available for the KX-T7640, KX-T7440, and KX-T7441.

•

Accumulation Value Clear

Accumulation value data (total incoming calls, total overflowed calls, lost calls, average queuing time) can be cleared manually. The date and time of clearing is saved and is shown on the display (monitoring starting date and time). When the value exceeds 99999 before clearing, "****" will be shown.

•

If a call to an incoming call distribution group is overflowed:

If the display is in idle status, it will change to monitor mode for the corresponding incoming call distribution group automatically.

If the display is monitoring another incoming call distribution group, it will not change.

•

Other Features while in Monitor Mode

The supervisor can use other features on the extension (making calls, pressing the MESSAGE button, etc.) even while in monitor mode. When each operation is finished, his telephone returns to the queue monitor display.

154 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

9.1.8 ICD Group Features—VIP Call

PC Programming Manual References

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Incoming Call Queue Monitor

5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous— Supervisor Extension

Number

Operating Manual References

1.3.41 ICD Group Features—Supervisory

9.1.8 ICD Group Features—VIP Call

Description

It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups. If an extension belongs to multiple groups and the extension becomes idle, queuing calls in the groups will be distributed to the extension in priority order.

Each incoming call distribution group can enable or disable the VIP Call mode. When multiple groups enable the VIP Call mode, the incoming call distribution group with the lowest numbered group has the highest priority.

When multiple groups disable the VIP Call mode, queuing calls are distributed to extensions uniformly.

[Example]

In the call center, incoming call distribution groups 1 and 3 enable the VIP Call mode, while incoming call distribution groups 2 and 4 disable the VIP Call mode.

Calls have been distributed by DIL/DID/CLI distribution.

(The circled numbers indicate the arrival order of the calls.

ICD Group 1

(for VIPs)

1st

Priority

3rd

Priority

ICD Group 2

(for general customers)

ICD Group 3

(for special customers)

2nd

Priority

Extn.

101

Extn.

102

Extn.

103

Distribution order:

1 6 2 4 3 7 5 8

From: Group 1 Group 3 Groups 2 and 4

3rd

Priority

ICD Group 4

(for general customers)

Calls have been distributed by DIL/DID/CLI distribution.

(The circled numbers indicate the arrival order of the calls.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 155

9.1.9 Idle Extension Hunting

PC Programming Manual References

5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous— VIP Call Mode

9.1.9 Idle Extension Hunting

Description

If a called extension is busy or in DND mode, Idle Extension Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle member of the same idle extension hunting group, which can be programmed through system programming.

Idle extensions are automatically searched according to a preprogrammed hunting type.

This feature is also known as Station Hunting.

Type Description

Circular Hunting

An idle extension is searched for in the order specified in the idle extension hunting group in a circular way.

Incoming call

Extn.

Assignment order

Busy

Extn.

Terminated Hunting

An idle extension is searched for in the order specified in the idle extension hunting group until reaching the last assigned extension.

Incoming call

Extn.

Busy

Extn.

Assignment order

Extn.

Last

Extn.

Conditions

•

Idle Extension Hunting applies to:

Intercom, CO line, and doorphone calls to a single destination.

•

An extension user can belong to only one idle extension hunting group.

•

If all the searched extensions are busy:

The PBX redirects the call to an overflow destination which can be assigned for each idle extension hunting group and each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) (

® 17.1.5 Time Service).

[Available Destination]

Destination

Wired Extension (PT/SLT/SIP Extension/T1-OPX)

ICD Group

PS Ring Group

Availability

156 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES

Destination

Floating Extension no. for SVM

VM Group (DTMF/DPT)

External Pager (TAFAS)

DISA

Analog/ISDN Remote Maintenance

Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.

Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. + Phone no.

Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line, Access with PBX Code)

Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line, Access without PBX Code)

Availability

•

FWD/DND Mode

While searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group, any extension that has set

FWD—All Calls or DND feature will be skipped, and the call will go to the next extension in the group.

PC Programming Manual References

5.16 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group

5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List

PT Programming Manual References

[680] Idle Extension Hunting Type

[681] Idle Extension Hunting Group Member

Feature Manual References

® 13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES), while public lines connect a PBX

9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES

Description

Each CO line functions as either a public line or a private line. Private lines are used to connect different PBXs and form a private network (

to a public network, i.e., the telephone company. Certain PBX features are available depending on the networking type (public or private) of each CO line.

Networking Type Used by Each CO Line

Each CO line port (channel) of a CO line card or an IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card is assigned a port (channel) type which determines the CO line’s networking type—public or private.

® 3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port— Trunk Property

® 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL— Trunk Property

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 157

9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES

Card

Type

IPCMPR/IPCEMPR

(V-IPGW)

IPCMPR/IPCEMPR

(V-SIPGW)

IP-GW

ELCOT/LCOT

Port/Channel/

Protocol Type

H.323

SIP

H.323

PRI

LCOT

GCOT

DID

TIE (E&M)

OPX (EXTN.)

Extension

QSIG-Master

QSIG-Slave

: Default

: Available

Networking Type

Public Private

Distribution Method

Each public CO line port (channel) can use a different method of directing calls to their destinations as they are received.

Distribution Method

Direct In Line (DIL)

Direct Inward Dialing

(DID)

Description

Directs a call to a preprogrammed destination, such as an operator, based on the CO line carrying the call.

Directs a call received on a DID line to a preprogrammed destination based on the telephone number dialed by the caller.

Details in

Calling Line Identification (CLI) distribution is the most customizable call distribution method available. It allows calls from specific people to be directed to specific destinations, based on the callers’ telephone numbers. CLI distribution, when enabled for the current time mode, takes precedence over DIL or DID distribution.

Distribution Method Description Details in

Calling Line

Identification (CLI)

Distribution

Directs a call to its preprogrammed destination if the caller’s telephone number and its CLI destination has been stored in the System Speed

Dialing Table.

158 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES

Available Distribution Method for Public CO Lines

Card

Type

ELCOT/LCOT

Port/Channel

Type

PRI

: Default

: Available

LCOT

GCOT

DID

TIE (E&M)

Distribution Method

DIL DID

Available Destination

The following destination types can be programmed as DIL, DID, or CLI destinations.

Destination Type

Wired Extension (PT/SLT/SIP Extension/T1-OPX)

ICD Group

PS Ring Group

Floating Extension no. for SVM

VM Group (DTMF/DPT)

External Pager (TAFAS)

DISA

Analog/ISDN Remote Maintenance

Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.

Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. + Phone no.

Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line, Access with PBX Code)

Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line, Access without PBX Code)

Availability

Intercept Routing

After a call has been directed to its DIL, DID, or CLI destination, the following Intercept Routing features, if programmed, can redirect the call.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 159

9.1.11 Intercept Routing

Type

No Answer (IRNA)

Busy

DND

No Destination

Description

If a called party does not answer a call within a preprogrammed time period (Intercept time), the call is redirected to a preprogrammed destination.

If a called party is already handling another call, the new call is redirected to a preprogrammed destination.

If a called party is in Do Not Disturb (DND) mode, the call is redirected to a preprogrammed destination.

If a destination is not assigned, the call is redirected to an operator.

Details in

PC Programming Manual References

3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port— Trunk Property

12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL— Trunk Property

9.1.11 Intercept Routing

Description

Redirects an incoming CO line call or intercom call to a preprogrammed destination when the original destination does not, or can not, answer the call. There are four types of Intercept Routing, described below.

Type Description

No Answer (IRNA)

If a called party does not answer a call within a preprogrammed time period

(IRNA Timer), the call is redirected to a preprogrammed intercept destination.

The assigned intercept destination of the extension port.

Busy

DND

® 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters

→

Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—

Day, Lunch, Break, Night

→

DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— DISA—Intercept Timer—Day,

Lunch, Break, Night

® [203] Intercept Time

If a called party is already handling a call, new calls are handled as follows:

–

The call is redirected to the preprogrammed Intercept Routing—Busy destination.

–

If an Intercept Routing—Busy destination is not enabled, the caller will hear a busy tone. However, if the call is made through an ELCOT/

LCOT or T1 [LCOT/GCOT] card, the caller hears a ringback tone.

If a called party is in Do Not Disturb (DND) mode, the call is redirected to a preprogrammed intercept destination.

160 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

9.1.11 Intercept Routing

Type

No Destination

Description

If a call has no destination (i.e., if a destination is not assigned), the call is redirected to an operator. (

® 9.1.12 Intercept Routing—No Destination)

Intercept Routing redirects calls to destinations based on the original destination of the call, as shown in the table below. Different intercept destinations can be programmed for each time mode. Note that calls redirected by Intercept Routing—No Answer/DND are directed to the same destination, while Intercept Routing—Busy is directed to a separate destination, and the intercept destination for Intercept Routing—No Destination is always an operator.

•

Wired Extension (PT/SLT/SIP Extension/

T1-OPX)

•

When the original destination is: The Available Intercept Destination is:

The destination assigned to the original extension.

•

ICD Group

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—

Intercept Destination

→

Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

→

Intercept Destination—When Called Party is

Busy

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—

Intercept Destination

→

Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

→

Intercept Destination—When Called Party is

Busy

® [604] Extension Intercept Destination

The ICD Group Overflow destination assigned to the group. (

® 9.1.5 ICD Group Features—Overflow)

•

VM Group (DTMF/DPT)

DISA

® 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—

Group Settings—Overflow No Answer— Time out

& Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day,

Lunch, Break, Night

® [625] Destination for Overflow Time Expiration

The destination assigned to the first extension of the

VM group.

If all DISA ports are busy when a call is made using

DISA, one of the following can be selected through system programming:

•

Disable: Busy tone is sent to the caller. When using an analog CO line, a ringback tone is sent.

•

Operator: The call will be redirected to the operator.

•

AA-0, AA-9: The call will be redirected to the destination assigned to that AA number.

® 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—

Option 1— DISA Intercept—Intercept when all

DISA ports are busy

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 161

9.1.11 Intercept Routing

When the original destination is:

•

PS Ring Group

•

External Pager (TAFAS)

•

Analog/ISDN Remote Maintenance

•

Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code)

The Available Intercept Destination is:

Not assignable (Intercept Routing is not available.)

Intercept Routing for DISA will redirect a call only if all of the Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ports are busy. If Intercept Routing is activated after a call from DISA reaches the destination extension, the Intercept Routing settings assigned to that extension will be applied.

By assigning the forward destination of a Virtual PS to a PS Ring Group or external pager, and assigning Intercept Routing destinations to the Virtual PS, calls to these destinations will be redirected to the Intercept Routing destination of the Virtual PS.

Programming Example

<Forward Destination of Virtual PS>

Ext. No. of the Virtual PS FWD Destination

2001

...

600

...

"600" is an example of a

Floating Extension No.

for the External Pager

<Intercept Destination of Virtual PS>

Intercept Destination

Ext. No. of the Virtual PS

Day Lunch Break Night

2001

...

1001

...

1001

...

1001

...

1001

...

When extension 2001 is called from another extension or is the first destination of an incoming CO line call, etc., the call will ring at extension 600 (external pager) first, and then ring at the intercept destination (extension 1001) after the IRNA

Timer expires.

[Available Intercept Destination]

The following can be used as intercept destinations:

Intercept Destination

Wired Extension (PT/SLT/SIP Extension/T1-OPX)

ICD Group

PS Ring Group

Floating Extension no. for SVM

VM Group (DTMF/DPT)

External Pager (TAFAS)

DISA

Analog/ISDN Remote Maintenance

Availability

162 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

9.1.11 Intercept Routing

Intercept Destination

Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.

Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. + Phone no.

Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line, Access with PBX Code)

Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line, Access without PBX Code)

Availability

Conditions

•

If the intercept destination is busy or in DND mode and therefore cannot receive the call: a.

When the call was intercepted via Intercept Routing—No Answer, the call is sent back to the original destination and continues to ring at the original destination until answered.

When the call was intercepted via Intercept Routing—Busy and arrived through an ELCOT/LCOT or

T1 (LCOT/GCOT) card, the call waits at the original destination. If the extension has Call Waiting activated, the user will hear a call waiting tone. When the call arrived on any other card, the caller hears a busy tone.

When the call was intercepted via Intercept Routing—DND and arrived through an ELCOT/LCOT or

T1 (LCOT/GCOT) card, the call waits at the original destination and it rings. When the call arrived through any other card, the caller hears a busy tone.

•

If the intercept destination can, but does not, answer the call:

The call continues to ring at the intercept destination until answered.

•

Intercept Routing—DND on/off

Intercept Routing—DND can each be enabled or disabled for the entire system, through system programming. If enabled, calls will be routed to the appropriate destination.

If disabled, a call to an extension which is in DND mode will be handled as described below, depending on the type of line carrying the call.

® 12.6 [10-4] Miscellaneous— Intercept—Intercept Routing - DND (Destination sets DND.)

ELCOT/LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) Card: The caller will hear a ringback tone. If in DND mode, the extension will ring.

All other lines: An outside caller will hear a busy tone and an extension caller will hear a DND tone.

•

Idle Extension Hunting

If an extension is a member of an idle extension hunting group, calls to that extension will not be redirected by Intercept Routing—Busy/DND. If the extension is busy or in DND mode, calls to that extension will be redirected to the next extension in the idle extension hunting group.

•

Intercept Routing for intercom calls can be enabled or disabled on a system basis.

® 12.6 [10-4] Miscellaneous— Intercept—Intercept Routing for Extension Call

•

IRNA Timer

The IRNA timer can be set on a system basis and an extension basis for each time mode (day, lunch, break, night).

® 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept No Answer Time— Intercept No Answer

Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

•

The Intercept Routing destination for each time mode will not apply for Intercept Routing—Busy. When the original destination is busy, the call is redirected to the Intercept Routing—Busy destination assigned through system programming. If no destination is assigned the caller will hear a busy tone.

•

The time modes that are selected for CO line calls arriving at extensions and VM groups are decided on a tenant basis.

•

When an intercom, CO line, or DISA call is received by an extension and forwarded (e.g., FWD—All Calls) to an outside destination, and the outside destination is busy or does not answer, the Intercept Routing feature can be used. This can be useful when calls are forwarded to cellular phones.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 163

9.1.12 Intercept Routing—No Destination

This feature may not be available depending on the specifications of some CO lines. Also, this feature is not available when the original call was made from a SIP extension.

PC Programming Manual References

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters

→Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

→DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— DISA—Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings

→Overflow No Answer— Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

→Intercept Destination

→Intercept No Answer Time

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings

→Intercept Destination

→Intercept No Answer Time

7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1— DISA Intercept—Intercept when all DISA ports are busy

12.6 [10-4] Miscellaneous

→ Intercept—Intercept Routing - DND (Destination sets DND.)

→ Intercept—Routing to Operator - No Destination (Destination is not programmed.)

→ Intercept—Intercept Routing for Extension Call

PT Programming Manual References

[203] Intercept Time

[604] Extension Intercept Destination

[625] Destination for Overflow Time Expiration

Feature Manual References

13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension).

9.1.12 Intercept Routing—No Destination

Description

Directs a CO line call to an operator when the call has no assigned destination.

Conditions

•

Intercept Routing—No Destination on/off

Intercept Routing—No Destination can be enabled or disabled for the entire system, through system programming. If disabled, the caller will hear a reorder tone.

Note that calls received through an ELCOT/LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) card will always be directed to an operator, even when this feature is disabled.

•

If an operator is not assigned:

The default intercept destination will be the extension connected to the lowest numbered port, on the card installed in the lowest numbered slot.

•

Intercept Routing—No Destination also applies to calls from doorphones.

164 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

9.1.13 Intercom Call

PC Programming Manual References

4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM— PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

12.6 [10-4] Miscellaneous— Intercept—Routing to Operator - No Destination (Destination is not programmed.)

PT Programming Manual References

[006] Operator Assignment

Feature Manual References

12.1.5 Operator Features

9.1.13 Intercom Call

Description

An extension user can call another extension user.

Conditions

•

Extension Number/Name Assignment

Extension numbers and names are assigned to all extensions. The assigned number and name of the other extension are shown on display PTs during intercom calls.

•

DSS Button

It is possible to call another extension by simply pressing the corresponding Direct Station Selection (DSS) button. Any flexible button can be customized as a DSS button.

•

Call Directory—Extension Dialing

Display proprietary telephone (PT) users can make a call by selecting stored names on the display.

•

Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice

A PT user can select to receive intercom calls by ring tone or by voice, through personal programming

(Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice). If a user selects voice-calling, the calling party talks to the user immediately after a confirmation tone. Denying voice-calling can also be selected.

•

Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice

A caller can change the called party’s preset call receiving method (ring tone or voice) temporarily. By doing so, ring-calling is switched to voice-calling, or vice versa, at the called party. The called party may deny voice-calling.

•

PDN/SDN

It is not possible to temporarily change the called party’s preset call receiving method when making a call using a Primary Directory Number (PDN) button or Secondary Directory Number (SDN) button (

•

Tone after Dialing

After dialing an extension number, a user will hear one of the following:

Type

Ringback Tone

Confirmation Tone

Busy Tone

Description

Indicates the called party is being called.

Indicates the called party has set voice-calling.

Indicates the called party is busy.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 165

9.1.14 Internal Call Block

DND Tone

Type Description

Indicates the called party has set DND.

PC Programming Manual References

4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Alternate Calling - Ring / Voice

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

→Main— Extension Number

→Main— Extension Name

→Option 3— Intercom Call by Voice

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main

→ Extension Number

→ Extension Name

PT Programming Manual References

[003] Extension Number

[004] Extension Name

Feature Manual References

12.1.5 Operator Features)

Operating Manual References

1.2.1 Making Calls

1.3.3 Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice

1.4.3 Directories

3.1.2 Personal Programming

9.1.14 Internal Call Block

Description

Internal calls can be restricted based on the Class of Service (COS) assigned to the caller and to the called party.

[Programming Example: Internal Call Block]

Caller

COS 1

COS 2

COS 3

COS 1

Block

Called Party

COS 2 COS 3

Block

COS...

Block

166 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)

In this example: a.

COS 1 can make calls to all extensions.

COS 2 can make calls to COS 1 only. (COS 2 cannot make calls to COS 2.)

COS 3 can make calls to COS 3 only.

COS 1

Extn. 100 Extn. 101

COS 2 COS 3

Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Extn. 106

Conditions

•

Internal Call Block also prohibits certain features, such as Walking Extension and Walking COS, from being performed between certain extensions.

•

Any extension can make an Operator Call regardless of the Internal Call Block setting of its COS. (

•

Because each doorphone port is assigned a COS, the Internal Call Block feature can restrict certain extensions from calling certain doorphones. (

PC Programming Manual References

4.14 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block— COS Number of the Extension Which Receive the Call from Other Extension 1–64

5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main— COS

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

7.1 [5-1] Doorphone— COS

7.6 [5-4] External Relay— COS Number

Feature Manual References

9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)

Description

This PBX supports the connection of IP proprietary telephones (IP-PTs), which function almost identically to normal PTs. However, they connect to the PBX over a Local Area Network (LAN), and send and receive calls using Internet Protocol (IP).

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 167

9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)

IP-PTs have two Ethernet ports for connection, primary and secondary. They are connected to the PBX through a network hub or other splitting device, and can have a PC connected to the secondary Ethernet port.

[Connection Example]

PBX

IP-PT

IP-EXT

Private IP

Network

IP-PT PC

IP-PT

Primary

Ethernet Port

Secondary

Ethernet Port

Main Office

Branch Office

Conditions

•

A V-IPEXT card or IP-EXT card is required to use IP-PTs.

•

IP-PT registration is required through system programming before an IP-PT can be used with the PBX. An

IP-PT cannot be used unless an extension number is assigned. For details on how to register IP-PTs, see the IP Networking Guide.

•

The following features cannot be used with an IP-PT:

–

XDP (

–

Digital XDP (

® 12.1.3 OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement))

–

OHCA (

–

Walking Extension (

® 20.1.2 Walking Extension)

–

Using PC Phone or PC Console on a connected PC (

® 13.1.5 PC Console/PC Phone)

•

The KX-NT265 does not have a secondary Ethernet port.

•

The following optional devices are available for the KX-NT400/KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321) IP-PT:

–

KX-NT307(PSLP1528) Bluetooth

Module

–

KX-NT303 Add-on 12 Key Module (not available for KX-NT400 or KX-NT366)

–

KX-NT305 Add-on 60 Key Module (not available for KX-NT400 or KX-NT366)

•

KX-NT307(PSLP1528) Bluetooth Module

A Bluetooth wireless headset can be registered to a KX-NT400/KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321) IP-PT containing the KX-NT307(PSLP1528) Bluetooth Module through personal programming. When Headset

Mode is off, the Bluetooth headset can be used to answer calls or redial. In this case, Headset Mode will turn on automatically, and will turn off after you hang up.

This Bluetooth Module is also compatible with KX-DT343/KX-DT346 DPTs.

•

Calls made using a Bluetooth wireless headset will not be disconnected immediately when the user wanders out of range. However, if the Bluetooth wireless headset user remains out of range for a specified time period, the call will be disconnected.

•

Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX

A KX-NT400/KX-NT300 series IP-PT can automatically connect to a secondary PBX, when the primary

PBX becomes disconnected.

•

IP-PTs can be connected to the V-IPEXT/IP-EXT card as follows:

V-IPEXT Card IP-EXT Card

KX-NT136 ü

168 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES

KX-NT265

KX-NT265 (version 2.00 or later)

KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT366/KX-NT305)

KX-NT400/KX-NT366/KX-NT305

V-IPEXT Card

IP-EXT Card

Installation Manual References

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

3.4.1 Virtual Cards

3.6.8 IP-EXT16 Card (KX-TDA0470)

KX-TDE600

3.4.1 Virtual Cards

3.8.8 IP-EXT16 Card (KX-TDA0470)

PC Programming Manual References

3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension

3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension

3.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension

3.43 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port

9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK)

FEATURES

Description

Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) is a digital switching and transmission network. ISDN transmits voice, data, and image in digital format. ISDN lines can be connected to public lines (CO lines), private lines

(QSIG).

ISDN Interface and Configuration

Interface Type Description Port Mode

CO Line, QSIG—

Master, QSIG—

Slave

Primary Rate Interface

(PRI)

Provides twenty-three 64 kbps B channels for communication and one 64 kbps D channel for signaling (23B + D).

3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Main— Port Type

ISDN Supplementary Services for Public Network

Service

Direct Inward Dialing

(DID)

Description

Directs a call with a DID number to the preprogrammed destination.

Details in

® 4.1.6 DID (Direct

Inward Dialing)

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 169

9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES

Service

Calling Line

Identification

Presentation (CLIP)

Connected Line

Identification

Presentation (COLP)

Description

Sends the caller’s telephone number to the network when making a call. The called party can see the number on his or her telephone display before answering the call.

Sends the telephone number of the answered party to the network when answering a call. The caller can see the number on his telephone display when the line is connected.

Prevents the caller’s CLI from being presented to the called party.

Details in

Calling Line

Identification

Restriction (CLIR)

Connected Line

Identification

Restriction (COLR)

Caller ID

Prevents COLP from being sent by the answered party.

The PBX receives Caller ID information, such as the caller’s name and telephone number, when a call is sent from the network. A display proprietary telephone (PT) user can see this information before answering the call.

® 3.1.3 Caller ID

Private Networking Connection (QSIG)

Private networking with QSIG is possible using an ISDN line. Each ISDN port must be programmed so that each ISDN line has a "master" connection and a "slave" connection.

Conditions

•

En bloc

The PBX sends all of dialed digits at once after the extension user completes dialing. The PBX recognizes the end of dialing as follows:

– the # key is pressed (programmable).

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 2— End of Dial Plan—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode

– the dialed number is a preprogrammed telephone number.

5.4 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan

– the inter-digit timer expires.

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Extension Inter-digit

•

Extension Number

An extension number can be assigned to each ISDN port.

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Number

•

Network Type

Each ISDN port can be set to the requirements of each country/area.

•

L1 Active Mode and L2 Data Link Mode

The active mode of Layer 1 (L1) and the data link mode of Layer 2 (L2) can be selected individually

(Permanent or Call by Call) for each ISDN port.

•

TEI Assignment Mode

The Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) assignment mode can be selected for each ISDN port.

•

Bearer Mode

The bearer mode can be assigned for each ISDN port.

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7— ISDN Bearer

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— ISDN Bearer

170 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES

PC Programming Manual References

3.32 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type

3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port

3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Extension Inter-digit

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 2— End of Dial Plan—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

→Main— Extension Number

→Option 7— ISDN Bearer

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— ISDN Bearer

5.5 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan—Auto Assign

Feature Manual References

13.1.20 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES—QSIG

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 171

9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES

172 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Section 10 Features and Configurations—L

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 173

10.1.1 LED Indication

10.1 L

10.1.1 LED Indication

Description

The LED of the Message/Ringer Lamp and the following buttons (Line Status Buttons and Corresponding

Extension Status Button) can indicate line status with a variety of light patterns.

Line Status Buttons: S-CO, G-CO, L-CO, INTERCOM, ICD Group, PDN

Corresponding Extension Status Button: DSS, SDN

Light Pattern of the Message/Ringer Lamp

[Digital proprietary telephone (DPT)]

•

Incoming call from a CO line: Red flashing

•

Incoming call from another extension: Green flashing

•

Message(s) present (no incoming call): Red on

•

No message(s) present (no incoming call): Off

[Analog proprietary telephone (APT)]

•

Incoming call: Red flashing

•

Message(s) present (no incoming call): Red on

•

No message(s) present (no incoming call): Off

174 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

10.1.1 LED Indication

Light Pattern of the Line Status Buttons

Line Status

Button:

CO Line Status

Light

Pattern

Off

Green on

Slow green flashing

Moderate green flashing

Rapid green flashing

Red on

Slow red flashing

Rapid red flashing

S-CO

Intercom

Line Status

G-CO L-CO

Idle

INTERCOM

This extension is using the line.

This extension is holding the line.

This extension is holding the line using Exclusive Hold or using the line for an Unattended Conference.

Incoming call/Privacy

Release

Incoming call for another extension/

Another extension is using the line/Another extension has the line on Exclusive

Hold.

Another extension is holding the line.

Other extensions are using all CO lines in the trunk group.

–

Incoming call

Incoming call to the ICD group in Ring distribution method

–

This extension is logged out of the ICD group.

–

Incoming Call

Distribution

(ICD) Group

Line Status

ICD Group

–

For information on the light patterns of PDN and SDN buttons, refer to 13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory

Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension.

Light Pattern of the Corresponding Extension Status Button

Corresponding

Extension

Status Button

DSS

Light Pattern

Off

Red on

Rapid red flashing

Idle

Busy/Incoming call*

/DND for CO line calls

Incoming call*

Only when Call Pickup by a DSS button is disabled.

Only when Call Pickup by a DSS button is enabled.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 175

10.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming

Flashing Light Patterns

1 s

Slow Flashing

Moderate Flashing

Rapid Flashing

Conditions

•

The incoming CO line call shows on the buttons in the following priority:

ICD Group

®S-CO®G-CO®L-CO®PDN®INTERCOM

•

The light pattern of a DSS button for incoming calls can be set to "Off" through system programming. In this case, the DSS button light will not indicate the status of the corresponding extension.

PC Programming Manual References

4.18 [2-9] System Options

→Option 1— PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED

→Option 1— PT Fwd / DND—DND LED

→Option 4— DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call

Feature Manual References

3.1.4 Call Hold

3.1.18 Conference

6.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button

9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution

9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out

13.1.14 Privacy Release

10.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming

Description

A proprietary telephone (PT) user can select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following three line preferences.

Each of these line preferences can be assigned on each extension through personal programming (Preferred

Line Assignment—Incoming).

Type Description

No Line

Selects a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer an incoming call after you go off-hook.

176 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

10.1.3 Line Preference—Outgoing

PDN

Prime Line

Type

Ringing Line (default)

Description

Answers a call arriving at a Primary Directory Number (PDN) button simply by going off-hook. This works even when multiple calls are received simultaneously.

(

® 13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary

Directory Number) Extension)

Answers a call arriving at a CO button (on which the "Prime

Line" is assigned) simply by going off-hook. This works even when multiple calls are received simultaneously.

Answers the longest ringing call when multiple calls arrive at one’s own telephone simply by going off-hook.

Conditions

[Prime Line]

•

The priority of the incoming call is as follows:

The call arriving at a button on which the "Prime Line" is assigned.

The call arriving at the INTERCOM button.

PC Programming Manual References

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4— Incoming Preferred Line

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4— Incoming Preferred Line

Operating Manual References

3.1.2 Personal Programming

10.1.3 Line Preference—Outgoing

Description

Through personal programming, a proprietary telephone (PT) user can select the preferred method of seizing a line (Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing) that is used each time the user goes off-hook.

Method Description

ICM/PDN

Idle Line

No Line

When an extension user goes off-hook, an extension line is selected automatically. If the extension is a PDN extension, the first available

Primary Directory number (PDN) button is selected automatically.

(

® 13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory

Number) Extension)

When an extension user goes off-hook, an idle CO line is selected automatically from the assigned trunk groups.

When an extension user goes off-hook, no line is selected. In order to make a call, the user must select the desired line manually.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 177

10.1.4 Local Alarm Information

Prime Line

Method Description

When an extension user goes off-hook, the preset line is selected automatically. A prime line can be selected from the Line Access buttons: S-CO, G-CO, L-CO, ICD Group.

Conditions

•

Line Preference Override

A user can override the preset Line Preference temporarily by pressing the desired Line Access button or a Memory Dialing button, such as One-touch Dialing, before going off-hook.

•

To select Idle Line Preference, the trunk groups available to the extension should be programmed on a

COS basis. Also trunk groups available for Idle Line Access should be assigned.

PC Programming Manual References

4.13 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block

5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4— Outgoing Preferred Line

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4— Outgoing Preferred Line

PT Programming Manual References

[103] Idle Line Access (Local Access)

[500] Trunk Group Number

Operating Manual References

3.1.2 Personal Programming

10.1.4 Local Alarm Information

Description

When the PBX detects an error, the System Alarm button on the proprietary telephone (PT) of an extension which is allowed to use this feature through system programming (a maximum of two extensions per PBX), lights red. Pressing the button will show the error number on the display. If multiple errors occur, the error number will be displayed in order of highest priority to lowest. The System Alarm button light turns off automatically after all error numbers have been displayed.

For details about the errors and their solutions, refer to the Installation Manual.

178 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

10.1.4 Local Alarm Information

[Error Example]

ERR #100 (*10001)

(1) (2)

[Explanation]

Number in the

Example

(1)

(2)

Item

Error Code

Sub Code

Description

Shows three-digit error code.

Shows six-digit sub code (WXYYZZ).

W: Shelf type (Physical shelf: blank, Virtual shelf: *)

X: Shelf number (1–4)

YY: Slot number (00–11)

ZZ: Physical port number (01–16)

Conditions

•

System Alarm Button

Any flexible button can be customized as the System Alarm button.

•

If an extension allowed to utilize this feature uses PC Console or PC Phone, the alarm information will be displayed on the PC, and can be sent to the preprogrammed destination via PC Console or PC Phone. PC

Console and PC Phone use e-mail to send the information.

•

The alarm information will be logged on the Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR), if enabled through system programming.

•

The PBX can be automatically diagnosed at a preprogrammed time everyday.

Installation Manual References

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

5.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log

KX-TDE600

5.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log

PC Programming Manual References

2.6.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type

6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Type

13.1 [11-1] Main

→SMDR— Print Information—Error Log

→Maintenance— Local Alarm Display—Extension 1, Extension 2

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 179

10.1.4 Local Alarm Information

→Maintenance— Daily Test Start Time—Set

→Maintenance— Daily Test Start Time—Hour

→Maintenance— Daily Test Start Time—Minute

Feature Manual References

180 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Section 11 Features and Configurations—M

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 181

11.1.1 Manager Features

11.1 M

11.1.1 Manager Features

Description

An extension assigned as a manager (manager extension) is allowed to use certain features which most extensions cannot. Class of Service (COS) programming determines which extensions are manager extensions and can therefore use the following features:

Manager

Feature

Programming

Manager

Password

Change

Description

Manager

Password

Changes the manager password.

Required –

Details in

Verification

Code

Personal

Identification

Number (PIN)

Set

Remote PIN

Clear

Remote

Extension

Dial Lock

Dial Tone Transfer

Outgoing Message (OGM)

Sets a Verification Code PIN for each Verification Code.

Clears the extension PIN of an extension remotely, or a verification code PIN. PIN Lock is also unlocked.

Sets or cancels the Extension Dial

Lock on an extension remotely.

Changes the Toll Restriction

(TRS) level of an extension temporarily, allowing the extension user to make a normally unauthorized call.

Records and plays back OGMs.

Required

Not required

Time Service

BGM—External

Switches the time mode manually.

Not

Turns the External BGM on and off.

required

Not required

182 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

11.1.2 MEMORY DIALING FEATURES

Feature

NDSS Monitor Release

Description

Removes the monitor function from an NDSS button.

Manager

Password

Not required

Details in

Conditions

CAUTION

Keeping PINs secret.

Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.

Changing PINs regularly.

•

Manager Password

Only one manager password can be assigned per PBX.

PC Programming Manual References

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Manager

13.1 [11-1] Main—Password— Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1

PT Programming Manual References

[112] Manager Password

[511] Manager Assignment

Feature Manual References

5.1.1 EFA (External Feature Access))

Operating Manual References

2.1 Manager Service Features

3.2.2 Manager Programming

11.1.2 MEMORY DIALING FEATURES

Description

An extension user can store frequently dialed numbers in the PBX extension data and/or the PBX system data.

A stored number is dialed automatically with a simple operation.

Features

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 183

11.1.2 MEMORY DIALING FEATURES

Feature

One-touch Dialing

Last Number Redial

(Outgoing Call Log)

Speed

Dialing

Personal

Quick Dialing

Hot Line

System

Incoming Call Log

Valid Input

Input

0–9/ /#

PAUSE (Pause)

Storing Method Details in

•

Personal Programming

•

System Programming

(PC Programming only)

The last or most recent dialed numbers are automatically stored.

•

Personal Programming

•

Personal Operation with the Feature Number

•

System Programming

(PC Programming only)

System Programming

System Programming

(PC Programming only)

•

Personal Programming

•

Personal Operation with the Feature Number

•

System Programming

(PC Programming only)

Incoming call information is automatically stored.

® 3.1.5 Call Log,

Incoming

FLASH/RECALL

(Hooking)

INTERCOM (Secret)

Displayed while

Entering

0–9/ /#

[ ]

Description

Store digits, and # by pressing the corresponding buttons.

Store a dialing pause by pressing the

PAUSE button. (

® 13.1.4 Pause

Insertion)

Store a flash/recall signal (EFA mode) by pressing the FLASH/RECALL button at the beginning of the number. (

Conceal all or part of the number by pressing the INTERCOM button at the beginning and at the end of the number to be concealed. It is programmable whether the concealed part will be shown on the SMDR. (

® 16.1.3 SMDR (Station

Message Detail Recording))

184 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

11.1.3 Message Waiting

Input

TRANSFER (Transfer)

Displayed while

Entering

Description

Store a transfer command by pressing the TRANSFER button at the beginning of the number (used only for One-touch

Dialing). (

[Example] Storing "T + 305"=

Transferring a call to extension 305.

*1 Available only when in the system/personal programming mode

[Secret Dialing Example]

When storing the number "9-123-456-7890", to conceal the telephone number "123-456-7890",

Enter 9 INTERCOM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 INTERCOM

Note

•

It is possible to store a Memory Dialing feature number at the beginning of Memory Dialing numbers.

•

It is possible to store several feature numbers in one Memory Dialing location.

Conditions

•

CO Line Access by Memory Dialing

A specific CO Line Access number can be stored along with the telephone number in Memory Dialing.

However, if Memory Dialing is done after selecting a CO line, the stored CO Line Access number is ignored and the telephone number is sent using the selected CO line.

11.1.3 Message Waiting

Description

When an extension user calls another extension that does not or cannot answer the call, he or she can leave a Message Waiting notification. The appropriate button or lamp on the called extension user’s telephone will light, indicating that a call was missed or a message recorded by the Voice Processing System (VPS) or the

Simplified Voice Message (SVM) feature is waiting. A Message button can be used to call the caller back or listen to the message.

When a message is left for a proprietary telephone (PT), the Message button on it lights or the Message/Ringer

Lamp turns red. Pressing the lit Message button while on-hook shows the caller’s information as shown below:

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 185

11.1.3 Message Waiting

[Example]

105:Tom Smith

--- Extension no. and name of who left the message

Message buttons

This extension

ICD Group

Other extension*

* This button is useful, for example, when a secretary checks messages left for the boss (Boss & Secretary Feature).

Conditions

•

Message Button

Any flexible button can be assigned as a Message button. This button can be used on a PT which does not have the MESSAGE button (fixed button), or can be used on any PT to access messages left for another extension or for an incoming call distribution (ICD) group.

•

Distinctive Dial Tone for Message Waiting

If Distinctive Dial mode is enabled, dial tone 4 will be sent to an extension when a message has been left on the extension. (

® 4.1.4 Dial Tone)

•

SLT with a Message Waiting Lamp

The lamp activates in the same way as the MESSAGE button on a PT, if an EMSLC or MSLC card is connected to the PBX. The preferred Message Waiting Lamp light pattern can be selected from the twelve patterns shown below. System programming for each extension port is required to use this feature.

186 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

11.1.3 Message Waiting

[SLT Message Waiting Lamp Light Patterns]

5.12 s

1.28 s

Pattern 1

OFF

5.12 s

1.28 s

Pattern 2

OFF

512 ms

1.28 s

5.12 s

Pattern 3

OFF

256 ms

2.56 s

768 ms

Pattern 4

OFF

256 ms

768 ms

5.12 s

Pattern 5

OFF

256 ms

2.56 s

512 ms

Pattern 6

OFF

10.24 s

1.28 s

Pattern 7

OFF

256 ms

1.28 s

20.48 s

Pattern 8

OFF

256 ms

1.28 s

10.24 s

Pattern 9

OFF

Pattern 10

OFF

1.28 s

20.48 s

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 187

11.1.3 Message Waiting

Pattern 11

OFF t t

10.24 s t=1.28 s

10.24 s

20.48 s

Pattern 12

OFF

•

It is possible to leave a Message Waiting notification while hearing a ringback tone, busy tone, or DND tone.

•

Messages are always left on the original destination extension, regardless of that extension’s FWD settings.

(

•

Both the calling extension and the called extension can cancel a notification after it has been left.

•

If the extension that received a notification calls back the extension that sent the notification, and the call is answered, the notification will be cleared automatically. However, if a voice message has been left on the VPS, whether the notification is cleared or not depends on the VPS settings.

•

If a voice message has been left on the VPS for a SIP extension (except KX-HGT100), the lamp will not turn on.

PC Programming Manual References

3.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type— SLT Power Supply

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back

4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Message Waiting Set

4.18 [2-9] System Options

→Option 3— Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone

→Option 5— SLT—Message Waiting Lamp Pattern

5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings— VM DTMF Command—Listening Message

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8— SLT MW Mode

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type

6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Type

Feature Manual References

Operating Manual References

1.3.42 Message Waiting

188 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

11.1.4 Music on Hold

11.1.4 Music on Hold

Description

Music or other audio can be played to a party that has been put on hold. The following audio sources are available:

Internal music source

External music source

Outgoing Message (OGM)

Tone

External music source 1 is assigned to BGM 1. External music source 2, or one of two internal music sources, can be assigned to BGM 2. In addition, 6 OGMs can be assigned to BGMs 3 through 8.

For tenant users, each tenant can select one of the BGMs or the tone to use for Music on Hold.

[BGM Number and the Music Source]

BGM No.

3–8

Music Source

External music port 1

External music port 2, internal music source 1, or internal music source 2

OGM

Conditions

[General]

•

Hardware Requirement: User-supplied music source (when an external music source is assigned)

•

Volume Control

It is possible to change the volume of an internal and/or external music source.

•

For tenants, the type of call determines which tenant’s music source is used, as follows:

Type Music Source

Incoming Intercom Calls/Outgoing

Calls

Incoming CO Line Calls

Selected based on the tenant setting to which the extension user belongs.

Selected based on the tenant setting of the distribution method (DIL/DID).

[Using OGMs for BGM]

•

This feature will function using the preinstalled IPCEMPR card (MPR card for KX-TDE600). The preinstalled IPCMPR card (MPR card for KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) is not recommended for use with Music on Hold.

•

To increase the capacity of the feature, it is possible to add an ESVM4 card mounted on an OPB3 card.

The MSG4 card is not recommended for use with Music on Hold.

•

To use OGMs for BGM, the corresponding ESVM card/block's SVM Feature must be disabled, and MSG

Feature (OGM) enabled.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 189

11.1.4 Music on Hold

•

When an OGM is assigned to a BGM, the channel for that OGM becomes occupied and cannot be used for other OGM features, even when no calling parties are listening to Music on Hold.

IPCMPR/IPCEMPR Card

OGM Enabled/SVM Disabled

OGM for BGM2

OGM for

other features

OPB3 Card

ESVM4 Card

SVM Enabled/OGM Disabled

SVM Block 1

SVM Block 2

OPB3 Card

ESVM4 Card

SVM Enabled/OGM Enabled

SVM

Block 1

SVM

Block 2

OGM for other features

Only cards with

OGM Enabled and

SVM Disabled can be used for Music on

Hold.

ESVM4 Card

OGM Enabled/SVM Disabled

OGM for BGM3

OGM for BGM4

OGM for

other features

Empty Slot

Installation Manual References

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

3.10.1 Connection of Peripherals

KX-TDE600

3.12.1 Connection of Peripherals

PC Programming Manual References

3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property

→ SVM Feature

→ MSG Feature

3.44 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property

→ SVM Feature

→ MSG Feature

4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM

4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH

→ MOH—MOH 1 (Music On Hold 1)

→ MOH—MOH 2 (Music On Hold 2)

PT Programming Manual References

[710] Music Source Selection for BGM2

[711] Music on Hold

190 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

11.1.5 Mute

Feature Manual References

11.1.5 Mute

Description

During a conversation, a proprietary telephone (PT) user can disable the built-in microphone or the handset microphone to consult privately with others while listening to the other party on the phone through the built-in speaker or the handset receiver. The user can hear the other party’s voice during Mute. Only your voice will be muted.

Conditions

•

This feature is available on all PTs that have the AUTO ANS/MUTE button.

Operating Manual References

1.3.43 Mute

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 191

11.1.5 Mute

192 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Section 12 Features and Configurations—O

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 193

12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)

12.1 O

12.1.1 Off-hook Monitor

Description

A proprietary telephone (PT) user can let others listen to the user’s conversation through the built-in speaker, during a conversation using the handset.

Conditions

•

Compatible Telephones

–

KX-DT300 series

–

KX-T7600 series

–

KX-T7400 series (display PT only)

–

KX-NT series

To enable this feature, system programming is required. If disabled, hands-free conversation is performed instead.

PC Programming Manual References

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 1— PT Operation—Off Hook Monitor for KX-T74xx/T76xx

Operating Manual References

1.3.44 Off-hook Monitor

12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)

Description

An extension assigned as a manager (manager extension) can record outgoing messages (OGMs) for the following features:

Feature

Direct Inward System

Access (DISA)

Queuing Feature

Usage

When a call arrives on a DISA line, the caller will hear a message.

Details in

Timed Reminder

Music on Hold

If assigned in the Queuing Time Table of the incoming call distribution (ICD) group, callers waiting in a queue will hear a message.

When answering the Timed Reminder Alarm, the user will hear a message.

The party put on hold will hear a message or recorded music.

194 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)

Feature

Background Music

(BGM)

Usage

Extensions can listen to music through their built-in speaker.

Details in

® 2.1.1 BGM

(Background

Music)

Conditions

•

This feature will function using the preinstalled IPCMPR card (MPR card for KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200), or the preinstalled IPCEMPR card (MPR card for KX-TDE600). To increase the capacity of the feature, it is possible to add an MSG4 card or ESVM4 card mounted on an OPB3 card.

•

Number of Messages and Recording Time

The PBX can record a maximum of 64 messages.

•

A floating extension number is assigned to each outgoing message (OGM) (default: 5 + two-digit OGM number).

•

The SVM/OGM Block on the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card allows two messages to play simultaneously, and one MSG4 or ESVM4 card allows four messages to play simultaneously. Increasing the number of cards does not increase the total recording time or the number of messages; it increases the number of messages that can be played simultaneously.

[Example]

Up to 4 messages can be played simultaneously to callers.

Up to 8 messages can be played simultaneously to callers.

PBX

MSG

Card

Total message recording time:

8 minutes max.

PBX

MSG

Card

MSG

Card

Total message recording time:

8 minutes max.

The maximum recording time for each card depends on the recording quality and the type of card used, as follows:

Recording Quality

Recording Time with the IPCMPR/

IPCEMPR/ESVM4

Card

about 20 minutes

Recording Time with the MSG4

about 8 minutes

Card

High

(default)

Middle

about 60 minutes about 8 minutes

Low

about 120 minutes about 8 minutes

When cards of different types are installed, the shortest recording time is used. For example, if an

ESVM4 card and an MSG4 card are installed, the maximum recording time at default will be about 8 minutes.

Note

When an additional MSG/ESVM card is added, it is blank—all necessary messages will need to be stored in the new card. This can be done in two ways:

By installing the new MSG/ESVM card then recording each message again. The PBX will automatically store the new recordings in each card.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 195

12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message) b.

By transferring messages from the PBX to a PC using Maintenance Console, then transferring them back to the PBX with the new MSG/ESVM card installed.

•

The same message can be played to multiple callers simultaneously.

•

Recording Methods a.

Record voice messages through the extension telephone.

Transfer prerecorded voice messages from an external audio source to the PBX via an external music port.

Note

Record voice messages only; avoid the recording of music.

However, it is possible to record music when using an IPCMPR/IPCEMPR/ESVM card in High

Recording Quality mode.

•

After recording messages, a manager extension can also play them back for confirmation.

•

A progress tone is sent to a manager extension before recording messages for a preprogrammed time period, or while clearing a prerecorded message assigned to a floating extension number.

•

When a manager tries to record a message, he or she will hear a ringback tone if a message channel is in use. When all ports of the MSG/ESVM card(s) become idle, the manager will hear the progress tone for a preprogrammed time period, then the PBX will automatically switch to the recording mode.

Installation Manual References

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

3.3.1 IPCMPR Card

3.7.1 OPB3 Card (KX-TDA0190)

3.7.5 MSG4 Card (KX-TDA0191)

3.7.6 ESVM4 Card (KX-TDA0194)

KX-TDE600

3.3.1 IPCEMPR Card

3.9.1 OPB3 Card (KX-TDA0190)

3.9.4 MSG4 Card (KX-TDA0191)

3.9.5 ESVM4 Card (KX-TDA0194)

PC Programming Manual References

2.6.6 Utility—Message File Transfer PC to PBX

2.6.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC

3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property— MSG Feature

3.44 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property— MSG Feature

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— DISA—Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— OGM Record / Clear / Playback

5.14 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table— Queuing Sequence—Sequence 01–

7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 2— Recording Mode

7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message— Floating Extension Number

PT Programming Manual References

[631] Sequences in Queuing Time Table

[730] Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number

196 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

12.1.3 OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement)

Feature Manual References

® 3.1.12 Call Waiting Tone)

Operating Manual References

2.1.3 OGM (Outgoing Messages)

12.1.3 OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement)

Description

An extension user can talk with a busy extension through the built-in speaker and microphone of the called party’s proprietary telephone (PT). If the existing call is using a handset, a second conversation is made using the speakerphone and microphone so that the called extension can talk to both parties.

Conditions

•

Class of Service (COS) programming determines which extensions can use this feature.

•

This feature is available when the called extension uses one of the following telephones:

–

KX-T7625, KX-T7630, KX-T7633, KX-T7636, KX-DT333, KX-DT343, KX-DT346

–

KX-T7436

–

KX-T7235

•

Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) cannot be used when:

The OHCA mode of the caller’s COS is set to "Disable".

The called extension’s telephone is not compatible with this OHCA.

The called extension is a digital proprietary telephone (DPT) which is connected via a USB Module to a computer running PC Console or PC Phone.

The called extension is in a Digital XDP connection.

In these cases, a call waiting tone is sent to the called extension. (

•

While an extension is receiving an OHCA, if the extension user places the current CO line call on hold or transfers the current intercom call or CO line call, the OHCA will become disabled and the calling extension will hear a ringback tone.

•

While an extension is receiving an OHCA, if the extension user places the current intercom call on hold, the called extension can talk to the calling extension through the handset.

PC Programming Manual References

4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

→ BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override

→ BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— OHCA / Whisper OHCA

Feature Manual References

Operating Manual References

1.3.13 Call Waiting Tone

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 197

12.1.5 Operator Features

12.1.4 One-touch Dialing

Description

A proprietary telephone (PT) user can make a call or access a feature with a one-touch operation. This is possible by storing the number, such as an extension number, telephone number, or feature number in a

One-touch Dialing button.

Conditions

•

One-touch Dialing Button

Any flexible button can be customized as a One-touch Dialing button.

•

Full One-touch Dialing

There is no need to go off-hook before pressing a One-touch Dialing button.

PC Programming Manual References

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6— Flexible Button Programming Mode

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

→ Type

→ Dial (for One-touch)

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6— Flexible Button Programming Mode

6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

→ Type

→ Dial (for One-touch)

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console

→ Type

→ Dial (for One-touch)

Feature Manual References

Operating Manual References

1.3.46 One-touch Dialing

12.1.5 Operator Features

Description

Any extension or Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) group can be designated as an operator.

This PBX supports the following types of operators:

Type

PBX operator

Description

An extension or ICD group can be assigned as a PBX operator for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night).

198 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

12.1.5 Operator Features

Type

Tenant operator

Description

An extension or incoming call distribution group can be assigned as a tenant operator. The tenant operator may be the extension or ICD group of another tenant.

[Example] Extension 110 in tenant 1 is the tenant operator of tenant 3.

Operator Call:

An extension user can call an operator by dialing the preprogrammed Operator Call feature number. The destination of the Operator Call depends on the following:

–

If the Tenant Service is not in use:

The call is directed to the PBX operator according to the corresponding time mode.

–

If the Tenant Service is in use:

The call is directed to the extension’s tenant operator. If a tenant operator is not assigned, the call is directed to the PBX operator. In this case, the current time mode of the extension’s tenant is used to determine the

PBX operator that the call is directed to.

If neither a tenant operator nor a PBX operator is assigned, the caller will hear a reorder tone.

Conditions

•

An extension or ICD group can be assigned as both a tenant operator and the PBX operator.

•

The same tenant operator can be assigned as the operator for multiple tenants.

PC Programming Manual References

4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM— PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

8.6 [6-6] Tenant— Operator (Extension Number)

PT Programming Manual References

[006] Operator Assignment

Feature Manual References

Operating Manual References

1.2.1 Making Calls

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 199

12.1.5 Operator Features

200 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Section 13 Features and Configurations—P

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 201

13.1.1 Paging

13.1 P

13.1.1 Paging

Description

An extension user can make a voice announcement to several people at once.

The announcement is heard through the built-in speakers of proprietary telephones (PTs) and/or external pagers (loudspeakers) which belong to a paging group. Up to two external pagers can be connected.

The paged person can answer the page from a nearby telephone.

It is possible to page with a call on hold in order to transfer the call.

Paging Deny:

It is possible to deny being paged on an extension basis.

Paging Group

Each paging group consists of extension user groups and external pagers. One extension user group or external pager can belong to several paging groups.

(

IP-PTs connected to a V-IPEXT card, that are assigned to extension user group 31 (default)

[Example]

Paging Group 01 Paging Group 02 Paging Group 03 Paging Group 04

Extension

Group 1

User

Extension

User

Group 2

Extension

User

Group 3

Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 104 Extn. 105 Pager 1 Pager 2

[Programming Example]

Paging Group

No.

Extension User Group No.

001 002 003

...

External Pager No.

1 2

ü : Constituent

® 5.9 [3-4] Paging Group or

5.10 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting

® [640] Extension User Groups of a Paging Group

® 5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager

® [641] External Pagers of a Paging Group

202 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.1 Paging

Conditions

•

Extensions which cannot be paged are:

–

Portable stations (PSs)

–

Single line telephones (SLTs)

–

Ringing or busy PTs

–

PTs in Paging Deny mode

–

PTs in Paging DND mode

–

These extensions cannot be paged, but can answer a page.

*1 Changing the extension user group of the extension, allows it to receive pages. However, doing so may affect the number of simultaneous IP extension and IP CO line calls available on the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card.

•

External Pager Priority

External pagers can be used with the following priorities:

Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)

® Paging ® Background Music (BGM)

(

® 17.1.2 TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station), ® 2.1.1 BGM (Background Music))

•

Volume Control

The volume level of pages heard from PTs and external pagers can be changed through system programming.

•

Paging DND

When Do Not Disturb (DND) (

® 4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb)) is set for incoming calls, it is programmable

whether an extension receives paging through system programming.

PC Programming Manual References

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features

→ Group Paging

→ Group Paging Answer

→ Paging Deny Set / Cancel

4.18 [2-9] System Options

→Option 1— PT Fwd / DND—Paging to DND Extension

→Option 3— Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer

4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH

→ Paging—EPG 1 (External Pager 1)

→ Paging—EPG 2 (External Pager 2)

→ Paging—Paging Level from PT Speaker

5.9 [3-4] Paging Group

5.10 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting

5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

PT Programming Manual References

[640] Extension User Groups of a Paging Group

[641] External Pagers of a Paging Group

Feature Manual References

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 203

13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone

Operating Manual References

1.3.47 Paging

13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone

Description

By connecting telephones in parallel, you can increase the number of telephones connected to the PBX without adding additional extension cards.

Both wired and wireless telephones can be connected in parallel. Single line telephones (SLTs), analog proprietary telephones (APTs), and digital proprietary telephones (DPTs) can be connected to other telephones or connectors, allowing up to three telephones to be connected to the PBX through just one extension port.

Additionally, portable stations (PSs) can be linked to other telephones wirelessly and used as "paired" extensions.

The different type of parallel connections are described below.

Features Descriptions Connections

Parallel Mode

EXtra Device Port

(XDP) Mode

Allows an SLT to be connected to an APT or DPT which is connected to a Super Hybrid port of the

PBX.

When parallel mode is enabled, the two telephones function as follows:

•

Both share the extension number of the telephone connected directly to the PBX (main telephone).

•

Either telephone can make or answer a call.

Allows an SLT to be connected to a DPT which is connected to a Super Hybrid port of the PBX.

Unlike parallel mode, XDP mode allows each telephone to act as an independent extension with its own extension number. (

® 5.1.7 Extension Port

Configuration)

PBX

APT/DPT + SLT

DPT SLT

Extn. 101 Extn. 101

PBX

APT

Extn. 102

SLT

DPT + SLT

Extn. 102

DPT

SLT

Extn. 101 Extn. 105

204 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone

Features

Digital XDP

Wireless XDP

Parallel Mode

Descriptions

Allows a DPT to be connected to another DPT which is connected to a DPT port or a Super Hybrid port of the PBX. The DPT that is connected directly to the PBX is called the "master DPT", and the DPT connected to the master DPT is called the "slave

DPT".

Similar to XDP mode, each DPT acts as a independent extension with its own extension number.

If a master DPT is connected to the PBX by a Super

Hybrid port (not a DPT port), a third telephone (SLT) can also be in parallel or XDP mode with the master

DPT.

Digital XDP connection allows the number of DPTs that the PBX supports to increase.

For information on this type of parallel connection, refer to the Wireless XDP Parallel mode feature.

(

® 8.1.1 Hands-free Answerback) or voice-calling mode

Connections

PBX

DPT + DPT

Master

Slave

DPT DPT

Extn. 101 Extn. 201

PBX

DPT + DPT + SLT

Master

Slave

DPT DPT

Extn. 101 Extn. 201

SLT

Extn. 101 (in Parallel Mode)

Extn. 105 (in XDP Mode)

APT/DPT/SLT + PS

PBX

Extn. 101

SLT

Extn. 102

Conditions

[APT + SLT]

•

If one telephone goes off-hook while the other is on a call, a three-party call is established. If one user goes on-hook, the other user continues the call.

•

An extension user cannot originate a call from the SLT if the APT is:

– playing background music (BGM)

– receiving a paging announcement over the built-in speaker.

•

The SLT will always ring for incoming calls (if its ringer is turned on). It cannot be programmed to not ring.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 205

13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone

[DPT + SLT]

•

When in the parallel mode, XDP mode of the Super Hybrid port should be turned off through system programming.

•

Whether the SLT rings for incoming calls is programmable.

Ring on: Both telephones ring when a call is received, except for when the digital proprietary telephone

(DPT) is in Hands-free Answerback mode (

(Alternate Receiving Ring/Voice) (

® 9.1.13 Intercom Call).

Ring off: Only the DPT rings when a call is received, however, the SLT can be used to answer the call.

•

Both telephones cannot engage in calls simultaneously. If one telephone goes off-hook while the other is on a call, the call is switched to the telephone that goes off-hook. Note, however, that the call will not be switched when the telephone is:

Being monitored by another extension (

® 3.1.6 Call Monitor).

Receiving an Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) (

Announcement)) or Whisper OHCA (

® 20.1.4 Whisper OHCA).

On a conference call (

® 3.1.18 Conference, ® 5.1.3 Executive Busy Override, ® 13.1.14 Privacy

Release).

Using Live Call Screening (LCS) or Two-way Record is activated (

® 19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital)

Integration).

[DPT + DPT]

•

Available Telephones

KX-DT300 series and KX-T7600 series, except KX-T7640

•

The PSU-M or PSU-L must be installed when Digital XDP connection enables the number of DPTs to exceed the maximum capacity that the PBX supports.

•

The following features cannot be used on either the master or slave DPT:

OHCA: A call waiting tone will be heard even if the OHCA feature is set.

USB Module/Bluetooth Module: The DPTs will not function properly if a USB Module or Bluetooth

Module is attached to either DPT. Do not connect a USB Module or Bluetooth Module to either of the

DPTs.

Note

To cancel a Digital XDP connection, disconnect the slave DPT from the master, then disconnect the and reconnect the master DPT to the PBX.

[DPT + DPT + SLT]

•

When an SLT is connected to the slave DPT in parallel mode, the SLT acts as a parallel extension of the master DPT. If connected in XDP mode, the SLT acts as an independent extension.

Installation Manual References

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

1.3.3 System Capacity

3.8.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions

3.8.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection

KX-TDE600

1.3.3 System Capacity

3.10.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions

3.10.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection

PC Programming Manual References

3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port

206 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.3 Password Security

→ XDP Mode

→ Parallel Telephone Ringing

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Parallel Telephone (Ring) Mode Set / Cancel

PT Programming Manual References

[600] EXtra Device Port (XDP) Mode

Operating Manual References

1.3.48 Paralleled Telephone

13.1.3 Password Security

Description

To maintain system security, system passwords are required to access certain programming functions of the

PBX. By giving different users access to different passwords, it is possible to control the amount of programming that each user is able to perform.

The following types of system passwords are available:

Password Description Format

System Password

(PT) for User

System Password

(PT) for

Administrator

System Password

(PC) for User

Used to access user-level PT programming. The specific

PT programming items that may be programmed at user level can be selected through system programming item.

Used to access administrator-level PT programming. All PT programming settings are available.

4 – 10 digits

4 – 10 characters

System Password

(PC) for

Administrator

System Password

(PC) for Installer

Used with the user-level programmer code to access user-level PC programming. The installer can specify which system programming settings are available.

Used with the administrator-level programmer code to access administrator-level PC programming. The installer can specify which system programming settings are available.

Used with the installer-level programmer code to access installer-level PC programming. All system programming settings are available.

CAUTION

To the Administrator or Installer regarding the system password

Please provide all system passwords to the customer.

To avoid unauthorized access and possible abuse of the PBX, keep the passwords secret, and inform the customer of the importance of the passwords, and the possible dangers if they become known to others.

The PBX has default passwords preset. For security, change these passwords the first time that you program the PBX.

Change the passwords periodically.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 207

13.1.4 Pause Insertion

It is strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum protection against unauthorized access. For a list of numbers and characters that can be used in system passwords, refer to Section 1.1.2 Entering Characters in the PC Programming Manual.

If a system password is forgotten, it can be found by loading a backup of the system data into a PC, and checking the password using the Maintenance Console software. If you do not have a backup of the system data, you must reset the PBX to its factory defaults and reprogram it. Therefore, we strongly recommend maintaining a backup of the system data. For more information on how to back up the system data, refer to the PC Programming Manual.

However, as system passwords can be extracted from backup copies of the system data file, do not allow unauthorized access to these files.

PC Programming Manual References

1.1.2 Entering Characters

2.1.2 Access Levels

13.1 [11-1] Main—Password

Feature Manual References

® 8.1.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX))

13.1.4 Pause Insertion

Description

Pressing a PAUSE button inserts a preprogrammed Pause time between digits of a user-dialed number before the number is dialed out, allowing certain numbers separated with a pause to be used to access certain features

(e.g., access codes, seizing idle lines, etc.).

When a pause is needed, pauses must be inserted manually (pressing the PAUSE button) in all cases, except for the following access codes where a pause is automatically inserted between the user-dialed access code and the subsequent digits:

Host PBX Access code (

Special Carrier Access code (

® 16.1.5 Special Carrier Access Code)

Second Dial Tone Waiting code

Conditions

•

The length of a pause is programmable for each CO line.

•

Numbers stored in Memory Dialing can contain pauses.

•

When a Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialed after seizing a CO line, a preprogrammed number of pauses are inserted after the code.

•

ARS

A pause is not automatically inserted between the user-dialed access code and the subsequent digits when the ARS mode is enabled. (

PC Programming Manual References

3.30 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Pause Time

3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port— Pause Time

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— During Conversation—Pause Signal Time

208 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.5 PC Console/PC Phone

8.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone

PT Programming Manual References

[416] LCOT Pause Time

13.1.5 PC Console/PC Phone

Description

Panasonic PC Phone/PC Console is supported by a PC with a KX-DT343/KX-DT346 or KX-T7633/

KX-T7636 DPT (equipped with USB module) through USB ports. By using the KX-TDA0350 PC Phone or

KX-TDA0300 PC Console CTI application, users can enjoy many of the KX-TDE series PBX features while utilizing the benefits of a CTI solution. PC Console gives users access to certain administrative level features that are not available with PC Phone.

The extensions that use PC Console must be assigned through system programming. A CTI server is not required to use PC Phone/PC Console.

PBX

USB

DPT

Along with many KX-TDE PBX features, PC Phone and PC Console offer many specific features, including the following:

•

Phone Book:

A list of telephone numbers including detailed information pertaining to each entry. This feature allows the user to make calls and send e-mails to each entry.

•

Outlook Integration:

The Microsoft

Outlook

Address Book can be integrated to be used with the PC Phone or PC Console.

•

Pop-up Screen:

An image containing information about the caller appears when a call is received.

•

Voice Memo:

Conversations are recorded at any time and can be saved, sent by e-mail, etc.

•

Text Memo:

A user can type a short message during a conversation which can be saved, sent by e-mail, etc.

[For PC Phone Only]

•

TAM (Telephone Answering Machine):

If a call is not answered within a preprogrammed time, callers can leave a message after hearing a greeting message.

•

Message:

TAM messages are played back and/or automatically transferred by phone or by e-mail.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 209

13.1.6 PC Programming

[For PC Console Only]

•

Incoming Group Screen:

Names, extension numbers, and the status (e.g., busy) of each extension can be monitored on a single screen. Calls can also be made and received on this screen.

Conditions

•

Hardware Requirements: KX-DT343/KX-DT346 or KX-T7633/KX-T7636 DPT and USB Module

Installation Manual References

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

3.8.4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection

KX-TDE600

3.10.4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection

PC Programming Manual References

3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port

→ DPT Type—Type

→ DPT Type—Location No.

PT Programming Manual References

[601] Terminal Device Assignment

Feature Manual References

Programming), a PC connected to the PBX can use the Maintenance Console software to program in further

13.1.6 PC Programming

Description

Although many PBX features can be programmed using a proprietary telephone (PT) (

® 13.1.30 PT

detail. System programming, diagnosis, and data upload/download can be performed either through on-site programming or remote programming.

On-site Programming: Programming that is performed using an on-site PC connected directly to the PBX.

Remote Programming: Programming that is performed using an off-site PC that connects to the PBX via a CO line.

1. Connection Methods for On-site Programming

Method

Serial Interface

(RS-232C) port

Description

The PC is connected to the PBX via the Serial Interface

(RS-232C port) of the PBX.

–

Required

Hardware

210 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.6 PC Programming

USB

LAN

Method

Modem

(connected to

SLT port)

Description

The PC is connected to the PBX via the USB port of a USB

Module attached to a digital proprietary telephone (DPT).

The PC is connected to the PBX via the MNT port of the

IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card.

The PC is connected to a modem, which is then connected to an SLT port of the PBX. Use the modem to dial the floating extension number (default: 599) assigned to the analog remote maintenance feature to access the PBX.

Required

Hardware

USB Module

IPCMPR/

IPCEMPR card

RMT card and user-supplied modem

Remote access must be enabled through system programming when performing on-site programming via modem.

2. Connection Methods for Remote Programming

Method Description

Off-site modem

Call the PBX and have the call directed to the floating extension number (default: 599) assigned to the analog remote maintenance feature using one of the following methods:

Required

Hardware

RMT card and user-supplied modem

Direct Access: Using the off-site modem, dial a telephone number with the modem which will direct your call (via Direct

In Line (DIL) or Direct Inward Dialing (DID) distribution) to the floating extension number assigned to the analog remote maintenance feature.

DISA: Using a telephone, dial a telephone number which will direct your call (via DIL or DID distribution) to a floating extension number used by the Direct Inward System Access

(DISA) feature (

Access)). Next, dial the floating extension number assigned to

the analog remote maintenance feature. Then access the PBX with the modem.

Call Transfer: Using a telephone, dial a telephone number which will direct your call to an operator (or other extension of the PBX) and request to be transferred to the floating extension number assigned to the analog remote maintenance feature

(

® 3.1.10 Call Transfer). Then access the PBX with the

modem.

On-site modem

The modem is connected to the Serial Interface (RS-232C port) and also to either an extension port which is assigned as the

DIL/DID destination, or to a CO line directly. AT commands can be sent to the modem automatically when it is connected to the

Serial Interface (RS-232C port) and can be programmed beforehand, through system programming, to initialize the modem. AT commands can also be sent manually in the PT system programming mode.

User-supplied modem

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 211

13.1.6 PC Programming

Conditions

•

Only one system programming session is permitted at a time. Access will be denied when a second party tries to perform system programming, including system programming via a PT.

•

Programmer Code and Password for System Programming

To access system programming, a programmer code and its password must be entered. For more details,

see Section 13.1.3 Password Security.

•

Remote Programming Limitation

It is possible to disable remote access through system programming. Disabling this feature will also disable the ability to perform on-site programming via modem.

•

If an extension user sets Walking Extension at the same time that the extension’s data is being programmed through PC programming, the data may not be transferred properly. (

® 20.1.2 Walking Extension)

Installation Manual References

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

3.3.1 IPCMPR Card

3.3.4 RMT Card (KX-TDA0196)

4.1 Overview

4.2 PC Connection

4.3 Installation of the Maintenance Console

KX-TDE600

3.3.1 IPCEMPR Card

3.3.4 RMT Card (KX-TDA0196)

4.1 Overview

4.2 PC Connection

4.3 Installation of the Maintenance Console

PC Programming Manual References

13.1 [11-1] Main

→RS-232C— External Modem Command—Automatic Initialization

→RS-232C— External Modem Command—Manual Initialization 1–Manual Initialization 5

→Remote

→Password— System Password - PC Programming—User Level

→Password— System Password - PC Programming—Administrator Level

→Password— System Password - PC Programming—Installer Level

PT Programming Manual References

[801] External Modem Control

[810] Remote Programming

[811] Modem Floating Extension Number

[812] ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number

Feature Manual References

4.1.7 DIL (Direct In Line)

13.1.3 Password Security

212 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension

13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory

Number) Extension

Description

Primary Directory Number (PDN) buttons and Secondary Directory Number (SDN) buttons are ideal for use between bosses and secretaries. When a call (intercom or CO) arrives at a PDN button on the boss’s extension, the call will ring and the LED of the SDN button will flash at the secretary’s extension as well, indicating that an incoming call is arriving at the boss’s extension. In addition, caller information (e.g., Caller ID) of the incoming call will appear on the secretary’s extension. The secretary can answer the call for the boss by simply pressing the SDN button. Delayed ringing can be set for a PDN or SDN button.

A secretary can hold a call answered on the SDN button, and the boss can retrieve the held call simply by pressing the PDN button, like when answering a call with an S-CO button. In addition, a secretary can transfer calls from an SDN button or other button (e.g., S-CO button) to the boss’s extension with a simple operation, like when using a DSS button.

An extension can have several SDN buttons, each registered to a different boss’s extension. However, only one SDN button can be registered for a single boss at each extension. An extension can have up to eight PDN buttons. PDN buttons can simplify the use of an extension because both intercom and CO line calls can be made and received at a PDN button.

Making Calls with an SDN Button

When Standard SDN Key mode is assigned to an SDN extension (secretary) through COS programming, SDN extensions (secretaries) can make calls for PDN extensions (bosses) on the SDN button. For example, a boss can ask a secretary to make a call and put the call on hold, after which, the boss can retrieve the held call.

Through COS programming, it is possible to allow an SDN extension to make calls using the COS of the PDN extension. All other settings that are available when using the Walking COS feature are also applied (

20.1.1 Walking COS).

SDN Direct Dial

An SDN extension can call a PDN extension or transfer a call to a PDN extension using an SDN button.

In this case:

–

Only the PDN extension rings (i.e., other SDN extensions do not ring).

–

The delayed ringing and DND settings of the PDN extension are ignored.

Depending on the mode selected through COS programming, SDN Direct Dial is performed in one of two ways, as follows:

–

Enhanced DSS Key mode: pressing the SDN button once.

–

Standard SDN Key mode: pressing the SDN button twice (a dial tone is heard the first time the SDN button is pressed).

Calls answered using the SDN button can be transferred to the PDN extension by simply pressing the SDN button once, regardless of the mode.

LED Indication

The LED patterns and the corresponding status of PDN and SDN buttons are as follows:

Light Pattern PDN Button Status SDN Button Status

Off

Green on

Slow green flashing

This extension is idle.

The corresponding PDN extension is idle.

The extension is on a call using the PDN button.

The extension is on a call using the SDN button.

A call is on hold using the PDN button.

A call is on hold using the SDN button.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 213

13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension

Light Pattern

Moderate green flashing

Rapid green flashing

Red on

Slow red flashing

Rapid red flashing

PDN Button Status

•

A call on a PDN button is on

Exclusive Call Hold or consultation hold.

•

The PDN extension is adding a member to a conference or using the line for an Unattended Conference, on a PDN button.

An incoming call is arriving at this extension.

SDN Button Status

•

A call answered using the SDN button is on Exclusive Call Hold or consultation hold.

•

The SDN extension is adding a member to a conference, or using the line for an

Unattended Conference.

A corresponding SDN extension is:

• on a call.

• holding the line using Exclusive Call

•

Hold or consultation hold.

adding a member to a conference.

• using the line for an Unattended

Conference.

• receiving Hold Recall or automatic callback ringing.

A call is on hold by a corresponding SDN extension.

A call is arriving at an Incoming Call

Distribution (ICD) group in Ring

Distribution method that this extension is a member of.

Receiving Hold Recall or automatic callback ringing from a call answered using the SDN button.

The corresponding PDN extension or another corresponding SDN extension is:

• on a call.

• holding the line using Exclusive Call

Hold or consultation hold.

• adding a member to a conference.

• using the line for an Unattended

Conference.

• receiving an incoming call directed only to the PDN extension (e.g., callback ringing).

A call is on hold by the corresponding PDN extension or another corresponding SDN extension.

The corresponding PDN extension is receiving an incoming call.

When multiple calls are on a PDN extension, the LED pattern that appears on the corresponding SDN buttons is displayed according to the following priority:

Receiving an incoming call

® holding a call ® on a call ® idle

For example, if a PDN extension receives an incoming call while on a call, the LEDs on the corresponding

SDN extensions will show the incoming call.

However, if an SDN extension is handling a call using the SDN button (e.g., on a call, has a call on hold, etc.), the status of that call will be displayed on the SDN button, regardless of the call status of the PDN extension.

Example of a Secretary Handling Calls for Multiple Bosses

The following example shows the LED patterns of the PDN and SDN buttons of each extension and how calls can be handled.

A Call From 111-1111 Arrives at Ext. 101

Ext. 101 (Boss)

PDN buttons

(Off)

SDN buttons

(Off)

(Ext. 103)

(Off)

(Rapid Green

(Ext. 102)

Flashing)

(Off)

Ext. 102 (Boss)

PDN buttons

(Off)

SDN buttons

(Ext. 103)

(Off)

(Rapid Red

(Ext. 101)

Flashing)

(Off)

Ext. 103 (Secretary)

PDN buttons

(Off)

SDN buttons

(Off)

(Ext. 102)

(Off)

(Ext. 101)

(Rapid Red

Flashing)

(Off)

214 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension

The Call From 111-1111 is Answered by Ext. 103

Ext. 101 (Boss)

PDN buttons

(Off)

SDN buttons

(Off)

(Ext. 103)

(Off)

(Ext. 102)

(Off)

(Red On)

Ext. 102 (Boss)

PDN buttons

(Off)

SDN buttons

(Off)

(Ext. 103)

(Off)

(Ext. 101)

(Red On)

(Off)

Ext. 103 (Secretary)

PDN buttons

(Off)

SDN buttons

(Off)

(Ext. 102)

(Off)

(Ext. 101)

(Green On)

(Off)

The Call From 111-1111 is On Hold by Ext. 103

Ext. 101 (Boss)

PDN buttons

(Off)

SDN buttons

(Off)

(Ext. 103)

(Off)

(Ext. 102)

(Off)

(Slow Red

Flashing)

Ext. 102 (Boss)

PDN buttons

(Off)

SDN buttons

(Off)

(Ext. 103)

(Off)

(Ext. 101)

(Slow Red

Flashing)

(Off)

The Call Held by Ext. 103 is Answered by Ext. 101

Ext. 101 (Boss)

PDN buttons

(Off)

SDN buttons

(Off)

(Ext. 103)

(Off)

(Green On)

(Ext. 102)

(Off)

Ext. 102 (Boss)

PDN buttons

(Off)

SDN buttons

(Off)

(Ext. 103)

(Off)

(Ext. 101)

(Red On)

(Off)

A Call From 222-2222 Arrives at Ext. 101

Ext. 101 (Boss)

PDN buttons

(Off)

SDN buttons

(Off)

(Ext. 103)

(Rapid Green

Flashing)

(Ext. 102)

(Off)

(Green On)

Ext. 102 (Boss)

PDN buttons

(Off)

SDN buttons

(Off)

(Ext. 103)

(Off)

(Ext. 101)

(Rapid Red

Flashing)

(Off)

Ext. 103 (Secretary)

PDN buttons

(Off)

SDN buttons

(Off)

(Ext. 102)

(Off)

(Ext. 101)

(Slow Green

Flashing)

(Off)

Ext. 103 (Secretary)

PDN buttons

(Off)

SDN buttons

(Off)

(Ext. 102)

(Off)

(Ext. 101)

(Red On)

(Off)

Ext. 103 (Secretary)

PDN buttons

(Off)

SDN buttons

(Off)

(Ext. 102)

(Off)

(Ext. 101)

(Rapid Red

Flashing)

(Off)

A Call From 333-3333 Arrives at Ext. 102

Ext. 101 (Boss)

PDN buttons

(Off)

SDN buttons

(Off)

(Ext. 103)

(Rapid Green

Flashing)

(Green On)

(Ext. 102)

(Rapid Red

Flashing)

Ext. 102 (Boss)

PDN buttons

(Off)

SDN buttons

(Off)

(Ext. 103)

(Off)

(Rapid Green

Flashing)

(Ext. 101)

(Rapid Red

Flashing)

Ext. 103 (Secretary)

PDN buttons

(Off)

SDN buttons

(Ext. 102)

(Rapid Red

Flashing)

(Off)

(Ext. 101)

(Rapid Red

Flashing)

(Off)

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 215

13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension

The Call From 333-3333 is Answered by Ext. 103

Ext. 101 (Boss)

PDN buttons

(Off)

SDN buttons

(Off)

(Ext. 103)

(Rapid Green

Flashing)

(Ext. 102)

(Red On)

(Green On)

Ext. 102 (Boss)

PDN buttons

(Off)

SDN buttons

(Off)

(Ext. 103)

(Off)

(Ext. 101)

(Rapid Red

Flashing)

(Red On)

Ext. 103 (Secretary)

PDN buttons

(Off)

SDN buttons

(Green On)

(Ext. 102)

(Off)

(Ext. 101)

(Rapid Red

Flashing)

(Off)

The Call From 333-3333 is Transferred by Ext. 103 to Extension 102

Ext. 101 (Boss)

PDN buttons SDN buttons

(Off) (Off)

(Ext. 103)

(Rapid Green

Flashing)

(Ext. 102)

(Green On)

(Red On)

Ext. 102 (Boss)

PDN buttons

(Off)

SDN buttons

(Off)

(Ext. 103)

(Off)

(Rapid Green

(Ext. 101)

Flashing)

(Rapid Red

Flashing)

Ext. 103 (Secretary)

PDN buttons

(Off)

SDN buttons

(Ext. 102)

(Moderate

Green Flashing)

(Off)

(Ext. 101)

(Rapid Red

Flashing)

(Off)

Conditions

[General]

•

A flexible button of a PT and a PS can be customized as a PDN or SDN button. A flexible button on a DSS

Console can be customized as an SDN button.

•

An extension can have up to eight PDN buttons.

•

If none of an extension’s PDN buttons are idle, the extension will not receive incoming calls, including Call

Waiting. Therefore, it is strongly recommended for PDN extensions to have at least three PDN buttons.

•

Through COS programming, it is possible to select whether extensions can create SDN buttons on their own extensions using PT programming.

•

Up to eight different extensions can assign SDN buttons corresponding to the same PDN extension.

•

When a PDN extension has an idle CO line button or ICD Group button, calls will arrive on the following buttons according to the following priority:

–

Incoming intercom calls to an ICD group: ICD Group button

® PDN button

–

Incoming CO line calls: S-CO button

® G-CO button ® L-CO button ® PDN button

–

Incoming CO line calls to an ICD group: ICD Group button

® S-CO button ® G-CO button ® L-CO button

® PDN button

•

When multiple calls of the same status (e.g., on hold) are on a PDN extension, the status of the newest call will be displayed on the corresponding SDN extensions. For example, if a PDN extension has two calls ringing, an SDN extension will answer the call that arrived at the PDN extension last, when pressing the

SDN button.

•

When a PDN extension is a member of an ICD group in Ring Distribution method, and an incoming call arrives at the ICD group, the incoming call status will not appear on the LEDs of the corresponding SDN extensions. (

® 10.1.3 Line Preference—Outgoing).

•

If none of an extension’s PDN buttons are idle, DSS buttons of other extensions registered to the PDN extension will turn on red.

•

Ring Tone Pattern

Through system programming, each extension can set ring tone patterns for PDN buttons. Ring tone patterns can be assigned separately for each SDN button.

•

Outgoing Line Preference

When "PDN" is selected as the outgoing line preference, outgoing calls will originate on the first available

PDN button (

•

Incoming Line Preference

216 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension

Through system programming, it is possible for only incoming calls arriving at PDN buttons to be answered simply by going off-hook, by selecting "PDN" as the incoming line preference (

® 10.1.2 Line Preference

—Incoming). This prohibits calls that arrive on non-PDN buttons (e.g., an SDN button) to be answered

when going off-hook.

•

Walking Extension

For PDN extensions, the Walking Extension feature can only be used when all PDN buttons are idle (

20.1.2 Walking Extension).

•

Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

If a PS has PDN or SDN buttons, Wireless XDP Parallel mode cannot be assigned to that PS (

20.1.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode).

•

OHCA/Whisper OHCA

A PDN extension cannot receive OHCA or Whisper OHCA, unless the call is made using a corresponding

SDN button (

® 12.1.3 OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement), ® 20.1.4 Whisper OHCA).

•

Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice

It is not possible to temporarily change the called party’s preset call receiving method (ring tone or voice) when calling a PDN extension, unless the call is made using a corresponding SDN button (

9.1.13 Intercom Call).

[Delayed Ringing]

•

The same delayed ringing setting is applied to all PDN buttons on an extension. Delayed ringing can be assigned separately for each SDN button.

•

Through system programming, it is possible to select whether caller information (such as Caller ID) is shown immediately on a PS when a call is received while delayed ringing is set.

•

Caller information (such as Caller ID) is not shown immediately on a PT when a call is received while delayed ringing is set.

•

SDN buttons can be set to not ring (only flash) for incoming calls. However, this setting is not available for

PDN buttons.

•

The forward no answer timer starts when a PDN extension starts ringing.

PC Programming Manual References

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—PDN/SDN

4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others— Extension—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 9— PDN Delayed Ringing

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

→ Type

→ Parameter Selection (for SDN)

→ Extension Number (for SDN)

→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, G-DN, SDN)

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 9— PDN Delayed Ringing

6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

→ Type

→ Parameter Selection (for SDN)

→ Extension Number (for SDN)

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console

→ Type

→ Parameter Selection (for SDN)

→ Extension Number (for SDN)

→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, G-DN, SDN)

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 217

13.1.8 Peer-to-Peer Connection

Feature Manual References

9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution

10.1.1 LED Indication

KX-NT265 (version 2.00 or later)

Operating Manual References

1.3.6 Call Hold

1.3.49 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension

1.3.73 Walking COS

13.1.8 Peer-to-Peer Connection

Description

This PBX automatically establishes peer-to-peer communication between peer-to-peer compatible IP extensions (i.e., IP-PTs and SIP extensions). Non-peer-to-peer IP extension calls are routed through the

DSP card. However, with peer-to-peer calls, the call is routed directly from one IP extension to another without going through a DSP card. In other words, peer-to-peer calls can be made without using the PBX’s resources.

Conditions

•

Peer-to-peer calls can only be made between extensions connected to the PBX through the IPCMPR/

IPCEMPR card.

•

The following IP telephones are peer-to-peer compatible for calls between each other:

–

–

KX-NT300 series

–

KX-NT400

–

SIP Extensions

*1 For details about checking the version of the KX-NT265, refer to the Installation Manual.

•

Three codecs are used for peer-to-peer calls: G.722, G.711, and G.729A. The speech quality of the codecs varies as follows: (High) G.722, G.711, G.729A (Low).

When the preferred codec of each party differs, the call will be established using the lower codec. For example, if the caller prefers G.711 while the called party prefers G.729A, the call will be established using

G.729A.

•

G.722 is only available for calls between KX-NT400/KX-NT300 series IP-PTs and some SIP extensions that support this codec during peer-to-peer communication.

•

Through system programming, it is possible to assign a specific type of codec to be used for each extension.

•

For SIP extensions, the priority of the codec that will be used can be specified on a SIP extension basis.

•

For non-peer-to-peer calls via the DSP card, calls cannot be made or received when all of the card’s resources are being used.

PC Programming Manual References

3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension—Option— IP Codec Priority

Feature Manual References

9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)

218 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.11 Power Failure Transfer

13.1.9 PING (Packet Internet Groper) Confirmation

Description

It is possible for this PBX to confirm the connection of IP telephones, routers, and hubs within or outside the private network using PING. The PBX will send an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) echo request through the PC programming terminal and receive an ICMP message confirming connection.

Conditions

•

This PBX performs PING as follows:

•

Test packet length: 56 bytes

•

Ping attempts: 5

•

Time out length: 1 second

•

Ping interval time: 1 second

PC Programming Manual References

2.6.18 Utility—Ping

13.1.10 Power Failure Restart

Description

When the electricity is turned back on, the PBX restarts, loads its stored data automatically, and logs the event as a System Restart in the error log.

Conditions

•

In the event of a power failure, PBX memory is protected by a factory-installed lithium battery. There is no memory loss except the memories of Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) (

® 1.1.4 Automatic Callback

Busy (Camp-on)) and Call Park (

® 3.1.7 Call Park).

13.1.11 Power Failure Transfer

Description

If the power supply to the PBX fails, specific single line telephones (SLTs) are automatically connected to specific CO lines (Power Failure Connections). The PBX will switch from the current connections to the Power

Failure Connections, and all existing conversations will be disconnected.

Only CO line conversations handled by Power Failure Connections can be made during a power failure.

Conditions

[General]

•

Only CO line calls can be made during a power failure. All other features do not work.

[KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200]

•

The analog CO line cards, extension cards, and the number of PFT ports (ports which can be used for

Power Failure Connections) are as follows:

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 219

13.1.12 Predialing

CO Line Cards: LCOT16 (4 PFT ports), LCOT8 (2 PFT ports)

Extension Cards: MSLC16 (4 PFT ports), CSLC16 (4 PFT ports), SLC16 (4 PFT ports), DHLC8 (2 PFT ports), SLC8 (2 PFT ports)

Connect only one extension card to one CO line card.

Note

Through system programming, it is possible to allow CO line calls that are established during a power failure to be maintained even when the power returns and the connection is switched back to the normal configuration from the Power Failure Connection. However, if no special programming is performed, the connection will be dropped when power returns.

[KX-TDE600]

•

The analog CO line cards, extension cards, and the number of PFT ports (ports which can be used for

Power Failure Connections) are as follows:

CO Line Cards: ELCOT16 (4 PFT ports)

Extension Cards: ECSLC24 (4 PFT ports), EMSLC16 (4 PFT ports), CSLC16 (4 PFT ports), ESLC16 (4

PFT ports), DHLC8 (2 PFT ports), SLC8 (2 PFT ports)

Connect only one extension card to one CO line card.

Note

Power Failure Connections must be made within the same shelf. An extension card cannot have a

Power Failure Connection with a CO line card of another shelf.

Installation Manual References

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

3.6.7 SLC16 Card (KX-TDA0174), MSLC16 Card (KX-TDA0175), and CSLC16 Card (KX-TDA0177)

3.12.1 Power Failure Connections

KX-TDE600

3.8.7 CSLC16 Card (KX-TDA0177), ESLC16 Card (KX-TDA6174), EMSLC16 Card (KX-TDA6175), and

ECSLC24 Card (KX-TDA6178)

3.14.1 Power Failure Connections

PC Programming Manual References

13.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer

13.1.12 Predialing

Description

A display proprietary telephone (PT) user can check and correct the number to be dialed on-hook. The call will be initiated after going off-hook.

220 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.14 Privacy Release

Conditions

•

Storing the Predialed Number in Personal Speed Dialing

The predialed number can be stored in Personal Speed Dialing by pressing the AUTO DIAL/STORE button

(

® 16.1.6 Speed Dialing, Personal). In this case, the extension will enter personal programming mode

automatically so that a name can be assigned to the stored number.

Operating Manual References

3.1.2 Personal Programming

13.1.13 Printing Message

Description

An extension user can select a message to be output on SMDR. Up to eight messages can be preprogrammed in the Printing Message table, and are available to all extensions connected to the PBX. A message can contain the "%" symbol, which requires a number to be entered in its place when the message is selected at an extension.

Depending on the content of the preprogrammed messages, this feature can be used to record a variety of information, which can be output on SMDR to, for example, a connected PC.

[Example]

If message 1 is preprogrammed as "Started work", and message 2 as "Finished work", employees can sign in by selecting message 1 when starting work, and sign out by selecting message 2 when finishing. A connected

PC can then be used to generate employee work records.

Conditions

•

Up to seven "%"s can be stored for each message.

PC Programming Manual References

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Printing Message

Feature Manual References

® 4.1.1 Data Line Security) and Executive Busy Override Deny

Operating Manual References

1.3.50 Printing Message

13.1.14 Privacy Release

Description

By default, all conversations which take place on CO lines, extension lines and doorphone lines are protected from others interrupting the conversation (Automatic Privacy).

Privacy Release allows a proprietary telephone (PT) or portable station (PS) user to suspend Automatic Privacy for an existing CO line call on the S-CO button in order to establish a three-party call.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 221

13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES

System programming is required to enable or disable this feature.

Conditions

•

S-CO Button

Any flexible button can be customized as the S-CO button.

•

Privacy Release Time

Privacy is released for five seconds to allow the conversation to be joined.

•

This feature overrides Data Line Security (

(

® 5.1.3 Executive Busy Override).

PC Programming Manual References

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 1— PT Operation—Privacy Release by SCO key

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type

6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Type

Feature Manual References

® 4.1.6 DID (Direct Inward

Operating Manual References

1.3.15 Conference

13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES

Description

A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective communications between company members at different locations. The TIE lines can be used to call through the PBX to reach another switching system (PBX or telephone company). By using TIE lines, the PBX can support not only communications with the public network but with other company members in the private network where the PBX is included.

Interface

The following interfaces can be used to establish a private network:

Interface

T1 (TIE [E & M])

PRI (QSIG)

VoIP

Network Type

Digital (64 kbps

´ 24 channels)

Digital (ISDN 23B+D)

Internet Protocol (IP)

The available interfaces depend on the cards installed in the PBX.

Making a TIE Line Call

One of the following two methods can be used to make a TIE line call.

Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code)

Dial the [Extension Number] only.

222 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES

[Example]

PBX-1

Interface

PBX-2

TIE Line

Interface Interface

TIE Line

PBX-3

Interface

Extn.1011

Extn.1012

Dials "3011".

Dials "2011".

Extn. 2011 Extn. 3011

Explanation:

To use this method, it is necessary to change the first one or two digits of extension numbers of either PBX

(e.g., 10XX for PBX-1, 20XX for PBX-2) to allow calls to be routed properly.

Case 1:

Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials extension number "2011".

® Extension 1012 of PBX-1 is connected to extension 2011 of PBX-2.

Case 2:

Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials extension number "3011".

® Extension 1011 of PBX-1 is connected to extension 3011 of PBX-3.

PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code)

Dial the [TIE Line Access Number] + [PBX Code] + [Extension Number].

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— TIE Line Access

11.1 [9-1] TIE Table— Own PBX Code

[Example]

PBX-1

PBX Code 951

PBX-2

PBX Code 952

PBX-3

PBX Code 953

Interface

TIE Line

Interface Interface

TIE Line

Interface

Extn.1011

Extn.1012

Dials "7-953-1011".

Dials "7-952-1011".

[PBX code]

[TIE line

access no.]

[Extn. no.]

Extn. 1011

Document Version 2009-12

Extn. 1011

Feature Manual 223

13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES

Explanation:

To use this method, it is necessary to know each PBX code in order to identify the location of an extension.

Case 1:

Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials TIE line access number "7", PBX code "952", and extension number "1011".

® Extension 1012 of PBX-1 is connected to extension 1011 of PBX-2.

Case 2:

Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials TIE line access number "7", PBX code "953", and extension number "1011".

® Extension 1011 of PBX-1 is connected to extension 1011 of PBX-3.

TIE Line and CO Line Connection

To connect the TIE line with the CO line, the following patterns are available:

CO Line-to-TIE Access

TIE-to-CO Line Access

CO Line-to-TIE-to-CO Line Access

CO Line-to-TIE Access

It is possible to assign an extension of another PBX as the destination of incoming CO line calls to the own

PBX.

It is also possible to forward calls using a virtual PS. Using this method, CO line calls received at PBX-1 are forwarded directly to the extension at PBX-2, even when using the PBX Code method.

Incoming CO Line Call Destination Assignment

[Example]

CO Line

Telephone Company

CO Line

TIE Line Network

PBX-1

DID No: 4567

Destination: 2011

TIE Line

Interface

PBX-2

Interface

Outside Caller

Dials "123-4567".

Extn. 2011

Extn. 1011

Explanation:

An outside caller dials "123-4567". The call is sent to extension "2011" of PBX-2 through the TIE line according to the assignment of the DID or DIL call destination of PBX-1. (

Dialing))

® 12.3 [10-3] DID Table— DID Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

224 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES

® [453] DID Destination

FWD/Call Transfer/Intercept Routing to the TIE Line

[Example]

Telephone Company

CO Line

PBX-1

Interface

CO Line

TIE Line Network

PBX Code 952

TIE Line

PBX Code 952

PBX-2

Interface

Forwarded/Transferred

/Intercepted to 7-952-2011

Outside Caller

Dials "123-4567".

Extn. 1011 Extn. 2011

Explanation:

An outside caller dials "123-4567". The call reaches the destination (extension 1011 of PBX-1), and the call is forwarded, transferred, or intercepted to extension "2011" of PBX-2 through the TIE line.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 225

13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES

TIE-to-CO Line Access

The PBX sends TIE line calls to the CO lines of another PBX through the TIE lines.

CO Line Call through Other PBXs

[Example]

<Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code)>

Telephone Company

TIE Line Network

CO Line

PBX-1

9-211-4567

Interface

TIE Line

TRG 2

PBX-2

Interface

211-4567

CO Line

Extn. 1011

Dials "802-9-211-4567".

Extn. 2011

Outside Party

(211-4567)

Explanation:

Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the Trunk Group Access number of PBX-1 "8", trunk group number "02" (TRG2), Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9", and telephone number "211-4567".

® 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Trunk Group Access

PBX-1 sends the call to PBX-2 through the trunk group (TRG) 2 (TIE line).

PBX-2 sends the call to the outside party "211-4567".

226 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES

<PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code)>

Telephone Company

CO Line

TIE Line Network

PBX-1

PBX Code 951

952-9-211-4567

Interface

TIE Line

TRG 2

PBX-2

PBX Code 952

Interface

211-4567

CO Line

Extn. 1011

Dials "7-952-9-211-4567" or

"802-952-9-211-4567".

Extn. 1011

Outside Party

(211-4567)

Explanation:

Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the TIE line access number "7", PBX code "952", Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9", and telephone number "211-4567"; or dials the Trunk Group Access number of

PBX-1 "8", trunk group number "02" (TRG2), PBX code "952", Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9", and telephone number "211-4567".

The call is connected to the outside party "211-4567" through PBX-2 which has PBX code "952".

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 227

13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES

CO Line Call through Other PBXs—by the ARS feature

[Example]

<Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code) using ARS>

Telephone Company

TIE Line Network

CO Line

PBX-1

9-211-4567

Interface

TIE Line

TRG 2

PBX-2

Interface

211-4567

CO Line

Extn. 1011

Dials "9-211-4567".

Extn. 2011

Outside Party

(211-4567)

Explanation:

Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the Idle Line Access number of PBX-1 "9" and telephone number "211-4567".

PBX-1 modifies the call (adds the Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9") and sends the call to PBX-2 through the TIE line (trunk group [TRG] 2) according to the ARS programming of PBX-1.

PBX-2 sends the call to the outside party "211-4567".

228 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES

<PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code) using ARS>

Telephone Company

CO Line

TIE Line Network

PBX-1

PBX Code 951

952-9-211-4567

Interface

TIE Line

TRG 2

PBX-2

PBX Code 952

Interface

211-4567

CO Line

Extn. 1011

Dials "9-211-4567".

Extn. 1011

Outside Party

(211-4567)

Explanation:

Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the Idle Line Access number of PBX-1 "9" and telephone number "211-4567".

PBX-1 modifies the call (adds "952" and the Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9") and sends the call to PBX-2 which has PBX code "952" through the TIE line (trunk group [TRG] 2) according to the ARS programming of PBX-1.

PBX-2 sends the call to the outside party "211-4567".

Blocking CO line calls made through another PBX and how to override it:

Whether an incoming TIE line call can make a CO line call through this PBX (i.e., PBX-2), depends on the

COS that is assigned to the trunk group of this PBX, that the incoming TIE line is connected to. If the COS of the trunk group is unable to make outgoing calls by the TRS or External Call Block feature, CO line calls made through this PBX will be prohibited.

To override this prohibition, an extension of PBX-1 must enter a verification code assigned to PBX-2 to change the COS temporarily. It is also possible to override the prohibition by specifying an extension at

PBX-2 with the Walking COS feature, to temporarily switch to that extension’s COS.

® 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

®4.13 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block

® 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— COS

® 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code

® [500] Trunk Group Number

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 229

13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES

[Programming Example of PBX-2]

Trunk Group No.

COS No.

TRG of Incoming

Call

TRG 1

Outgoing Call

TRG 2 TRG 3

COS 1

COS 2

COS 3

: : : :

: Block

…

[Example]

<Extension Number Method (Access Without PBX Code)>

Telephone Company

TIE Line Network

CO Line

PBX-1

Interface

TIE Line

TRG 2 of PBX-1

PBX-2

9-211-4567

TRG 1 (COS 3)

of PBX-2

Interface verification code entry feature no.

+ + verification code + verification code

PIN+9-211-4567

211-4567

TRG 3

of PBX-2

CO Line

Outside Party

(211-4567)

Extn. 1011 Extn. 1012

Extn. 2001

Dials "8-02-9-211-4567".

Dials "8-02+verification code entry feature no. + + verification code + verification code

PIN+9-211-4567".

230 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES

Explanation:

Case 1:

Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the Trunk Group Access number of PBX-1 "8", TIE line trunk group number (TRG 2), Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9", and the telephone number "211-4567".

The call is not connected to the outside party through PBX-2 because the COS of TRG 1 (COS 3) is blocked from accessing TRG 3 of PBX-2.

Case 2:

Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials the Trunk Group Access number of PBX-1 "8", TIE line trunk group

(TRG2), verification code entry feature number, , verification code, verification code personal identification number (PIN), Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9", and the telephone number "211-4567".

If the specified verification code applies COS 2 of PBX-2, the call is connected to the outside party through PBX-2, because COS 2 is not blocked from accessing TRG 3 of PBX-2.

<PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code)>

Telephone Company

CO Line

211-4567

TIE Line Network

TRG 3

of PBX-2

PBX-1

PBX Code 951

Interface

TIE Line

TRG 2 of PBX-1

PBX-2

PBX Code 952

952-9-211-4567

TRG 1 (COS 3)

of PBX-2

Interface

952+verification code entry feature no.

+ + verification code + verification code

PIN + 9-211-4567

CO Line

Outside Party

(211-4567)

Extn. 1011 Extn. 1012

Dials "7-952-9-

211-4567".

Extn. 1001

Dials "7-952+verification code entry feature no. + + verification code + verification code

PIN+9-211-4567".

Explanation:

Case 1:

Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the TIE line access number "7", PBX code "952", Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9", and the telephone number "211-4567".

The call is not connected to the outside party through PBX-2 because the COS of TRG 1 (COS 3) is blocked from accessing TRG 3 of PBX-2.

Case 2:

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 231

13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES

Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials the TIE line access number "7", PBX code "952", verification code entry feature number, < , verification code, verification code personal identification number (PIN), Idle Line

Access number of PBX-2 "9", and the telephone number "211-4567".

If the specified verification code applies COS 2 of PBX-2, the call is connected to the outside party through PBX-2, because COS 2 is not blocked from accessing TRG 3 of PBX-2.

Override using an Itemized Billing Code for ARS

By assigning an Itemized Billing Code for ARS to PBX-1, an extension's verification code can be sent to

PBX-2 automatically, without the extension having to dial the verification code.

® 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS Itemized Code

® 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS Itemized Code

® 10.6 [8-5] Carrier

Note

When the number dialed after ARS modification is over 20 digits:

–

With the VoIP interface, this feature can be available if the software of the IP-GW card is upgraded.

232 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES

[Example]

<Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code)>

[Programming Example of PBX-1]

Extn. No.

1012

1013

Itemized Billing Code

11112222

33334444

Carrier Name

Trunk Group

Carrier Access Code

Removed No. of Digits

Modify Command

TIE Line

CI9H

CO Line

Telephone Company

211-4567

CO Line

TRG 3

of PBX-2

TIE Line Network

PBX-1 PBX-2

Interface

TIE Line

TRG 2 of PBX-1

TRG 1 (COS 3)

of PBX-2 verification code entry feature no.

+ + verification code + verification code

PIN+9-211-4567

Interface

Outside Party

(211-4567)

[Programming Example of PBX-2]

Veri. Code Veri. PIN COS

1111 2222 2

3333 4444 2

Extn. 1011 Extn. 1012

Dials "9-211-4567".

Extn. 2001

[SMDR Output Example]

Date

06/04/18

Time

03:21PM

04:32PM

Ext

1001

*1111

Dial Number

2114444

2114567

Ring Duration

00:01'23

00:23'45

Explanation:

Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials the Idle Line Access number of PBX-1 "9", and the telephone number "211-4567".

PBX-1 modifies the call (adds the verification code entry feature number, verification code and verification code PIN, and the Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9") and sends the call to PBX-2 through the TIE line (trunk group [TRG] 2) according to the ARS programming of PBX-1.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 233

13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES

<PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code)>

[Programming Example of PBX-1]

Extn. No.

1012

1013

Itemized Billing Code

11112222

33334444

Carrier Name

Trunk Group

Carrier Access Code

Removed No. of Digits

Modify Command

TIE Line

952

CI9H

CO Line

Telephone Company

211-4567

CO Line

TIE Line Network

PBX-1

PBX Code 951

PBX-2

PBX Code 952

Interface

TIE Line

TRG 2 of PBX-1

TRG 1 (COS 3)

of PBX-2

Interface

952+verification code entry feature no.

+ + verification code + verification code

PIN+9-211-4567

TRG 3

of PBX-2

Outside Party

(211-4567)

[Programming Example of PBX-2]

Veri. Code Veri. PIN COS

1111 2222 2

3333 4444 2

Extn. 1011 Extn. 1012

Dials "9-211-4567".

Extn. 1001

[SMDR Output Example]

Date

06/04/18

Time

03:21PM

04:32PM

Ext

1001

*1111

Dial Number

2114444

2114567

Ring Duration

00:01'23

00:23'45

Explanation:

Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials the Idle Line Access number of PBX-1 "9", and telephone number "211-4567".

PBX-1 modifies the call (adds "952", the verification code entry feature number, verification code and verification code PIN, and the Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9") and sends the call to PBX-2 which has PBX code "952" through the TIE line (trunk group [TRG] 2) according to the ARS programming of

PBX-1.

234 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES d. FWD/Call Transfer/Intercept Routing to the CO Line

[Example]

Telephone Company

PBX-1

PBX Code 951

TIE Line Network

CO Line

PBX-2

PBX Code 952

952-1011

Forwarded/Transferred/

Intercepted to 211-4567

TIE Line

Interface Interface

CO Line

Extn. 1011

Dials "7-952-1011".

Extn. 1011

Outside Party

(211-4567)

Explanation:

Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the TIE line access number "7", PBX code "952", and extension number "1011".

The call reaches the destination (extension 1011 of PBX-2) through the TIE line, and the call is forwarded, transferred or intercepted to the outside party "211-4567" through the CO line.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 235

13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES

CO Line-to-TIE-to-CO Line Access

An outside caller can be connected to an outside party through the TIE line by using the DISA feature.

[Example]

Telephone Company

(area code: 222)

Telephone Company

(area code: 333)

CO Line CO Line

TIE Line Network

CO Line 123-4567

PBX-1

PBX Code 951

952-9-1-333-123-4567

PBX-2

PBX Code 952

DISA Interface

TIE Line

TRG 2

Interface

CO Line

Outside Caller

Dials "(DISA phone number)-9-1-333-

123-4567".

Extn. 1011 Extn. 1011

Outside Party

(333-123-4567)

Explanation:

The outside caller dials the "DISA phone number of PBX-1", Idle Line Access number of PBX-1 "9", and telephone number "1-333-123-4567".

PBX-1 modifies the call (adds "952" and the Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9") and sends the call to

PBX-2 which has PBX code "952" through the TIE line (trunk group [TRG] 2) according to the ARS programming of PBX-1.

PBX-2 sends the modified call to the outside party "333-123-4567" according to its ARS programming.

236 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES

TIE Line Programming

To Make a TIE Line Call

The TIE Line Routing and Modification Table is referenced by the PBX to identify the CO line route when an extension user makes a TIE line call.

It is necessary to make unified tables with all PBXs in the TIE line network.

The routing pattern appropriate for each call is decided by the dialed number.

There are two system programs for the tables:

TIE Line Routing Table: used to assign the leading numbers (PBX code or extension number) and trunk group hunt sequence.

® 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table— Leading Number

TIE Modify Removed Number of Digits/Added Number: used to remove digits from and add a number to the dialed number of the TIE line call. This modification may be needed depending on the TIE line network configuration.

11.1 [9-1] TIE Table

→

Removed Number of Digits

→

Added Number

→

Trunk Group

[Programming Examples]

Your PBX is PBX-1 and there are four PBXs in your TIE line network. To identify the CO line route as illustrated, you should make the following tables.

Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code)

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Other PBX Extension— Dial

TIE Line Network

PBX-4

PBX-3

If you dial: a) 2xxx b) 3xxx c) 4xxx

(2, 3, 4: Other PBX

Extension Number

[TIE] in the Flexible

Numbering Plan)

Extn. 4xxx

TRG 2 b-2nd) 3xxx c) 4xxx

Extn. 1xxx

PBX-1

TRG 1 a) 2xxx b-1st) 3xxx

Extn. 3xxx

PBX-2

Extn. 2xxx

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 237

13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES

[TIE Line Routing and Modification Table of PBX-1]

Priority 1

Location

No.

Leading

No.

TRG

Dial Modification

Removed

No. of

Digits

Added

No.

TRG

Priority 2

Dial Modification

Removed

No. of

Digits

Added

No.

: :

. .

. .

Explanation:

Location 01:

The hunt sequence by dialing [2XXX]:

The 1st route—trunk group (TRG) 1 Sending no. to PBX-2: 2XXX

Location 02:

The hunt sequence by dialing [3XXX]:

The 1st route—trunk group (TRG) 1 Sending no. to PBX-2: 3XXX

The 2nd route—trunk group (TRG) 2 Sending no. to PBX-4: 3XXX

Location 03:

The hunt sequence by dialing [4XXX]:

The 1st route—trunk group (TRG) 2 Sending no. to PBX-4: 4XXX

PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code)

® 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— TIE Line Access

® 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table— Own PBX Code

TIE Line Network

PBX-4

PBX Code 954

PBX-3

PBX Code 953

Extn. xxxx

If you dial: a) 7-952-xxxx b) 7-953-xxxx c) 7-954-xxxx

(7: TIE Line Access

Number in the

Flexible

Numbering Plan)

TRG 2 b-2nd) 953#-xxxx c) 954#-xxxx

Extn. 1xxx

PBX-1

PBX Code 951

TRG 1 a) 952-xxxx b-1st) 953-xxxx

PBX-2

PBX Code 952

Extn. xxxx

238 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES

[TIE Line Routing and Modification Table of PBX-1]

Priority 1

Location

No.

Leading

No.

952

953

954

TRG

Dial Modification

Removed

No. of

Digits

Added

No.

954#

TRG

Priority 2 . .

Dial Modification

Removed

No. of

Digits

Added

No.

. .

. .

953# . .

. .

: :

Explanation:

Location 01:

The hunt sequence by dialing [7+PBX Code 952+XXXX]:

The 1st route — trunk group (TRG) 1

Sending no. to PBX-2: 952–XXXX

Location 02:

The hunt sequence by dialing [7+PBX Code 953+XXXX]:

The 1st route — trunk group (TRG) 1

Sending no. to PBX-2: 953–XXXX

The 2nd route — trunk group (TRG) 2

Sending no. to PBX-4: 953#–XXXX

Location 03:

The hunt sequence by dialing [7+PBX Code 954+XXXX]:

The 1st route — trunk group (TRG) 2

Sending no. to PBX-4: 954#–XXXX

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 239

13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES

To Receive a TIE Line Call a.

Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code)

[Example]

TIE Line Network

PBX-4

Extn. 1011

Dials "3011".

PBX-1

1 3011

PBX-3

PBX-2

Extn. 3011

2 3011

Extn. 2011

A TIE line call is sent to

PBX-2 from PBX-1. If the number sent from PBX-1 is an extension number of

PBX-2 (e.g., 2011), the call will be received at extension "2011". If not,

PBX-2 checks the number in the TIE Line

Routing and Modified

Table of PBX-2.

If the match is found in the table, the call will be modified according to the table and send to the corresponding PBX

(PBX-3).

The number sent from

PBX-2 "3011" is an extension number of

PBX-3. The call is received at extension

"3011".

Note

When a TIE line call is sent from one PBX to another, the receiving PBX first modifies the received number according to the assignment for the CO line port: the number of digits removed, and the number added, are determined by this assignment. Then the PBX checks whether the completed number is an existing extension number at that PBX.

240 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES b.

PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code)

[Example]

PBX-4

PBX Code 954

TIE Line Network

Extn. 1011

Dials "7-953-1011".

PBX-1

PBX Code 951

953-1011

PBX-3

PBX Code 953

Extn. 1011

953-1011

PBX-2

PBX Code 952

Extn. 1011

A TIE line call is sent to

PBX-2 from PBX-1. If the number sent from

PBX-1 has the PBX code of PBX-2 "952", the call will be received at the corresponding extension of PBX-2

(e.g., 1011 of PBX-2).

If not, PBX-2 checks the number in the TIE

Line Routing and

Modified Table of

PBX-2.

If the match is found in the table, the call will be modified according to the table and send to the corresponding

PBX (PBX-3).

The number sent from

PBX-2 "953-1011" has the PBX code of PBX-3

"953". The call is received at extension

"1011" of PBX-3.

Note

When a TIE line call is sent to a PBX from another PBX, first the PBX modifies the number sent to the

PBX according to the assignment for each CO line port of the PBX: the removed number of digits from and/or added number to the number sent to the PBX is determined by the assignment. Then the PBX starts to check the number whether the number has the PBX code of the PBX.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 241

13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES

TIE Line Routing Flowchart

[Making a TIE Line Call from an Extension]

A TIE line call is made using one of the following methods:

PBX Code Method:

TIE Line Access Number + PBX Code +

(Extension Number or Other Digits)

Extension Number Method:

Extension Number

Is the dialed number either an extension number of another PBX or a number beginning with the

TIE Line Access number?

Yes

Not treated as a call which uses the TIE line.

Does the dialed number begin with a leading number (PBX code or first few digits of an extension number) stored in the TIE Line Routing and Modification Table?

Yes

The TIE Line Routing and Modification Table checks the number and selects the highest-priority Trunk Group that is available.

The dialed number is modified if a removed number of digits and/or added number is assigned.

Reorder tone

Is a trunk group available?

Yes

Is there an idle CO line in the trunk group?

Yes

Routes to other PBX or CO line.

Reorder tone

Busy tone

242 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES

[Receiving a Call through a TIE Line]

A call is received via a TIE line.

PBX Code Method

(Access with PBX Code)

Yes

The Incoming Number Modification Table checks the CO line port carrying the call, and modifies the number according to the method assigned for that port.

Does the PBX have a PBX code (Own PBX Code) assigned to it?

Extension Number Method

(Access without PBX Code)

Does the modified number contain the PBX code assigned to this PBX?

Yes

Modifies the number by removing the PBX code.

(found in the flowchart,

[Making a Call via a TIE

Line from an Extension])

The PBX checks the modified number to determine what kind of number it is.

Operator Call No.

Directs the call to an operator.

Extension No.

of this PBX

Does the corresponding extension exist?

Yes

Is the extension idle?

Yes

Sends a reorder tone, or sends the call to an operator

(Intercept Routing

No Destination).

Call Waiting

Busy tone

Intercept Routing

Busy/DND

Extension No.

of Another PBX

(found in the flowchart,

[Making a Call

via a TIE Line from an

Extension])

Idle Line

Access No. or

Trunk Group

Access No.

Other

Reorder tone.

PBX checks the Class of Service (COS) of the incoming trunk group.

Is the outgoing trunk group programmed to allow calls from this COS?

Yes

Does

Toll Restriction (TRS) allow this COS to make this call?

Reorder tone.

Yes

Reorder tone.

Calls the extension.

Sends the call to the CO line.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 243

13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES

Common Extension Numbering for 2 PBXs

Two PBXs can have extensions with the same leading number. TIE Line calling is available using extension numbering.

CO Line

Telephone Company

CO Line

TIE Line Network

PBX-1

DID No.: 4567

Destination: 1033

PBX-2

TIE Line

Interface Interface

Outside Caller

Dials "123-4567".

Extn.1011

Extn.1012

Dials "1033".

Extn.1033

Explanation:

The PBX first searches local extensions for a matching number. If a dialed number is not found at the local

PBX, the call can then be sent to a remote PBX, and the remote PBX checks the TIE Line Routing Table for a corresponding entry.

Case 1:

Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials extension number "1011".

® The dialed number is found at the local PBX, and extension 1012 of PBX-1 is connected to extension 1011 of PBX-1.

Case 2:

Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials extension number "1033".

® The dialed number is not found at the local PBX, so the call is redirected to the specified TIE Line, and extension 1012 of PBX-1 is connected to extension 1033 of PBX-2.

Case 3:

A public CO line call directed to extension 1033 arrives at PBX-1.

® The target extension number is not found at the local PBX, so the call is redirected to the specified TIE Line, and the call is connected to extension 1033 of PBX-2.

–

The KX-NCS4910 or KX-NCS4950 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) is required to use this feature.

–

System programming is required to enable this feature.

–

If a dialed number is not found at a remote PBX, the call cannot be redirected to the local PBX to search for a matching number.

244 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES

Conditions

•

A CO line which is used for a private network should be assigned "Private" as the networking type. (®

9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES)

•

To establish a QSIG network (

® 13.1.20 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES—QSIG), each ISDN (QSIG)

connection in a TIE line network must have the port on one PBX assigned as a master port, and the port on the other PBX assigned as a slave port. PBXs that support this feature are KX-TDE series, KX-TDA series, and KX-NCP series PBXs.

[TIE Line Network Connection Example]

Extn.1000

Extn.1999

PBX-1

(A) Master (A) Slave

PBX-2

Extn. 2000

Extn. 2999

QSIG Network

(B) Master (C) Slave

(B) Slave

PBX-3

Extn. 3000

Extn. 3999

•

When a TIE line call arrives at a busy extension which has disabled Call Waiting, the caller will hear a busy tone. If required, Intercept Routing can be activated.

•

The Inter-digit time can be assigned for TIE line calls.

® 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—DID

PC Programming Manual References

3.11 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—GW Settings

3.12 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—DN2IP

3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Network Numbering Plan— Trunk Property

3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port— Trunk Property

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—DID

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features

→ Idle Line Access (Local Access)

→ Trunk Group Access

→ TIE Line Access

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Other PBX Extension

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— Private Network—TIE Call by Extension Numbering (Activation Key

Required)

5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— COS

11.1 [9-1] TIE Table

12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings

→DIL— Trunk Property

→DIL— DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

→DID/TIE

12.3 [10-3] DID Table— DID Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

12.6 [10-4] Miscellaneous— Intercept—Routing to Operator - No Destination (Destination is not programmed.)

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 245

13.1.16 Private Network Features—Centralized Voice Mail

PT Programming Manual References

[453] DID Destination

[500] Trunk Group Number

Feature Manual References

17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)

Operating Manual References

1.2.1 Making Calls

13.1.16 Private Network Features—Centralized Voice Mail

Description

Up to 8 PBXs connected in a VoIP or ISDN private network can share the services of a VPS connected to another PBX in DPT integration. This VPS can provide voice mail for extensions attached to any of the PBXs in the network, as if the VPS were connected to the local PBX. In addition, the VPS can send Message Waiting notifications to extensions at any PBX, and users can access their mailboxes directly using the Message

Waiting button.

The VPS features available at extensions in a network are shown below.

No.

Feature Remote VPS Local VPS

Automatic Configuration—Quick Setup

FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS

Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS

Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS

Transfer Recall to a Mailbox of the VPS

Listening to a Recorded Message (Direct

Mailbox Access)

VPS CO Line Service & Automatic Time Mode

Notification

Caller’s Identification Notification to the VPS

DID Number Notification to the VPS

Status Notification to the VPS

Paging by the VPS

Live Call Screening (LCS)

Yes

246 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.16 Private Network Features—Centralized Voice Mail

No.

Feature

Two-way Recording into the VPS

VPS Data Control by the PBX

Remote FWD Setting by the VM

VM Menu

Message clear on Check Out

Voice message number display

Remote VPS

Yes

Local VPS

Yes

[CO Line Call Answered by the VPS, Transferred to Extension at Other PBX (Extension

Number Method)]

Outside Caller

Telephone Company

PBX-1

TIE Line Network

PBX-2

Private network

Hello.

Please enter extension number.

Extn.

201

Extn.

202

PBX-3

PBX-4

PBX-5

PBX-6

PBX-7

PBX-8

Extn.

101

Mailbox 101

Mailbox 201

Mailbox 202

VPS

[Explanation]

A CO line call is answered by the AA service of the VPS. The caller enters extension number 201, so the call is transferred over the private network to extension 201.

If extension 201 does not answer, mailbox 201 in the VPS will answer it and play the appropriate message.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 247

13.1.16 Private Network Features—Centralized Voice Mail

[CO Line Call to an Extension Not Answered, Forwarded to Mailbox (Extension Number

Method)]

Telephone Company

Outside Caller

TIE Line Network

PBX-1

PBX-2

Extn.

101

Mailbox 101

Mailbox 201

Mailbox 202

VPS

Private network

PBX-3

PBX-4

PBX-5

PBX-6

PBX-7

PBX-8

Mailbox 201:

"Hello. I am not at my desk right now."

Extn. 201

Fwd to VPS

Extn.

202

[Explanation]

Extension 201 does not answer the CO line call, so the call is forwarded to the VPS, and answered by mailbox

201. If the outside caller leaves a message, the VPS sends a Message Waiting notification to the extension using Enhanced QSIG information over the private network.

When forwarding the call, PBX-2 sends any received call information (Caller ID number/name, etc.) along with the VM trunk group number to use, applicable time mode, and extension number and forwarding reason of the original destination extension to PBX-1 as Enhanced QSIG information.

248 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.16 Private Network Features—Centralized Voice Mail

PBX Code Method

Telephone Company

Outside Caller

Extn.

101

PBX-1 (PBX

Code: 20)

Private network

Mailbox 101

Mailbox 201

Mailbox 730102:

"Hello. I am not at my desk right now."

Mailbox 730101

Mailbox 730102

VPS

"7-30-102"

Extn. 102

Fwd to VPS

[PBX code]

[TIE line

access no.]

[Extn. no.]

Extn.

101

TIE Line Network

PBX-2 (PBX

Code: 30)

PBX-3

PBX-4

PBX-5

PBX-6

PBX-7

PBX-8

[Explanation]

Extension 102 does not answer the CO line call, so the call is forwarded to the VPS, using a VPS mailbox number containing the TIE line access number, the PBX code of the PBX that received the call, and the

extension number that received the call.

This mailbox number is the same as if an extension connected to PBX-1 called extension 102 of PBX-2. This mailbox number should be programmed as the mailbox number and owner extension number on the VPS.

Multiple VPSs

More than one PBX in the network can have a VPS connected, and each VPS can provide voice mail services for extensions connected to other PBXs in the network.

Conditions

•

The KX-NCS4910 or KX-NCS4950 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) is required for the KX-TDE series PBX connected to the VPS, and for all KX-TDE series PBXs that will use this feature.

•

All PBXs in the network must be KX-TDE series, KX-TDA series, or KX-NCP series PBXs. For information on the hardware requirements for KX-TDA/KX-NCP series PBXs that share the same VPS, refer to the corresponding Feature Manual.

•

Only KX-TVA series VPSs connected using DPT integration support this feature.

•

Mailboxes for extensions connected to other PBXs in the network must be set up manually.

•

An extension can receive Message Waiting notifications from multiple VPSs connected to PBXs in the network. When multiple notifications of the number of unheard messages in an extension user’s message box are sent from different VPSs, the most recent notification will be displayed.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 249

13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)

•

A flexible button cannot be customized as a Message Waiting button for another extension at a different

PBX.

•

Whether or not Enhanced QSIG information is transmitted can be set in the TIE table.

•

When PBXs are connected by PRI23 cards, the card must be set to ISDN Standard mode. If set to T1 mode, the card must be removed and reinstalled to allow the mode to be changed. When the card is reinserted into the PBX, it is possible to choose whether the card will be set to T1 mode or ISDN Standard mode. The default is ISDN Standard.

•

PBX Code Method

The number used in this method must be no more than 8 digits.

•

When using a mailbox number containing more than 5 digits, the version of the KX-TVA series VPS must be 2.1 (Main Software Version 2.50) or later.

•

Transfer to Mailbox

It is possible to transfer calls to a mailbox of a VPS at another PBX, by creating a flexible button containing the following:

[T] + extension number of VPS at other PBX + [P] + [#] + 6

Then, the extension user can transfer calls to a mailbox by pressing this key, entering the mailbox number, and going on hook.

•

The VM Menu feature cannot be used in a Centralized Voice Mail network. When extensions belonging to a PBX that is not connected to the VPS have a mailbox in the VPS, the VM Menu feature should be disabled for the mailbox using the Class of Service (COS) setting of the VPS. Otherwise, there may be an answering delay of about 6 seconds.

PC Programming Manual References

3.48 [1-3] Option— New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card

11.1 [9-1] TIE Table—Centralized VM

11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission

→ Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralized VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat

Counter

→ Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralized VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Timer

13.1 [11-1] Main—Maintenance

→ Error Log for Centralized VM—Network MSW Transmission (Counter)

→ Error Log for Centralized VM—Network MSW Transmission (Buffer)

Feature Manual References

19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station

Selection)

Description

When PBXs are networked using ISDN or IP-GW cards, it is possible to assign flexible buttons as Network

Direct Station Selection (NDSS) buttons. These buttons are used to monitor the status of extensions connected to up to seven other PBXs in the network, and to make or transfer calls to those extensions with one touch, like normal DSS buttons. This allows operator functions to be centralized even when there are offices in remote locations.

NDSS buttons show the status of the monitored extension as follows:

250 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)

Light pattern

Off

Red on

[Example Network]

Status

The monitored extension is idle.

The monitored extension is busy or has set DND for CO line calls.

1001 (busy)

PBX-1

Network ID 1

Monitor extension

Extn. 2001

Extn. 2002

Extn. 4001

PBX-3

Network ID 0

PBX-2

Network ID 2

PBX-4

Network ID 3

2001 (busy)

2002 (idle)

4001 (idle)

Monitor extension

Extn. 1001

Extn. 2002

[Programming Procedure]

Routing Table Assignment

TIE Line Routing and Modification tables must have been programmed in advance for all PBXs in the network, to allow calls to be made and transferred between PBXs (

® 13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK

FEATURES).

In the programming example that follows, the PBXs in the network use the Extension Number method, as shown in the illustration above. However, the PBX Access Code method can also be used.

Network PBX ID Assignment

Assign a Network PBX ID to each PBX in the network.

® 11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission— Network Data Transmission for Centralized Operator

Feature—Network PBX ID

•

IDs 1-8: Can monitor extensions at other PBXs, and transmit monitor data about local extensions. Each

ID number can be assigned to one PBX within the network.

•

ID 0: Retransmits monitor data throughout the network. This ID number can be assigned to multiple

PBXs.

QSIG Port Setting [Monitored PBX]

ISDN-QSIG (PBX Direct Connection)

Each QSIG port of a PRI card that will be used to transmit extension status information must be set to do so through system programming. Even if a port is set to not transmit information, it will still receive information from other PBXs.

3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Networking Data Transfer

Transmit

Enabled

Extension Status Information Functions

•

Transmit information on own PBX extensions

•

Receive information from other PBXs; forward it to other QSIG ports of the PBX

•

Re-transmit information received by other QSIG ports of the PBX

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 251

13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)

Transmit

Disabled

Extension Status Information Functions

•

Receive information from other PBXs; forward it to other QSIG ports of the PBX

Set the transmission setting for each port according to the layout of your network, so that extension status information can travel between NDSS monitor PBXs.

[Example ISDN Network Port Setting]

4001 NDSS

Idle

Busy

PBX-1

Network ID 1

OFF

PBX-3

4001

Busy

OFF

4001

Busy

OFF

PBX-4

Network ID 3

PBX-5

4001

Busy

OFF

PBX-2

Network ID 0

OFF

4001

Idle Busy

IP-GW-QSIG

IP data is routed through the network according to the routing tables of the IP-GW cards. When using VoIP, it is necessary to identify the monitor PBXs, to which to transmit extension status information, for each card that will be used. This is done by specifying the extension number of any extension (for example, the PBX operator) at the monitor PBX as a Network Operator extension for that IP-GW card.

[Example VoIP Network]

PBX-1

PBX-2

Network

ID 1

4001 NDSS

Idle

Busy

PBX-3

IP Network

PBX-4

Network

ID 2

4001 NDSS

Idle

Busy

4001

Idle Busy

Mixed Network

When using the NDSS feature over a mixed network containing both VoIP portions and ISDN line portions, it is possible to set whether status information will be transferred between VoIP and ISDN cards within each PBX. For example, if the monitor PBX is on a VoIP network, and monitored PBXs are on an ISDN

252 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)

network, the PBX that acts as a gateway between the VoIP and ISDN networks must have this setting enabled for ISDN to VoIP.

Network Monitor Extension Registration [Monitor PBX]

Register the extensions (attached to other PBXs) that will be monitored. A maximum of 250 extensions can be registered. Only extensions that have been registered here can be assigned to NDSS buttons.

11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table— Network Extension No.

Network Monitor Extensions Table

Index No.

Network Extn. No.

Network Extn. Name

001

002

003

250

2001

2002

4001

Branch 1: T. Jones

Branch 1: M. Davidson

Branch 2: R. Powell

When using the PBX Access Code numbering method, the relevant access code must be added before the extension number registered here.

NDSS Button Customization [Monitor PBX]

At any extension attached to a monitor PBX, customize a flexible button as an NDSS button for an extension registered above. Then go off-hook, press this button once, and go on-hook again. This activates the monitoring function. The monitored PBX will begin to transmit information about the status of that extension, and the monitor PBX will begin to receive the information. The button light will display the status of the extension connected to another PBX.

Removing or Editing a Registered Extension [Monitor PBX]

To monitor a new extension when 250 extensions are already being monitored, it is necessary to remove the registration of an existing extension.

The NDSS Monitor Release feature is used to stop monitoring a certain extension. When this feature is performed at a monitor PBX:

•

If no other PBXs are monitoring the selected extension, the monitored PBX stops transmitting status information for that extension.

•

The monitor PBX stops receiving status information for the selected extension. All NDSS buttons for that extension stop displaying status information.

However, the related information is not deleted from the Network Monitor Extensions Table. Therefore, if an extension user at a monitor PBX subsequently goes off-hook and presses the NDSS button for that extension, monitoring will be reactivated. To completely remove monitoring of an extension, the registration data must also be deleted from the Network Monitor Extensions Table at each monitor PBX.

The monitor destination of each NDSS button is determined by the registration information for a particular index number in this table. Therefore, if the registration information for an index number is changed (for example, the Network Extension Number assigned to Index No. 001 in the example above is changed from "2001" to "4002"), any NDSS buttons that have been set for that extension will automatically point to the new monitor destination.

Conditions

•

The KX-NCS4910 or KX-NCS4950 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) is required for all KX-TDE series PBXs that will monitor extensions or have extensions monitored.

•

Hardware Requirements:

If using an IP-GW4E card (KX-TDA0484), the firmware (not LPR) of the card must be version 1.2 or later.

If using a PRI23 card (KX-TDA0290), the LPR software of the card must be version 1.009 or later.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 253

13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)

•

All PBXs in the network must be KX-TDE series, KX-TDA series, or KX-NCP series PBXs. For information on the hardware requirements for KX-TDA/KX-NCP series PBXs that will monitor extensions or have extensions monitored, refer to the corresponding Feature Manual.

•

Each of Network PBX IDs 1-8 can only be assigned to one PBX within a network. Assigning the same

Network PBX ID to two PBXs will cause network data transmission problems.

•

It is only possible to assign NDSS buttons for extensions that have been previously registered in the

Network Monitor Extensions Table.

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

→

Type

→

Dial (for NDSS)

6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

→

Type

→

Dial (for NDSS)

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console

→

Type

→

Dial (for NDSS)

•

Extensions connected to one PBX can monitor a maximum of 250 extensions at other PBXs. One extension can be monitored by multiple extensions at multiple PBXs.

•

To reduce NDSS data traffic, it is recommended that 8 or less extensions in a single Incoming Call

Distribution Group be monitored.

•

Activation of an NDSS button is only required the first time that a button for a newly registered extension is created. Once an NDSS button has been activated by being pressed the first time, any further NDSS buttons for the same monitored extension will automatically display the extension status without needing to be activated.

•

To use the NDSS Monitor Release feature, an extension must be assigned as a manager.

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Manager

[511] Manager Assignment

•

Through system programming, it is possible to assign a maximum number of "hops" (transfers between

PBXs) that extension status information can travel. Each time a piece of extension status information is forwarded to another PBX, its counter is increased by one. When this counter reaches the assigned maximum, the data is discarded. This is used to prevent data from circling unnecessarily around the network.

11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission— Network Data Transmission for Centralized Operator Feature

—Data Transmission Counter

•

If it is not possible to remotely turn off transmission of extension status information using the NDSS Monitor

Release feature because of network conditions, it is possible to perform the same operation directly through system programming at the monitored PBX.

6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send

6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send

•

When using a VoIP network, if extension status information is lost by the network, in some cases an NDSS button may not be able to display the status of the relevant extension.

•

NDSS can not be used when two PBXs are networked using the Common Extension Numbering for 2

PBXs feature (

® 13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES).

PC Programming Manual References

3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Networking Data Transfer

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Manager

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

→ Type

→ Dial (for NDSS)

6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send

6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

254 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.18 Private Network Features—Network ICD Group

→ Type

→ Dial (for NDSS)

6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console

→ Type

→ Dial (for NDSS)

11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission

11.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)

11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table

PT Programming Manual References

[511] Manager Assignment

Feature Manual References

13.1.20 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES—QSIG

13.1.25 Private Network Features—VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol)

Operating Manual References

1.2.1 Making Calls

2.1.4 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection) Monitor Release

13.1.18 Private Network Features—Network ICD Group

Description

An Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group can include up to 4 destinations at other PBXs in a private network, including the floating extension number of another ICD Group. This is done by assigning a virtual PS as a

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 255

13.1.18 Private Network Features—Network ICD Group

member of the ICD Group, and then setting the number of a destination at another PBX as the forwarding destination for that virtual PS. This allows multiple ICD groups at remote locations to receive calls together.

Telephone Company

PBX-1

PBX-2

ICD

Group

Private network

ICD Group

PBX-3

ICD

Group

Virtual PS 1

Virtual PS 2

PBX-4

ICD

Group

Virtual PS 3

PBX-5

ICD

Group

Virtual PS 4

Conditions

•

The KX-NCS4910 or KX-NCS4950 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) is required for all PBXs that will support virtual PSs.

•

The conditions for 9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations also apply to this feature.

PC Programming Manual References

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— Send CLIP of CO Caller—when call is forwarded to CO

Feature Manual References

9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations

19.1.2 Virtual PS

256 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.19 Private Network Features—PS Roaming by Network ICD Group

13.1.19 Private Network Features—PS Roaming by Network ICD

Group

Description

One PS can be registered to up to 4 PBXs in a private network, and a Network ICD group created for the PS at each PBX, with virtual PSs set to forward to the other PBXs in the network. When a call to the PS is received at one of the PBXs, the call rings simultaneously at all PBXs in the network to which that PS is registered.

Telephone Company

PBX-1

PBX-2

Private network

ICD Group

Virtual PS1

PBX-3

Virtual PS2

PBX-4

Virtual PS3

Each virtual PS is set to forward calls to the extension number of the actual PS as registered at one of the other PBXs.

Then, an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group is created containing the registered PS and the virtual PSs.

When a call is received at one of the PBXs, it is forwarded to all of the other PBXs. One private network channel is used to forward an incoming call to one other PBX. Therefore, if a PS is registered at 3 other PBXs, 3 private network channels are needed to forward a single call to all of the PBXs.

Each PBX can store the current communication status of each PS (In Range or Out of Range). If the status of the PS is set to Out of Range when a call is received, the call will be refused and the private network channel will be released immediately. Since the PS can only be set to In Range at a single PBX at one time, any other

PBXs to which the call is transferred will refuse the call, releasing the VoIP or ISDN channels.

Conditions

•

The KX-NCS4910 or KX-NCS4950 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) is required for all PBXs that will support Virtual PSs.

•

If no signal is received from a PS for the preprogrammed length of time when an incoming call is received, the communication status of the PS is set to Out of Range, if enabled through system programming.

•

When a PS comes within range of a certain PBX, Out of Range status is automatically released. However, in some negative wireless network conditions, Out of Range status may not be released automatically. In

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 257

13.1.20 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES—QSIG

this case, the PS user can manually release Out of Range status by pressing the Talk key and confirming that a dial tone can be heard from the PBX.

•

If the status of a PS is set to Out of Range at all PBXs that it is registered to, the call will be redirected to the overflow destination of the ICD Group.

•

Handover from one PBX to another PBX during a conversation is not possible.

PC Programming Manual References

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— System Wireless—PS Out of Range Timer

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— System Wireless—Out of Range Registration

5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main

→ Floating Extension Number

→ Distribution Method

5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List

PT Programming Manual References

[620] Incoming Call Distribution Group Member

[622] Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number

[624] Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method

Feature Manual References

9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations

13.1.20 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES—QSIG

Description

QSIG is a protocol which is based on ISDN (Q.931) and offers enhanced PBX features in a private network.

The QSIG network supports private communications by the TIE line service method.

The following features are available for an ISDN-QSIG or VoIP private network. For ISDN, system programming is required to specify whether each feature (excluding Calling Line Identification Presentation [CLIP]) is available for each port of the private network.

[Standard Service Table]

Service

Calling Line Identification

Presentation (CLIP)

Description & Reference

Sends the caller’s number to the QSIG network when making a call.

Connected Line

Identification Presentation

(COLP)

(Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/

CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)

Sends the number of the answered party to the QSIG network when answering a call.

(Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/

CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)

258 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.20 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES—QSIG

Service

Calling Line Identification

Restriction (CLIR)

Description & Reference

Prevents the caller’s CLI being presented to the called party by the caller.

(Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/

CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)

Prevents COLP being sent by the answered party.

Connected Line

Identification Restriction

(COLR)

Calling Name Identification

Presentation (CNIP)

(Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/

CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)

Sends the caller’s name to the QSIG network when making a call.

(Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/

CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)

Sends the name of the answered party to the QSIG network when answering a call.

Connected Name

Identification Presentation

(CONP)

Calling Name Identification

Restriction (CNIR)

(Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/

CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)

Prevents the caller’s name being presented to the called party by the caller.

(Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/

CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)

Prevents CONP being sent by the answered party.

Connected Name

Identification Restriction

(CONR)

(Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/

CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)

Call Forwarding (CF)—by

QSIG

Forwards a call to the QSIG network.

® 13.1.22 Private Network Features—QSIG—CF (Call

Forwarding)

Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG

Transfers a call to the QSIG network.

Completion of Calls to Busy

Subscriber (CCBS)—by

QSIG

® 13.1.24 Private Network Features—QSIG—CT (Call Transfer)

Receives callback ringing when a busy called party on the QSIG network becomes free.

® 13.1.21 Private Network Features—QSIG—CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber)

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 259

13.1.21 Private Network Features—QSIG—CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber)

[Enhanced Service Table]

Service

Network Direct Station

Selection (NDSS)

Centralized Voice Mail

Description & Reference

Allows the extensions connected to up to seven other PBXs in a network to be monitored, as well as the transferring of calls to those extensions with one touch.

® 13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct

Station Selection)

Allows up to 8 PBXs to share the services of a VPS connected to another PBX in DPT integration. This VPS can provide voice mail for extensions attached to any of the PBXs in the network.

® 13.1.16 Private Network Features—Centralized Voice Mail

Feature Manual References

9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES

13.1.21 Private Network Features—QSIG—CCBS (Completion of

Calls to Busy Subscriber)

Description

If the call has been made to an extension in another PBX in the QSIG network and the called party is busy, an extension user can set to receive callback ringing when the called party becomes free. When the user answers the callback ringing, that party’s number is automatically dialed.

Conditions

•

This feature is available under the following conditions:

The caller’s PBX is capable of using CCBS.

The called party’s PBX is capable of accepting CCBS.

•

For ISDN, receiving and sending CCBS must be enabled individually on an ISDN (QSIG) port basis through system programming.

•

An extension user can set only one CCBS. The last setting is effective.

•

The CCBS setting is canceled if there is no callback ringing within 60 minutes or callback ringing is not answered within 10 seconds.

PC Programming Manual References

3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,

CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, E911

3.48 [1-3] Option— New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card

260 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.22 Private Network Features—QSIG—CF (Call Forwarding)

13.1.22 Private Network Features—QSIG—CF (Call Forwarding)

Description

The PBX forwards the call to a destination extension in another PBX in the QSIG network. The destination can be set on your own PBX on an extension basis as the forward destination of CO line calls (

® 6.1.6 FWD (Call

Forwarding)).

If the same trunk group is used for the incoming call and the forwarded call, the following situation will be possible.

[Example]

PBX-1

QSIG

Call to 2000

Forwarded to 1001

PBX-2

Extension 1000 of PBX-1 dials extension number "2000", and the call is sent to extension "2000" of PBX-2 through QSIG network.

The call is forwarded to the forward destination of CO line calls of extension

2000, which is extension "1001" of

PBX-1.

Extn. 1000 Extn. 1001

Dials "2000".

Extn. 2000

(Forward Destination

of CO Line Calls: 1001)

The call between PBX-1 and PBX-2 is released, and the call is connected directly to the forward destination of extension 2000.

QSIG

PBX-1

PBX-2

Extn. 1000 Extn. 1001 Extn. 2000

Conditions

•

This feature can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN (QSIG) port of the PBX.

PC Programming Manual References

3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,

CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, E911

3.48 [1-3] Option— New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 261

13.1.23 Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP (Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/

CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)

Operating Manual References

1.3.29 FWD (Call Forwarding)

13.1.23 Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP (Calling/

Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/CONP

(Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)

Description

Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) and Calling Name Identification Presentation

(CNIP):

The PBX can send a preprogrammed extension number and/or name to the QSIG network when an extension user makes a call. The called party can see the number and/or name on his telephone display before answering the call.

Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP) and Connected Name Identification

Presentation (CONP):

The PBX sends a preprogrammed extension number and/or name to the QSIG network when the extension user answers an incoming call. The caller can see the number and/or name of the answering party on his telephone display when the call is answered.

[CLIP/CNIP Example]

1) Dials "202".

2) "John

101"

is displayed.

PBX-1

CLIP: 101

CNIP: John

PBX-2

Caller

(Extn. No.: 101

Extn. Name: John)

[COLP/CONP Example]

1) Dials "203".

Called party

(Extn. No.: 202)

PBX-1 PBX-2

Called party

(Extn. No.: 203

Extn. Name: Tom)

FWD, IRNA, etc.

Caller

3) "Paul

204"

is displayed.

COLP: 204

CONP: Paul

Answering party

(Extn. No.: 204

Extn. Name: Paul)

2) Answers the call.

CLIP/COLP Number:

The extension number sent to the QSIG network for CLIP/COLP can be assigned for each extension through system programming.

262 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.23 Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP (Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/

CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)

CNIP/CONP Name:

The extension name sent to the QSIG network for CNIP/CONP can be assigned for each extension through system programming.

Calling/Connected Line Identification Restriction (CLIR/COLR):

It is possible for each extension to restrict the sending of its extension number to the QSIG network by pressing the CLIR button, COLR button, or entering the feature number.

Calling Name Identification Restriction (CNIR) and Connected Name Identification Restriction

(CONR)

It is possible for each extension to restrict the sending of its extension name to the QSIG network. When CLIR is activated, CNIR becomes active automatically. When COLR is activated, CONR becomes active automatically.

Conditions

•

COLP/CLIR/COLR/CNIP/CONP/CNIR/CONR Assignment for Each Port

Each service can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN (QSIG) port of the PBX.

•

CLIR Button and COLR Button

It is possible to switch between CLIP and CLIR by pressing the CLIR button, and COLP and COLR by pressing the COLR button. A flexible button can be customized as the CLIR or COLR button.

PC Programming Manual References

3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,

CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, E911

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features

→ COLR Set / Cancel

→ CLIR Set / Cancel

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main

→ Extension Number

→ Extension Name

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main

→ Extension Number

→ Extension Name

PT Programming Manual References

[003] Extension Number

[004] Extension Name

Feature Manual References

® 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)) or TIE line service programming

Operating Manual References

1.3.52 Private Network Features—CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)

1.3.53 Private Network Features—CLIR (Calling Line Identification Restriction)

1.3.55 Private Network Features—COLR (Connected Line Identification Restriction)

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 263

13.1.24 Private Network Features—QSIG—CT (Call Transfer)

13.1.24 Private Network Features—QSIG—CT (Call Transfer)

Description

The PBX transfers the call to a destination extension in another PBX in the QSIG network.

If the same trunk group is used for the incoming call and the transferred call, the following situation will be possible.

[Example]

PBX-1

QSIG

PBX-2

Extension 1000 of PBX-1 dials extension number "2000", and the call is sent to extension "2000" of PBX-2 through QSIG network.

1 Call to 2000

The call is transferred from extension

2000 to extension "1001" of PBX-1.

2 Transferred to 1001

The call between PBX-1 and PBX-2 is released, and the call is connected directly to the transfer destination of extension 2000.

Extn. 2000 Extn. 1000 Extn. 1001

Dials "2000".

QSIG

PBX-1

PBX-2

Extn. 1000 Extn. 1001 Extn. 2000

Conditions

•

This feature can be enabled or disabled on an ISDN (QSIG) port basis.

•

Call Transfer with Announcement and Call Transfer without Announcement is possible (

® 3.1.10 Call

Transfer).

PC Programming Manual References

3.33 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,

CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, E911

3.38 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway— QSIG-CT

3.48 [1-3] Option— New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card

264 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.25 Private Network Features—VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol)

Operating Manual References

1.3.11 Call Transfer

13.1.25 Private Network Features—VoIP (Voice over Internet

Protocol)

Description

The PBX can connect to another PBX via a private IP network. In this case, voice signals are converted into

IP packets (VoIP) and sent through this network.

VoIP networks support private network communications using TIE line service.

[Example]

Extn.1000

Extn.1999

Dials "2999".

Telephone Company

TRG 1

PBX-1

IP-GW

Router

TRG 2

Private IP

Network

PBX-2

Router

IP-GW

PBX-3

Router

IP-GW

Extn.2000

Extn.2999

Extn.3000

Extn.3999

Required Programming

•

PBX

For making a call:

ARS programming (

For receiving a call:

TIE line service programming

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 265

13.1.25 Private Network Features—VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol)

[TIE Line Routing and Modification Table]

Priority 1

Location

No.

Leading

No.

TRG

2 (VoIP port)

Dial Modification

Removed

No. of

Digits

Added

No.

: :

TRG

Priority 2

Dial Modification

Removed

No. of

Digits

Added

No.

. .

: : :

. .

. .

[Explanation]

Calls to destinations with leading number "2" or "3" are automatically routed through the VoIP ports, designated as trunk group 2.

•

IP-GW

IP address assignment for the local PBX and other PBXs.

[Programming Example]

Destination

Leading No.

IP Address

200.45.11.35

199.176.64.1

[Explanation]

Calls are routed to the IP address of each IP-GW card based on the leading number dialed.

Gateway Groups

It is possible to automatically reroute outgoing VoIP calls according to preassigned gateway groups.

A gateway device can be assigned a gateway group number based on its IP Address. When a call is made using a leading number allocated to a gateway group, it is routed to the lowest-numbered available device within that group. In other words, if the lowest-numbered device is busy or not available, the call slides to the next available device.

266 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.25 Private Network Features—VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol)

[Example]

Gateway Settings List

1. IP-GW(1): GW Group-1

2. IP-GW(2): GW Group-1

3. IP-GW(3): GW Group-2

4. IP-GW(4): GW Group-2

Leading Number

List

1. 1xx: GW Group-1

2. 2xx: GW Group-2

Dials "123XXX"

Busy

Office A (GW Group-1)

PBX-2

IP-GW(1)

IP-GW(2)

PBX-1

V-IPGW

Private IP

Network

Rerouted

Office B (GW Group-2)

PBX-3

IP-GW(3)

IP-GW(4)

When "123XXX" is dialed, the call is routed to GW Group-1. However the lowest-numbered device (IP-GW(1)) is busy or not available, so the call is rerouted to IP-GW(2).

Note

For information about assigning groups when using the IP-GW card, refer to the Programming Guide of the VoIP Gateway Card.

Common Extension Numbering for Multiple PBXs

Multiple PBXs in separate locations, connected in an IP network, can share a common block of extensions designated in a gateway group.

2) Ext. 105 not found in PBX B

PBX B in Office B

Ext. 102

V-IPGW

Ext. 202

Ext. 203

3) Rerouted

1) Ext. 105 dialed

PBX A in Office A

Ext. 101

Ext. 103

Ext. 104

V-IPGW

Private IP

Network

V-IPGW

PBX C in Office C

Ext. 105

Ext. 201

Ext. 303

4) Check next PBX in

Gateway Group settings

5) Ext. 105 found in PBX C

Explanation:

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 267

13.1.25 Private Network Features—VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol)

In the same way as when connected by a TIE Line, if a dialed number is not found at the local PBX, the call can be sent to other PBXs connected via an IP network. When an extension number is dialed, the PBX first searches local extensions for a matching number. If there is no match, the PBX then checks the TIE Line

Routing Table for the Gateway Group for a corresponding entry. If an entry is found, the call is sent to the connected PBX.

Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public CO Lines

When a VoIP call cannot be completed successfully, the PBX can automatically attempt to make the call using a public CO line instead. This provides a backup method of making calls in cases when IP network transmission cannot be completed successfully.

[Example]

Telephone Company

(area code: 222)

Telephone Company

(area code: 333)

Extn.1000

PBX-1

1-333-123-1011

IP-GW

Private IP

Network

PBX-2

IP-GW

Extn.1011

(333-123-1011)

Dials

"7-20-1011".

PBX code: 30 PBX code: 20

The leading numbers of extensions accessed through the VoIP network are added as entries to the Quick

Dialing table, in addition to being registered as Other PBX Extension Numbers, as shown below:

[Programming Example]

Number to dial to call an extension at another PBX using VoIP network:

7 (TIE line access number) + 20 (PBX Code) + 1011 (extension number)

Number to dial to call that extension using a public CO line:

9 (CO line access number) + 1-333-123-1011

[Quick Dialing Table]

Quick Dialing No.

720

Destination No.

91333123

If the call cannot be completed using the VoIP network, and the dialed leading number is found in the Quick

Dialing Table, the call will be automatically rerouted to a CO line and as specified by the corresponding destination number.

When a call is made using the VoIP network, if the PBX does not receive a reply from the other PBX within about 4 seconds of making the call, or an error is returned, the call is rerouted to a public CO line as specified.

Sending Faxes Through the Network

Through system programming, it is possible to select whether faxes are sent using analog or T.38 protocol signals.

Conditions

[General]

•

Some QSIG services are available. (

® 13.1.20 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES—QSIG)

•

Toll Restriction (TRS) settings apply to calls rerouted to public CO lines.

268 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.26 PS Connection

[Common Extension Numbering for Multiple PBXs]

•

The KX-NCS4910 or KX-NCS4950 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) is required to use this feature.

•

System programming is required to enable this feature.

•

If the called extension does not exist at the called PBX, the next PBX in the same gateway group is called automatically.

•

The Routing to Operator setting in system programming must be disabled to use this feature.

•

To use this feature, all PBXs in the IP network have to be KX-TDE series PBXs, version 3.0000 or later.

Installation Manual References

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

3.4.1 Virtual Cards

3.5.5 IP-GW4E Card (KX-TDA0484)

3.5.6 IP-GW16 Card (KX-TDA0490)

KX-TDE600

3.4.1 Virtual Cards

3.7.5 IP-GW4E Card (KX-TDA0484)

3.7.6 IP-GW16 Card (KX-TDA0490)

PC Programming Manual References

3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port

3.39 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port

4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial— Use quick dial for rerouting to public CO when TIE line does not work

11.1 [9-1] TIE Table

12.6 [10-4] Miscellaneous— Intercept—Routing to Operator - No Destination (Destination is not programmed.)

Feature Manual References

® 13.1.29 PS Ring Group). A PS ring group is a way for

13.1.26 PS Connection

Description

A Panasonic portable station (PS) can be used in place of a proprietary telephone (PT), providing wireless access to PBX features and call handling.

Cell Stations (CSs) allow PSs to receive reception within a designated area.

Registration

Before a PS can be used, it must be registered with the PBX through system programming and assigned an extension number.

® 3.47 [1-2] Portable Station—PS Registration and De-registration— Registration

® [690] PS Registration

Because a PS transmits radio waves, it is possible that a PS belonging to a neighboring PBX can be registered to your PBX. To prevent this sort of unauthorized registration, a personal identification number

(PIN) can be programmed for this PBX that must be entered on the PS during registration. This PIN, if programmed, is only used during the PS registration process.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 269

13.1.26 PS Connection

® 3.47 [1-2] Portable Station—PS Registration and De-registration— Personal Identification Number

® [691] PS Termination

Each PS can be registered to more than one PBX if necessary, and registration can be canceled if a PS will no longer be used with one of these PBXs.

® 3.47 [1-2] Portable Station—PS Registration and De-registration— De-registration

® [692] Personal Identification Number (PIN) for PS Registration

Connection

There are two ways a PS can be used.

As an Extension

A PS is assigned its own extension number when it is registered to a PBX. The PS can use this extension number to make and receive calls, just as a wired telephone can. A PS can be a member of an incoming call distribution (ICD) group, can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls, etc., just as a wired telephone can.

A PS can also be a member of a PS ring group (

several PSs to be notified of an incoming call simultaneously, but does not offer all of the features provided by an ICD group. (

In Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

A PS can share an extension number with a wired telephone, allowing extension users to use their PSs when they are away from their desks to answer or make calls as if they were using their wired telephones.

(

Mail DPT (Digital) Integration)

PS Interaction with CS

Each PS communicates with the PBX wirelessly through a cell station (CS). Each CS is connected to the

PBX and sends and receives radio waves to and from different PSs within its range, using different channels for different PSs. Each CS has three channels, i.e., up to three calls (conversations) can be handled simultaneously by one CS.

A PS must be within range of a CS in order to be used, however, multiple CSs can be used with the same

PBX to offer a greater area of wireless coverage. Additionally, a PS does not need to be used with a specific

CS; any PS can communicate with any CS provided the PS is registered to the PBX, and provided the CS has at least one channel available.

Handover

If a PS is within range of more than one CS, the PS will communicate with the CS which has the greatest signal strength and an available channel. When a PS user moves out of range of one CS and moves in range of another CS, the PS will "hand over" its communications to the new CS. Handover is possible when:

The PS is on an intercom call or on a call with an outside party. (The call will not be disconnected during the handover.)

A call is ringing at the PS. (The call will continue to ring after the handover.)

The PS is in idle status (i.e., waiting to receive calls).

[Example of Handover]

CS-1 CS-2 CS-1 CS-2

Moving

Handover

Call is not disconnected

Handover is not possible when the PS is:

270 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.27 PS Directory a.

Not within range of another CS.

Within range of another CS but that CS is busy.

Screening a call via Live Call Screening (LCS) or recording a call via Two-way Record (

® 19.1.4 Voice

Paging other extensions. (

® 13.1.1 Paging)

On a doorphone call.

Dialing digits to make a CO line call.

On a call with an extension which is recording the conversation via PC Console or PC Phone.

IP Cell Station

The IP Cell Station Unit (IP-CS) can be connected to a PBX via a LAN. The IP-CS supports existing DECT 6.0

Portable Stations (PSs) with the same features as using a traditional CS. The IP-CS allows for easy and cost-saving installation using an existing IP network infrastructure.

The IP-CS provides the following:

–

Wireless systems using a converged voice and data network infrastructure.

–

Wireless branch offices and wireless solutions by long distance installation on larger premises.

–

Reliable wireless communication using DECT 6.0 technology over an IP network.

For more information about IP-CSs, refer to the IP-CS Quick Installation Guide.

Conditions

•

If every CS that a PS is in range of is busy when that PS is called, the call will not be connected and the caller will hear a busy tone.

•

For more information about connecting PSs to CSs, see the Quick Installation Guide for the relevant CS.

•

The number of digits allowed for a PS extension number is determined by the PS model. See your PS documentation for details.

PC Programming Manual References

3.47 [1-2] Portable Station

PT Programming Manual References

[690] PS Registration

[691] PS Termination

[692] Personal Identification Number (PIN) for PS Registration

Feature Manual References

® 6.1.3 Flexible Buttons)

13.1.27 PS Directory

Description

A portable station (PS) user can make a call or access PBX features using information stored in the PS and

PBX.

Refer to the Operating Instructions supplied with your PS for available directories and usage.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 271

13.1.29 PS Ring Group

Directory Type Description

PS Dialing Directory

A list of names and telephone numbers. Used to make a call to one of the stored parties.

Quick Dialing

System Speed

Dialing Directory

PBX Extension

Dialing Directory

A list of frequently dialed feature numbers as well as names and telephone numbers. Used to quickly access one of the stored features, or quickly make a call to one of the stored parties.

A system-wide list of names and telephone numbers.

Used to make a call to one of the stored parties.

A system-wide list of extension names. Used to make a call to one of the stored extensions.

Programming

Stored in the PS by the

PS user.

Stored in the PS by the

PS user.

Stored in the PBX.

PC Programming Manual References

8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

→ Name

→ CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Name

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Name

PT Programming Manual References

[001] System Speed Dialing Number

[002] System Speed Dialing Name

[004] Extension Name

13.1.28 PS Feature Buttons

Description

Although a portable station (PS) does not feature as many buttons as a proprietary telephone (PT), a PS can be customized to give a PS user access to PBX features, just as the flexible buttons on a PT can be customized.

(

13.1.29 PS Ring Group

Description

A PS ring group is a way for several portable stations (PSs) to be notified of an incoming call simultaneously, while using only one channel of a cell station (CS).

Normally when a PS receives a call, one channel of a CS is used to ring the PS (

® 13.1.26 PS Connection).

If several PSs are members of an incoming call distribution (ICD) group, the available channels of a CS will become busy just by ringing each PS. Assigning a group of PSs to a PS ring group alleviates this strain on the

CS because only one channel is needed to ring a PS ring group’s members.

PS ring group members and related parameters are assigned through system programming, as explained below.

Floating Extension Number: When this number is called, all PSs in the group ring.

272 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.29 PS Ring Group b.

Group Name: Can be displayed on a ringing PS to indicate that the incoming CO line call is a group call, and not a call directed to the PS’s extension number. This is only available when Incoming CO Line Call

Information Display is set to "Called Number".

Incoming CO Line Call Information Display: Determines which information is shown on the PS display when a group call is received. Select "Caller ID" to display the caller’s telephone number or name, or "Called Number" to display the name of the PS ring group which is receiving the call.

Member PSs: Select each PS that will be a member of the corresponding PS ring group. Note that a PS can belong to more than one PS ring group.

[Programming Example: PS Ring Group]

Floating Extension No.

Group Name

Incoming CO Line

Information Display

PS 1

PS 2

PS 3

PS 4

PS 5

PS 6

PS 7

PS 8

PS Ring Group 1 PS Ring Group 2 PS Ring Group 3

301 302 303

Sales 1 Sales 2 Customer Service

Caller ID Called Number Caller ID

PS Ring Group Member

[Example of PS Ring Groups 1 and 2]

PS Ring Group 1

Floating Extension No. 301

Name: Sales 1

PS Ring Group 2

Floating Extension No. 302

Name: Sales 2

PS 1

Extn. 601

PS 2

Extn. 602

PS 3

Extn. 603

PS 4

Extn. 701

PS 5

Extn. 702

Explanation:

PS Ring Group 1

PS 1, PS 2, and PS 3 will ring simultaneously when a call is directed to floating extension number 301, and, in the case of a CO line call, will display the Caller ID information for the call.

These PSs will ring individually when a call is directed to their assigned extension numbers (programming not shown here).

PS Ring Group 2

PS 3, PS 4, and PS 5 will ring simultaneously when a call is directed to floating extension number 302, and, in the case of a CO line call, will display "Sales 2".

These PSs will ring individually when a call is directed to their assigned extension numbers (programming not shown here).

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 273

13.1.29 PS Ring Group

ICD Groups vs. PS Ring Groups

Assigning PSs to either an ICD group or a PS ring group will allow multiple PSs to receive group calls simultaneously. The differences between the two are highlighted below:

Features

Members can ring simultaneously when a call is received

Calls can be distributed to member extensions using different methods

The CS is less likely to be busy; ringing all member PSs uses only one CS channel

Members can log-in, log-out, and use Wrap-up time, ICD

Group button

Both PTs and PSs can belong to the same group

Each member can belong to more than one group

Calls can wait in a queue if they cannot be answered

PS Ring Group ICD Group

[Example of CS Channels Used for PS Ring Group Calls and ICD Group Calls]

PS Ring Group

Member

ICD Group

Member

PS Ring Group

Member

PS Ring Group

Member

ICD Group

Member

ICD Group

Member

Incoming call

PS Ring Group ICD Group

ICD Group

Member

PS Ring Group

Member

PS Ring Group

Member

ICD Group

Member

ICD Group

Member

PS Ring Group

Member

ICD Group

Member

Explanation:

The PS ring group has six members which are in range of two different CSs. When a call arrives, each CS uses one channel to ring all member PSs within its range.

The ICD group has one proprietary telephone (PT) member, as well as six PS members which are in range of two different CSs. When a call arrives, each CS uses three channels to ring each of the member PSs within its range.

274 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

13.1.29 PS Ring Group

Conditions

•

A maximum of 32 PS ring groups can be programmed.

•

Each member of a PS ring group must be a PS, but each member does not need to be in range of the same CS. When a call is directed to a PS ring group, all CSs connected to the PBX will try to ring members of the group.

•

PS ring groups do not have Log-in or Log-out features. There is no way for a PS to log-in to or log-out from a PS ring group.

•

A PS ring group may be assigned as a member of an ICD group, but the PS ring group cannot log-in to or log-out from an ICD group. The PS ring group (and therefore its members) will always be logged-in.

•

When a PS is assigned to a PS ring group, the following settings are used if it receives a call directly, but are disregarded when it receives a group call:

Delayed Ringing (All PSs will ring simultaneously.)

The incoming call display preference assigned to the PS through system programming.

Features set on the PS, such as Call Forwarding (FWD). Note, however, that if a PS user has set Do

Not Disturb (DND), that PS will not ring for group calls either.

•

When a call is directed to a PS ring group, the PBX will try to ring the group’s members regardless of whether or not they are already on another call. If all members of a PS ring group are busy when the group is called, their PSs will not ring but the caller will hear a ringback tone.

•

A PS ring group will only ring one call at a time on its member PSs. If a PS ring group is ringing one call when another call is directed to the group, the group will appear busy to the caller. If a call is directed to a specific PS within the group in this situation and the PS is available to answer calls, the PS will ring as usual.

•

The PBX will ring calls for only two PS ring groups at a time. In other words, if two calls directed to two different PS ring groups are ringing, no other PS ring group calls will ring until one of the other ringing calls is answered.

•

If a PS in a PS ring group has set the DND feature for CO line calls, the PS will not ring for CO line calls as well as intercom calls directed to the group.

•

Compatible PSs

The following PSs can be assigned to PS ring groups:

–

KX-TD7680

–

KX-TD7684

–

KX-TD7685

–

KX-TD7690

–

KX-TD7694

–

KX-TD7695

PC Programming Manual References

5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main— Distribution Method

5.24 [3-9] PS Ring Group

5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List

PT Programming Manual References

[620] Incoming Call Distribution Group Member

Feature Manual References

9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES

® 13.1.3 Password Security)

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 275

13.1.30 PT Programming

13.1.30 PT Programming

Description

A proprietary telephone (PT) can be used to customize the settings of the PBX or of an extension, using the following programming features:

Programming

Type

Description Example

Authorized

Programmer

Extension user

Personal

Programming

System

Programming

Manager

Programming

Used by an extension user to customize the extension’s settings.

Used by an authorized party to customize the PBX.

Used by an extension assigned as a manager to customize the current state of an extension, or to grant special privileges temporarily to an extension user.

PT Display Language,

Call Waiting Tone, etc.

Intercept Destination,

ARS Mode, Date and

Time, etc.

Switching the current time mode, Remote

Extension Dial Lock,

Remote PIN Clear, etc.

Authorized administrator or extension user

Extension assigned as a manager

Conditions

•

Class of Service (COS) programming determines the level of programming an extension user is authorized to perform:

–

System programming and personal programming

–

Personal programming only

–

No programming may be performed

•

The extension which is connected to the lowest numbered port on the card installed in the lowest numbered slot can perform both personal programming and system programming regardless of the extension’s COS.

•

COS programming determines which extensions are manager extensions and can therefore perform manager programming.

•

During programming, the PT is considered to be busy and will not receive calls.

•

Only one system programming (including PC programming) or manager programming session is permitted at a time, i.e., these two programming features cannot be performed simultaneously by two users. The maximum number of simultaneous programmers that each PBX supports is as follows:

– one system programmer + 63 personal programmers

– one manager programmer + 63 personal programmers

–

64 personal programmers

•

System Programming Password Level

To access system programming, a valid password must be entered. (

•

Personal Programming Data Reset

A PT user can return settings made through personal programming (Preferred Line Assignment, Live Call

Screening Mode, etc.) to their default settings all at once.

PC Programming Manual References

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Programming Mode Level

13.1 [11-1] Main—Password

→ System Password - PT Programming—Prog ** : User Level

→ System Password - PT Programming—Prog *# : Administrator Level

→ Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1

276 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

PT Programming Manual References

2.1 PT Programming

[516] Programming Mode Limitation

Feature Manual References

11.1.1 Manager Features

® 6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering)

Operating Manual References

3.1 Personal Programming

3.2 Manager Programming

3.3 System Programming

13.1.30 PT Programming

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 277

13.1.30 PT Programming

278 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Section 14 Features and Configurations—Q

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 279

14.1.2 Quick Setup

14.1 Q

14.1.1 Quick Dialing

Description

An extension user can make a call or access a feature easily. This is enabled by storing the number (extension number, telephone number, or feature number etc.) for Quick Dialing.

Quick Dialing is convenient in situations such as the following:

–

Room service calls in a hotel

–

Calling your company’s headquarters via the public network. Extension users can think of the Quick Dialing number as an extension number.

[Programming Example: Quick Dialing]

Location No.

Quick Dialing No.

Quick Dialing 01 110

Quick Dialing 02 5

Desired Number

9110 (CO Line Call)

3016 (Room Service)

Quick Dialing 03 2011 90123456789 (Headquarters)

Conditions

•

Quick Dialing numbers follow the flexible numbering plan.

(

PC Programming Manual References

4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial

Feature Manual References

13.1.3 Password Security), for the first time (i.e., accessed after the PBX’s settings have been initialized or

Operating Manual References

1.3.57 Quick Dialing

14.1.2 Quick Setup

Description

Basic PBX parameters can be programmed the first time the PBX is accessed with a PC using the Maintenance

Console software.

When the PBX is accessed with the Installer Level Programmer Code and default password (

when the PBX’s settings are still set to their default values), Quick Setup will launch automatically. From here the following basic parameters can be programmed as desired:

280 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

14.1.2 Quick Setup

Item

Date & Time Set

Parameter

Year/Month/Date/Hour/

Minute

4–10 characters

Description

The date and time set on the PC can be used by default.

System Password for Installer

Manager Extension and Operator

Flexible Numbering

—Feature

Extension Number

Pattern 1

(with )

Pattern 2

(without )

Enter the system password for installer (

13.1.3 Password Security).

Assign an extension as a manager extension (

11.1.1 Manager Features) and an extension as a PBX

operator (

® 12.1.5 Operator Features).

Select whether or not the prefix " " must be entered before dialing feature numbers.

[Example] Call Pickup feature number

Pattern 1 (with ): 41

Pattern 2 (without ): 41

Note that certain feature numbers (Line Access numbers, Operator Call, etc.) never need this prefix.

For a list of the default flexible numbers, refer to the

[Flexible Numbering Table (available while a dial tone is heard)] (

® 6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed

Numbering).

Determines the number from which default extension numbers begin.

Flexible Numbering

—Extension

KX-TDE100/

KX-TDE200:

From 101/from 201

KX-TDE600:

From 1001/from 2001

0/9

Flexible Numbering

—Operator

Flexible Numbering

—CO Access

DHCP Client

0/1/9

Enable/Disable

The feature number for Operator Call can be selected.

The feature number for Idle Line Access can be selected.

Determines whether to use a DHCP server to assign IP address information automatically or not.

Manually enter the LAN information when not using a

DHCP server.

LAN Connection

•

IP Address for

IPCMPR/IPCEMPR

Card

•

IP Address for

VoIP-DSP

•

Subnet Mask

•

Default Gateway

–

Virtual Card

Select whether to install a V-IPEXT, V-SIPEXT, or

V-SIPGW card.

*1 If the DHCP Client setting is set to Enable, this parameter can not be set.

Note that the programmable items may vary depending on the version of Maintenance Console being used.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 281

14.1.2 Quick Setup

282 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Section 15 Features and Configurations—R

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 283

15.1.1 Redial, Last Number

15.1 R

15.1.1 Redial, Last Number

Description

Every extension automatically saves the last external telephone number dialed, allowing the same number to be dialed again.

Outgoing Call Log

Information on outgoing CO line calls is automatically logged at each extension. Users of display PTs can view details of a preset number of recently dialed telephone numbers, and easily call the same outside party again.

Automatic Redial

If Last Number Redial is performed in hands-free mode and the called party is busy, the number will be automatically redialed a preprogrammed number of times.

This feature is available only on certain proprietary telephone (PT) models which have the SP-PHONE button.

Conditions

•

Memorized telephone numbers are replaced by new ones.

•

Interrupt Redial

When an outside party or seized CO line is busy, a user can attempt to redial the number by pressing the

REDIAL button without going on-hook. This can be performed several times without having to go on-hook.

•

Outgoing Call Log Display by REDIAL Button

The REDIAL button can be programmed through system programming to display the Outgoing Call Log.

This feature is available for display PT users while on-hook.

•

If the Outgoing Call Log is used to redial an outside party, or a number already stored in the Outgoing Call

Log is manually redialed again, the number will be stored in the call log multiple times. However, calls made using the REDIAL button are not stored in the Outgoing Call Log again.

•

It is possible to change the number of records that can be stored at each extension through system programming.

•

Automatic Redial is canceled if any dialing operations are performed, an incoming call is answered during

Automatic Redial, or the Redial Call No Answer Ring Time is expires.

The Redial Call No Answer Ring time is programmable.

•

Automatic Redial is only available for calls that are dialed using a PRI line.

PC Programming Manual References

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone

→ Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter

→ Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration

→ Automatic Redial—Analog CO Mute / Busy Detection Timer

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Redial

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 2

→ Redial—Automatic Redial when No Answer (ISDN)

→ Redial—Save Dial After Connection to Redial Memory

→ Redial—Call Log by Redial key

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7— Outgoing Call Log Memory

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— Outgoing Call Log Memory

284 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

15.1.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

PT Programming Manual References

[205] Automatic Redial Repeat Times

Feature Manual References

Operating Manual References

1.3.58 Redial, Last Number

1.4.1 Call Log, Incoming

15.1.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection

Description

It is possible to select the type of ring tone pattern that arrives at an extension for each type of incoming call, etc.

[Ring Tone Patterns]

1 280 ms

Single

Double

Triple

S-Double

* The duration of a ring tone may vary by country/area.

[Ring Tone Pattern Table]

The ring tone pattern table is categorized into three parts, each containing a specified number of pattern plans.

The ring tone pattern table is categorized as follows:

•

Incoming CO Line Calls: each pattern plan can assign a ring tone pattern for each trunk group.

4.15 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO

•

Incoming Doorphone Calls: each pattern plan can assign a ring tone pattern for each doorphone.

4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone

•

Others: each pattern plan can assign a ring tone pattern for incoming intercom calls as well as ring tones assigned to certain features (e.g., timed reminder).

4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others

The ring tone patterns that arrive at an extension are determined by the pattern plan that is assigned to that extension through system programming.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 285

15.1.3 Room Status Control

[Programming Example of Ring Tone Pattern Table]

Table

No.

Intercom

Call/Hold

Recall

Double

CO Line Call/Hold

Recall

TRG1

TRG

...

Doorphone Call

Port 1

Port

...

Single Single

Single

Double

: : :

Double

: : :

Timed

Reminder

Call

Back

LCS

External

Sensor

: : :

Conditions

•

"PT Ring Off Setting" can be enabled or disabled through system programming. If disabled, PT users cannot turn incoming call ringing off for their extension.

•

For the S-CO, G-CO, L-CO, ICD Group, INTERCOM, PDN and SDN buttons, one of 30 ring tones can be assigned through personal programming.

PC Programming Manual References

4.15 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO— Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone— Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others— Extension—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 1— PT Operation—PT Ring Off Setting

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings

→Option 1— Ring Pattern Table

→Option 6— ICM Tone

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop

CO, Single CO, Group CO, G-DN, SDN)

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group

CO, G-DN, SDN)

Feature Manual References

5.1.4 Extension Dial Lock

Operating Manual References

3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons

15.1.3 Room Status Control

Description

A proprietary telephone (PT) with a 6-line display designated as the hotel operator extension can be used to view and set the Check-in/Check-out/Cleaned-up (Ready or Not Ready) status of guest rooms associated with extensions.

Any wired extension can be used as a room extension without special programming.

Flexible buttons on the hotel operator’s extension can be set as Room Status Control buttons. The 3 types of

Room Status Control buttons are as follows:

286 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

15.1.3 Room Status Control

•

Check-in

Switches the status of selected room extensions from Check-out to Check-in.

Remote Extension Dial Lock is turned off, allowing calls to be made from the extension.

•

Check-out

Switches the status of selected room extensions from Check-in to Check-out.

Room extension data, such as Timed Reminder or Last Number Redial data, is cleared, and Remote

Extension Dial Lock is turned on, restricting some calls. This can be useful to prevent the room extension from being used when no guest is checked in.

•

Cleaned-up

Switches the status of selected room extensions between Ready and Not Ready.

When a guest checks out of a room, the room status becomes Checked-out and Not Ready. After the room has been cleaned, the status can be changed to Checked-out and Ready using this button. It is also possible to change the status back to Checked-out and Not Ready if necessary.

Room Status Control Mode

Pressing a Room Status Control button when the PT is idle allows the hotel operator extension to enter Room

Status Control mode. When in Room Status Control mode, the corresponding Room Status Control button’s light flashes red. The Room Status Control button that was pressed determines which room status each room extension can be switched to. For example, if the Check-in button was pressed, the Check-in button’s light flashes red and the hotel operator can select which room extensions to check-in.

In addition, DSS buttons on the hotel operator’s extension or a paired DSS Console show the room status of each extension as follows:

Light Pattern

Off

Flashing Red

Red on

Status

Checked-out and Ready

Checked-out and Not Ready

Checked-in

[Example Use: Checked-in Mode]

DSS button

Room101

Room102

Room103

Room104

Room105

Rooms 101 and 103 are currently in checked-in status.

Check-in button

Check-out button

Cleaned-up button

When in Room Status Control mode, the hotel operator’s extension is treated as a busy extension, similar to when performing PT programming. Callers to that extension will hear a busy tone.

All other operations, including pressing other Room Status Control buttons, will be ignored. In addition, the lights of fixed and flexible buttons do not show their normal display pattern. In order to perform other operations, the hotel operator must exit Room Status Control mode.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 287

15.1.3 Room Status Control

Conditions

•

SVM voice messages and messages left on the extension’s Voice Mail (VM) will be cleared at Check-out.

•

A maximum of four hotel operators can be assigned.

•

Only one of each type of Room Status Control button can be assigned.

•

Extensions associated with rooms must be one of the following types:

PT (including IP-PT), SLT, T1-OPX

PSs cannot be checked in and out as room extensions.

•

When using extensions to represent guest rooms, it is recommended to set the extension number of a room extension is the same as the room number, for convenience.

•

If enabled through system programming, check-in and check-out information is recorded by SMDR.

PC Programming Manual References

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Type

8.2 [6-2] Hotel—Main— Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4

Feature Manual References

15.1.1 Redial, Last Number

17.1.4 Timed Reminder

Operating Manual References

1.3.59 Room Status Control

288 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Section 16 Features and Configurations—S

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 289

16.1.1 Self Labeling (KX-NT366 only)

16.1 S

16.1.1 Self Labeling (KX-NT366 only)

Description

The KX-NT366 IP-PT features 12 flexible buttons, with an LCD screen next to the buttons. Each item can be named on the LCD screen through personal/system programming to reflect the function of its corresponding flexible button. Additionally, the flexible buttons can be organized into 4 "pages", allowing you to assign a total of 48 items to the 12 flexible buttons. You can toggle between pages by pressing the NEXT PAGE key, as follows:

CO 12

CO 11

CO 10

CO 09

CO 08

CO 07

CO 06

CO 05

CO 04

CO 03

CO 02

CO 01

Bank

Home

London offc.

NY offc.

Sales

Chris Walace

Andre Romel

Sean Carter

Keith Murray

Log-in/out

LCS

CO 13

NEXT PAGE is pressed

Conditions

•

Up to 12 characters can be assigned to the LCD of each flexible button through personal/system programming.

•

When an incoming CO line call is answered or a CO line is seized, the corresponding CO button will turn

Green and the LCD display will switch to the page that the corresponding CO button is registered in.

•

It is not recommended to assign the System Alarm button when using this feature, because if an alarm occurs when the System Alarm button is not on the visible page, the alarm will not be noticed.

PC Programming Manual References

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Label Name

290 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Feature Manual References

For information about SIP extension compatibility with feature numbers, see 6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed

Operating Manual References

1.3.60 Self Labeling (KX-NT366 only)

16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

Description

This PBX supports the connection of SIP supported IP telephones (hardphones and softphones). SIP extensions make and receive calls using Internet Protocol (IP).

Numbering.

Below are some of the features supported by SIP extensions:

–

Account Code Entry (

® 1.1.2 Account Code Entry)

–

Automatic Route Selection (ARS) (

–

Call Forwarding (FWD) (

–

Call Hold (

® 3.1.4 Call Hold)

–

Call Transfer with Announcement (

–

Conference

(

® 3.1.18 Conference)

–

Direct Inward System Access (DISA) (

–

Doorphone Call (

–

Emergency Call (

® 5.1.2 Emergency Call)

–

Idle Line Access (

® 12.1.5 Operator Features)

–

Operator Call (

–

Personal Speed Dialing (

® 16.1.6 Speed Dialing, Personal)

–

Quick Dialing (

® 14.1.1 Quick Dialing)

–

S-CO Line Access (

® 16.1.7 Speed Dialing, System)

–

System Speed Dialing (

–

TIE Line Call (

® 13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES)

–

Trunk Group Access (

® 10.1.4 Local Alarm Information)

*1 As a member only (not as originator).

KX-HGT100 extensions support the following additional features:

–

Message Waiting

–

Personal Speed Dialing (Internal)

–

Voice Mail

–

Automatic Date and Time Adjustment

–

Showing/preventing the telephone number when making outside calls

–

SVM

–

Call Transfer without Announcement

For details, refer to the Quick Reference Guide of the KX-HGT100.

Conditions

•

This PBX supports SIP devices that use RFC 3261, 3264, 3310, 2327, or 4028.

•

Some SIP phones may not be compatible with this PBX.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 291

16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)

•

Before a SIP extension can be used with the PBX, the IP address of the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card, password, and extension number must be assigned on the SIP extension and on the PBX.

For details on how to register, refer to the Information on IP Networking Guide.

•

When registering the SIP extension, the user ID must be the extension number of the SIP extension.

•

When a SIP extension uses the Call Hold feature, the target call is put on Consultation Hold.

Installation Manual References

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

3.4.1 Virtual Cards

KX-TDE600

3.4.1 Virtual Cards

PC Programming Manual References

3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension

3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port

3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port—Connection Command

16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)

Description

Automatically logs detailed information for each extension.

SMDR Output Port

The following output methods can be selected through system programming:

13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— SMDR Format—Port

Output Method Description

Serial Interface (RS-232C) port SMDR information is sent to a connected PC, printer, etc.

Telnet compatible terminal emulator SMDR information is sent to a Telnet compatible terminal emulator via LAN.

SMDR Output Data

The following data can be recorded and sent to the SMDR output port:

CO line call information (incoming/outgoing)

Intercom call information (outgoing)

Log-in/Log-out information

PBX error log (

Hospitality feature information (

® 8.1.4 HOSPITALITY FEATURES)

Printing Message information (

® 13.1.13 Printing Message)

Memory for SMDR: A specified number of records (data) can be remembered by the PBX. When memory is full, the oldest data is overwritten by new data.

When an IPCMEC card is installed, the number of SMDR records that can be stored will increase.

SMDR Format Type and Contents

The following three types of output format can be selected through system programming:

292 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)

Pattern A: 80-column text without call charge information

Date

(8 digits)

Time

(7)

Ext

(5)

(2)

Dial Number

(25)

01/02/02 10:03AM

01/02/02 10:07AM

01/02/02 10:15AM

01/02/02 10:30AM

1200

*123

12345678901234567890

1234567890123456

Ring

(4)

Duration

(8)

ACC Code

(10)

(3)

5'15

0'05

00:00'00

00:01'05

9876543210

01/02/02

01:07PM

01/02/02 01:07PM

1234

ABC COMPANY12345678

<D>CDE9876Q COMPANY

ABC COMPANY12345678

123..............

123456XX

0'05

00:01'05

00:12'05

9876543210

98765

01/02/02 08:33AM

01/02/02

01:07PM

01/02/02 03:35PM

01/02/02 03:45PM

01/02/02 03:50PM

01/02/02 03:55PM

01/02/02 04:00PM

01/02/02 04:01PM

01/02/02

04:01PM

01/02/02 04:05PM

1234

In the office

LOG OUT

EXT1235

Check in

Check out

Timed Reminder/Start

Timed Reminder/No Answer

Timed Reminder/Answer

S003 RC

(1)

(2) (3) (4) (5)

(6) (7) (8) (9)

Pattern B: 80-column text with call charge information

Date Time

(8 digits) (7)

Ext

(5)

(2)

Dial Number

(20)

Duration

(8)

Cost

(8+2)

ACC Code

(10)

(3)

01/02/02 10:03AM

01/02/02 10:07AM

1210

2005

1234567890123456789 00:00'05 00560.00EU

9876543210

(1)

(2) (3) (4) (5)

(7) (10) (8) (9)

120 column text

Date

(8 digits)

Time

(7)

Ext

(5)

(4)

Dial Number

(50)

Ring

(4)

Duration

(8)

Cost

(8+3)

ACC Code

(10)

(3)

01/02/02 10:03AM

01/02/02 10:07AM

1230

0001

123456789012345678901234567890

ABC COMPANY123456789012345 0'05

00:00'05

00560.00EUR

9876543210 TR

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (10) (8) (9)

[Explanation]

The following table explains the types of data logged by SMDR. Each description below refers to data indicated above by the numbers in the parentheses.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 293

16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)

Number in the Pattern

(1)

(2)

(3)

Data

Date

Time

Ext

(Extension)

(4) CO

Description

Shows the date of the call.

Shows the end time of a call as hour/minute/AM or PM.

Shows the extension number, floating extension number, etc., which was engaged in the call.

Also shows the following codes:

Dxxx: Outgoing CO line call from a doorphone (xxx=doorphone number) (

® 8.1.5 Host PBX Access Code

Txxx: Outgoing CO line call by TIE line service (xxx=trunk group number)

*xxx: Verified call (xxx=verification code) (

® 19.1.1 Verification

Code Entry)

Shows the CO line number used for the call.

For patterns A and B, "00" will be shown for CO line numbers over hundred.

294 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)

Number in the Pattern

(5)

Data

Dial Number

(6)

(7)

(8)

Ring

Duration

Acc Code

(Account

Code)

Description

[CO Line Call]

Outgoing CO Line Call

Shows the dialed telephone number.

Digits shown are as follows:

0 through 9, , #

P: Pause

F: External Feature Access (EFA) signal

=: Host PBX Access code (

(Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX))

. (dot): Secret dialing

–: Transferred call

If the transfer destination extension enters additional digits, those digits will be added after "–".

Incoming CO Line Call

Shows + the caller’s identification name/number.

It is also possible to show the DID call information. In this case,

<D> + DID name/number is added before .

[Outgoing Intercom Call]

Shows the dialed extension number followed by "EXT".

[Log-in/Log-out]

Shows the Log-in or Log-out status.

[Check-in/Check-out]

Shows the check-in or check-out status. (

® 15.1.3 Room Status

Control)

[Timed Reminder]

Shows the status of a timed reminder, either "Start", "No

Answer", or "Answer". (

® 17.1.4 Timed Reminder)

[Printing Message]

Shows the selected message. (

® 13.1.13 Printing Message)

[Sensor Call]

Shows calls from an external sensor as follows:

S + sensor number. (

® 5.1.9 External Sensor)

Shows the ring duration before the call was answered in minutes/ seconds.

Shows the duration of the CO line call in hours/minutes/seconds.

Shows the account code appended to the call. (

® 1.1.2 Account

Code Entry)

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 295

16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)

Number in the Pattern

(9)

(10)

Data

CD (Condition

Code)

Cost

Description

Shows other call information using the following codes:

TR: Transfer

FW: Call Forwarding (FWD) to CO line

D0: Call using Direct Inward System Access (DISA) or TIE line service

RM: Remote maintenance (modem) (

® 13.1.6 PC

Programming)

NA: Not answered call

RC: Received call

AN: Answered call

VR: Received call with Call Waiting Caller ID (Visual Caller ID)

VA: Answered call with Call Waiting Caller ID (Visual Caller ID)

Shows the call charge. This is not available if your telephone company does not provide a call charge reporting service.

The following data can be controlled through system programming to adjust whether (or how) they are printed or displayed by SMDR.

[Programmable Items]

Item

Outgoing CO line call

Incoming CO line call

Outgoing intercom call

Log-in/Log-out status

ARS dial

Description

Controls whether outgoing CO line calls are shown. This setting is common throughout the PBX. COS programming is also required.

® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— Print Information—Outgoing

Call

® [804] SMDR Outgoing Call Printing

Controls whether incoming CO line calls are shown.

® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— Print Information—Incoming

Call

® [805] SMDR Incoming Call Printing

Controls whether outgoing intercom calls are recorded.

® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— Print Information—Intercom

Call

Controls whether the Log-in/Log-out status of extensions is recorded.

® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— Print Information—Log-in /

Log-out

Controls whether the user-dialed number or the ARS-modified number is shown.

The Host PBX Access code ("=" followed by the access code) can be shown (as supplementary information) only when the modified number is selected in this setting. (

® 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic

Route Selection))

® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—ARS Dial

296 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Item

Caller’s identification

DID number

Secret dialing

Date order

Received call

Answered call

Room status

Timed Reminder call

Printing Message

Time format

16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)

Description

Controls whether the caller’s identification number, name, number and name, or nothing is shown. If "none" is selected, will not be shown.

® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—Caller ID

Number & Name

Controls whether the DID numbers, names, numbers and names, or nothing is shown. If "none" is selected, <D> will not be shown.

® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—DID Number

& Name

Controls the display of secret dialing, when ARS dial above, is set to show ARS-modified numbers. If enabled, numbers dialed secretly will be shown as dots.

If ARS dial is set to show the user-dialed numbers, secretly dialed numbers are always shown as dots in SMDR, regardless of this setting.

® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—Secret Dial

Controls the date format (MM-DD-YY, DD-MM-YY, YY-MM-DD,

YY-DD-MM)

® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— SMDR Format—Date Format

Controls whether the time of receiving an incoming CO line call is shown.

® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—Condition

Code "RC/VR"

Controls whether the time of answering an incoming CO line call is shown.

® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—Condition

Code "AN/VA"

Controls whether room status changes are shown.

® 8.2 [6-2] Hotel—Main— SMDR for External Hotel

Application 1—Room Status Control

Controls whether Timed Reminder calls are shown (

17.1.4 Timed Reminder).

® 8.2 [6-2] Hotel—Main— SMDR for External Hotel

Application 1—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call)

Specifies the messages that can be selected from an extension

(

® 13.1.13 Printing Message).

® 8.2 [6-2] Hotel—Main— SMDR for External Hotel

Application 2—Printing Message 1–8

Controls whether time is displayed in 12-hour or 24-hour format.

® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— SMDR Format—Time Format

(12H / 24H)

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 297

16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)

Conditions

[General]

•

SMDR Format

The following SMDR format parameters can be set through system programming in order to match the paper size being used by the printer:

Page Length: determines the number of lines per page.

® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— SMDR Format—Page Length (Number of Lines)

® [802] SMDR Page Length

Skip Perforation: determines the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page.

® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— SMDR Format—Blank Footer Length (Number of Lines)

® [803] SMDR Skip Perforation

The page length should be at least four lines longer than the skip perforation length.

Explanation:

Page

Length

Skip

Perforation

Machine

Perforation

•

SMDR data is not deleted even if the PBX is reset.

•

If the PBX is reset during a conversation, the call will not be logged by SMDR.

•

The following calls are regarded as two separated calls in the SMDR:

–

Calls before and after the flash/recall/EFA signal is manually sent during a conversation

–

CO-to-CO line calls by Call Transfer, FWD or DISA (each is logged as both an "incoming call" and an "outgoing call")

•

The PBX waits for a preprogrammed time period after the end of dialing before starting the SMDR timer for outgoing CO line calls. When the PBX has sent out all dialed digits to the telephone company and this timer expires, the PBX begins measuring the duration of the call. A display proprietary telephone (PT) shows the elapsed time of the call. The starting time and the total duration of the call are logged by SMDR.

® 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Analog CO Call Duration Start

® [208] Call Duration Count Starting Time for LCOT

•

Serial Interface (RS-232C) Parameters

The following communication parameters can be assigned for the Serial Interface (RS-232C port).

New Line Code: Select the code appropriate for the PC or printer. If the PC or printer automatically feeds lines with carriage return, select "CR." If not, select "CR+LF."

® 13.1 [11-1] Main—RS-232C— Communication—NL Code

® [800] RS-232C Parameter—New Line Code

Baud Rate: Baud rate indicates the transmission speed of data from the PBX to the PC or printer.

® 13.1 [11-1] Main—RS-232C— Communication—Baud Rate

® [800] RS-232C Parameter—Baud Rate

Word Length: Word length indicates how many bits compose each character.

® 13.1 [11-1] Main—RS-232C— Communication—Word Length

® [800] RS-232C Parameter—Word Length

Parity Bit: Parity bit indicates what type of parity is used to detect errors in the string of bits composing a character. Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of the PC or printer.

298 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)

® 13.1 [11-1] Main—RS-232C— Communication—Parity Bit

® [800] RS-232C Parameter—Parity Bit

Stop Bit Length: Stop bit indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character. Select an appropriate value depending on the requirements of the PC or printer.

® 13.1 [11-1] Main—RS-232C— Communication—Stop Bit

® [800] RS-232C Parameter—Stop Bit Length

•

If a call is transferred to an ICD group using Automatic Transfer, the condition code "TR" will not be recorded on SMDR (

® 3.1.10 Call Transfer).

[Host PBX Access Code]

•

The dialed number including the Host PBX Access code will be recorded on SMDR only if the modified number setting is selected in the ARS setting for SMDR.

•

When a Host PBX Access code is assigned to a trunk group, calls to extensions of the host PBX are not recorded on SMDR.

•

SMDR, because in this case this PBX recognizes the telephone company as the host PBX. Therefore, only long distance calls are recorded on SMDR.

[Output to a Telnet compatible Terminal Emulator]

•

In order to activate a connection to a terminal emulator, the IP address of the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card, port number, user ID ("SMDR"), and password must be entered.

•

If a terminal emulator user incorrectly enters the user ID or password 3 times consecutively, an alarm will be sent and connection will not be possible for 10 minutes.

•

Through system programming, it is possible to assign the PBX port number and password.

•

The terminal emulator application must be running constantly. If the application is terminated, call records that occur after the termination will be recorded in the PBX's memory. However, if the number of call records exceeds the PBX's capacity, older records will be deleted. Also, when the application restarts or is reconnected, duplicated call records may be output.

[Using SMDR with applications]

•

SMDR data can also be monitored by applications such as Panasonic Communication Assistant (CA). For more information, see your application's documentation.

Installation Manual References

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

3.3.3 IPCMEC Card (KX-TDE0105)

3.10.1 Connection of Peripherals

KX-TDE600

3.3.3 IPCMEC Card (KX-TDE0105)

3.12.1 Connection of Peripherals

PC Programming Manual References

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Analog CO Call Duration Start

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Outgoing CO Call Printout (SMDR)

8.2 [6-2] Hotel—Main— SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8

13.1 [11-1] Main

→SMDR

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 299

16.1.4 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) System Monitor

→SMDR Options

→RS-232C— Communication—Baud Rate

→RS-232C— Communication—NL Code

→RS-232C— Communication—Word Length

→RS-232C— Communication—Parity Bit

→RS-232C— Communication—Stop Bit

PT Programming Manual References

[800] RS-232C Parameter—New Line Code

[800] RS-232C Parameter—Baud Rate

[800] RS-232C Parameter—Word Length

[800] RS-232C Parameter—Parity Bit

[800] RS-232C Parameter—Stop Bit Length

[802] SMDR Page Length

[803] SMDR Skip Perforation

[804] SMDR Outgoing Call Printing

[805] SMDR Incoming Call Printing

Feature Manual References

8.1.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)

9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out

For a list of the MIB object groups supported by this PBX, refer to 21.3 Supported Management Information

16.1.4 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) System

Monitor

Description

It is possible for a PC assigned as an SNMP manager to manage and receive PBX system status information, such as alarm information and general system activity using SNMP. Management Information Bases (MIBs) are sent to a PC (i.e., the SNMP manager) connected to the PBX over a LAN and can then be stored and analyzed using SNMP manager software.

The two features for managing information using SNMP are as follows:

–

Polling:

A bilateral transaction of information. Polling allows the manager to request information from the PBX.

PBX

Request

PC

Response

Manager

300 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

16.1.4 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) System Monitor

–

TRAP:

An automatic relay of information from the PBX when a status change occurs or an alarm is detected.

PBX

Sends Information

PC

Manager

TRAP Implementation

The PBX will send the two types of TRAP as follows:

Type TRAP Name

Standard TRAP

Enterprise Specific

TRAP

Description

coldStart Information is sent after turning on the power of the PBX or resetting the PBX.

Authentication Failure Information is sent when an unregistered Community

Name and/or Manager IP address is entered.

Major Alarm Information is sent when a major alarm is detected.

Minor Alarm Information is sent when a minor alarm is detected.

*1 Enterprise Specific TRAPs are original KX-TDE-exclusive information (Enterprise Specific MIB)

Conditions

•

Through system programming, it is possible to enable or disable this feature.

•

Up to 2 SNMP managers can be assigned.

•

This PBX supports SNMP Protocol Version 1.0 and SNMP Version 1.0-TRAP.

•

This PBX can only receive read-only MIBs. Write MIBs are not supported.

•

This PBX supports MIB II.

•

For more information regarding major and minor alarms, refer to the Installation Manual.

•

Base (MIB) Table in the Appendix.

•

Through system programming, it is possible to select whether each type of TRAP (e.g., ColdStart) is sent to the SNMP manager or not.

Installation Manual References

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

5.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log

KX-TDE600

5.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log

PC Programming Manual References

13.4 [11-4-1] SNMP—System Setting

13.5 [11-4-2] SNMP—Manager

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 301

16.1.6 Speed Dialing, Personal

Feature Manual References

10.1.4 Local Alarm Information

16.1.5 Special Carrier Access Code

Description

If the PBX has access to multiple telephone companies, a Special Carrier Access code assigned through system programming is required every time a CO line call is made without using ARS.

A pause of a preprogrammed length will be automatically inserted between the user-dialed Special Carrier

Access code and the subsequent digits. (

® 13.1.4 Pause Insertion)

Conditions

•

TRS

Toll Restriction (TRS) checks only the dialed telephone number excluding the Special Carrier Access code.

(

•

ARS

A pause is not automatically inserted between the user-dialed access code and the subsequent digits when

ARS mode is enabled. (

® 8.1.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the

•

If this PBX is installed behind an existing host PBX:

A Special Carrier Access code and a Host PBX Access code should be assigned separately—these codes cannot be assigned together as one code. (

Telephone Company from a Host PBX))

PC Programming Manual References

9.3 [7-3] Special Carrier

PT Programming Manual References

[303] Special Carrier Access Code

Feature Manual References

® 5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number))

16.1.6 Speed Dialing, Personal

Description

An extension user can make calls using abbreviated dialing for frequently dialed numbers which are stored in the extension’s Personal Speed Dialing.

Personal Speed Dialing is also known as Station Speed Dialing.

302 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

16.1.7 Speed Dialing, System

Conditions

•

Any number, such as a telephone number or feature number, can be stored in Speed Dialing. A name can be assigned to each Personal Speed Dialing number through personal programming, and also to each

System Speed Dialing number.

•

Call Directory—Speed Dialing

Display proprietary telephone (PT) users can make a call by selecting a stored name shown on the display.

•

Display Lock

An extension user can lock the Personal Speed Dialing number display to prevent the numbers from being viewed at any extension through personal programming (Display Lock). In this case, the Incoming/Outgoing

Call Log displays and the SVM Log display are also locked, and the voice messages in the user’s message box cannot be played back. An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature. (

PC Programming Manual References

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features

→ System Speed Dialing / Personal Speed Dialing

→ Personal Speed Dialing - Programming

6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial

Feature Manual References

17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction))

Operating Manual References

1.3.61 Speed Dialing, Personal

1.4.1 Call Log, Incoming

1.4.3 Directories

3.1.2 Personal Programming

3.3 System Programming

16.1.7 Speed Dialing, System

Description

An extension user can make calls using abbreviated dialing for frequently dialed numbers which are stored in the PBX as System Speed Dialing numbers.

Conditions

•

Any number, such as a telephone number or feature number, can be stored in Speed Dialing. A name can be assigned to each Personal Speed Dialing number through personal programming, and also to each

System Speed Dialing number.

•

Call Directory—Speed Dialing

Display proprietary telephone (PT) users can make a call by selecting a stored name shown on the display.

•

TRS Override by System Speed Dialing

It is possible to override Toll Restriction (TRS) when dialing a number using System Speed Dialing. (

•

System Speed Dialing Display by AUTO DIAL/STORE Button

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 303

16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)

Pressing the AUTO DIAL/STORE button on a display DPT or KX-T7735 while on-hook can display the

System Speed Dialing Directory.

PC Programming Manual References

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— System Speed Dialing / Personal Speed Dialing

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level for System Speed Dialing

6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial

8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

8.6 [6-6] Tenant— System Speed Dial

PT Programming Manual References

[001] System Speed Dialing Number

[002] System Speed Dialing Name

[509] TRS Level for System Speed Dialing

Feature Manual References

® 12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)), or both. When used for the SVM feature, this block is assigned

Operating Manual References

1.3.62 Speed Dialing, System

1.4.1 Call Log, Incoming

1.4.3 Directories

3.1.2 Personal Programming

3.3 System Programming

16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)

Description

This feature provides simple answering machine features for extensions.

Features for an extension user with a message box:

An extension user can record a personal greeting message to greet a caller and ask him to leave a voice message. The user can also play back and clear greeting messages and the voice messages left by callers.

Feature for a caller:

A caller can leave a voice message after hearing the greeting message.

SVM/OGM Block on the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR Card

The IPCMPR card (MPR card for KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200), and the IPCEMPR card (MPR card for

KX-TDE600) has a built-in SVM/OGM Block. This block can be used either for the SVM feature, for the OGM feature (

a floating extension number (default: 591). Two channels are available, allowing two users to access this feature at the same time.

When an extension is assigned to this feature through system programming, a message box is created for that extension. This message box is used to store greeting messages and voice messages for the extension. Each proprietary telephone (PT), single line telephone (SLT), and portable station (PS) can be assigned its own message box.

304 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)

[Example]

IPCMPR

SVM : Floating Extension No. 591 (default)

Message Box for

Extn. 101

Message Box for

Extn. 102

Message Box for

Extn. 103

Message Box for

Extn. 210

2 CH

ESVM4 Card

Like the SVM/OGM block on the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card, an ESVM4 card, mounted on an OPB3 card, can be used either for the SVM feature, for the OGM feature, or both.

An ESVM4 card (4 channels) contains two blocks of data. Up to four ESVM4 cards (max. 16 channels) can be installed in the PBX.

Only up to 2 ESVM4 cards (max. 8 channels) can be used for the SVM feature per system. In this case, each card is assigned a floating extension number rather than the SVM/OGM block on the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card.

The rest of the channels must be used for OGM feature purposes.

When using an ESVM4 card for the SVM feature, it must be mounted on sub-slot 3 (highest slot) of the

OPB3 card.

[Example]

PBX

SVM Card 1 (ESVM4): Floating Extension No. 591 (default)

Block A

Message Box for

Extn. 101

Message Box for

Extn. 102

Message Box for

Extn. 103

Message Box for

Extn. 210

2 CH

Block B

Message Box for

Extn. 104

Message Box for

Extn. 105

2 CH

SVM Card 2 (IPCMPR): Floating Extension No. 592 (default)

Message Box for

Extn. 301

2 CH

Message Recording Limit

Up to 125 (IPCMPR/IPCEMPR)/250 (ESVM4) messages (greeting messages and voice messages for extensions) with a maximum total recording time of 60 minutes (default) can be recorded per card/block. This memory is shared between the message boxes of all extensions assigned to that card/block. The recording quality, which can be selected through system programming, determines the total recording time as follows:

Recording Quality Recording Time with the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR/ESVM4 Card

High

Middle

(default) about 20 minutes about 60 minutes

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 305

16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)

Recording Quality

Low

Recording Time with the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR/ESVM4 Card

about 120 minutes

When a card/block is used for the OGM feature, the recording quality can be set separately (

®12.1.2 OGM

(Outgoing Message)

When using a card/block for both the SVM feature and OGM feature, the first 64 messages in the card/block are saved for OGM use and the remaining 186 messages will be for SVM use, as shown below:

SVM Use: Disabled

OGM Use: Enabled

ESVM4 Card

Block A

OGM Use:

64 Messages

2 CH

SVM Use: Enabled

OGM Use: Enabled

ESVM4 Card

Block A

OGM Use: SVM Use:

64 Messages 186 Messages

2 CH

SVM Use: Enabled

OGM Use: Disabled

ESVM4 Card

Block A

SVM Use:

250 Messages

2 CH

Block B

OGM Use:

64 Messages

2 CH

Block B

OGM Use: SVM Use:

64 Messages 186 Messages

2 CH

Block B

SVM Use:

250 Messages

2 CH

If the sum length of all recorded voice messages exceeds 90% of total recording space, the display informs all extension users that the total capacity has almost been reached. Users will hear dial tone 3 when going off-hook.

Floating Extension No. and Destination

An extension user can set incoming calls to be redirected to his message box when he cannot answer them.

The user can set the floating extension number of this feature as the destination for redirected calls. Then, this feature answers redirected calls, plays back the relevant greeting message, and records a voice message.

Incoming calls can be redirected to this feature by the following methods:

–

Call Forwarding (FWD) (

® 9.1.11 Intercept Routing)

–

Intercept Routing—No Answer/Busy/DND (

[Programming Example for Intercept Routing]

Extension No.

Intercept Destination

101

102

301

(Operator)

Day

102

103

–

Lunch

591

–

Break

591

–

Night

591

In this example:

If a call is received at extension 101 and cannot be answered:

In day mode: the call will be redirected to extension 102.

In lunch/break/night mode: the call will be redirected to this feature card, and a voice message will be recorded to the message box.

306 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)

If a call is received at extension 301 (operator), the call will only be redirected to this feature in night mode.

If both FWD and Intercept Routing features are set for an extension, the FWD setting has priority. So, for example, it is possible for extension 101 to temporarily set FWD settings from his extension to forward calls to the Simplified Voice Message (SVM) feature even during day mode.

Greeting Message for Each Time Mode

When a call is redirected to this feature, the caller hears the designated greeting message. In addition to the normal greeting message, an extension user can record a different greeting message for each time mode (day/ lunch/break/night) (

® 17.1.5 Time Service).

[Recording Example]

•

Normal Greeting Message: "You have reached John. I am sorry I cannot take your call right now. Please leave a message."

•

Greeting Message for lunch mode: "You have reached John. I am sorry I am out for lunch right now. Please leave a message."

If both the greeting message for a certain time mode and the normal greeting message have been recorded, callers will hear the greeting message for that time mode. However, if no greeting message has been recorded for a certain time mode, the normal greeting message will be played instead.

If neither the normal greeting message nor the greeting message for a certain time mode have been recorded, incoming calls will not be redirected to this feature in that time mode. For example, if a greeting message has only been recorded for night mode, and no normal greeting message has been recorded, incoming calls can only be redirected to this feature in night mode. No incoming calls will be redirected to this feature in day/lunch/ break mode.

Direct Recording

An extension user can leave a voice message directly in the message box of an extension. In this case, the target extension will not ring. It is also possible to transfer a caller directly to the message box of an extension.

Message Notification

If a new voice message has been left in a message box, and distinctive dial tones are enabled, the user will hear dial tone 4 when going off-hook. If a message box contains only voice messages that have previously been listened to, dial tone 2 is heard instead. In addition, if the user’s telephone has a Message button or

Message/Ringer Lamp, the corresponding button or lamp will light when a voice message has been left.

Pressing the lit button while on-hook shows the caller’s information.

SVM Log

When a caller leaves a voice message on the Simplified Voice Message (SVM) feature, the following information is also recorded (as available):

Caller’s Name

Caller’s Telephone Number

Time recording started

Voice Message Status

–

"New" is displayed for voice messages which have not previously been listened to.

–

"Old" is displayed for voice messages which have previously been listened to.

This information can be viewed with the display of a PT or PS.

Please note that the information shown on the display may vary depending on the information that was received and the type of telephone used. Only users of a 6-line display PT can view all of the above information.

Checking Voice Messages Left by Callers

When an extension user accesses his message box, the most recent unplayed voice message is played first.

When one voice message finishes playing, the next most recent voice message will begin playing automatically. After the last voice message in a message box has finished playing, the voice messages will begin playing from the most recent voice message again. When all voice messages have been played this time, the extension user will hear dial tone 4, and the line will be disconnected automatically.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 307

16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)

SVM Remote Access from CO Line

An extension user can remotely access his message box through a CO line by calling his own extension and using the Walking COS feature. This allows the user to, for example, check the voice messages left in his message box when he is out of the office.

Accessing the Message Box of Another Extension

An extension user can access the message box of another extension by using the Walking COS feature to, for example, record a greeting message in a message box for an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group as described below.

In addition, if the user’s telephone has a Message button for another extension, the user can easily access the message box of that extension and listen to the voice messages left by callers.

Message Box for Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group

When a call is redirected to this feature from an ICD Group using Intercept Routing—Overflow (

® 9.1.5 ICD

Group Features—Overflow) or Call Forwarding (FWD), the greeting message for the first extension assigned

to that ICD Group will be played, and the voice message from the caller will be recorded in that extension’s message box.

A virtual PS can be assigned as the first extension of the ICD Group. This provides the ICD Group with a dedicated message box that is not shared with an actual extension. (

® 19.1.2 Virtual PS)

Conditions

[General]

•

The maximum number of voice messages (not including greeting messages) that can be recorded for an extension can be set between 1 and 100 through system programming. (Default: 10)

•

The Message button or Message/Ringer Lamp will light when an incoming call is answered by this feature.

However, if a message is not left by the caller, the light will turn off when the call has ended.

•

It is not possible to back up the SVM Log, recorded voice messages or greeting messages. If the PBX is initialized, all this information is cleared.

•

When the ESVM card to which an extension belongs is changed through system programming, all the recorded voice messages and greeting messages for the extension will be cleared.

•

When using the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card, this feature can be disabled for each extension through system programming. This can be useful for only allowing certain users (e.g., bosses, executives, etc.) access to the limited capacity of recorded voice messages for this feature. When this feature is disabled, all the recorded voice messages and greeting messages for the extension will be cleared.

•

The voice messages for an extension will be cleared when the extension is checked out using the

Hospitality feature (

® 8.1.4 HOSPITALITY FEATURES). However, greeting messages will not be cleared.

•

An extension is able to receive calls even while a voice message is being recorded in that extension’s message box.

•

If an extension user tries to access this feature when it is already being accessed by two other users, the user will hear a busy tone.

•

If an extension user tries to clear a voice message shown on the display while the message box is already in use, the extension user will hear a notification tone.

•

Voice message recording will stop when:

a caller hangs up.

the recording time for the voice message reaches the preprogrammed limit. (Default: 120 seconds)

the recording space reaches the limit.

In cases b) and c), the caller will hear a notification tone, and the line will be disconnected.

•

New voice messages cannot be recorded in a message box when:

308 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message) a.

the total recording time or number of voice messages exceeds the limit.

the number of voice messages for an extension exceeds the limit.

the destination of a call has been changed more than once.

the desired message box is already in use by another user.

a call is received at an ICD Group, and the message box of the first extension assigned to that group is not available, or no extension is assigned as the first member of the group.

•

This feature does not answer calls that are forwarded using the Call Forwarding by QSIG feature (

13.1.22 Private Network Features—QSIG—CF (Call Forwarding)).

•

Display Lock

A display PT user can lock the SVM Log display to prevent the user’s information from being viewed and voice messages from being played back at any extension through personal programming (Display Lock).

In this case, the Incoming/Outgoing Call Log displays and the Personal Speed Dialing number display are also locked. An extension personal identification number (PIN) (

® 5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal

Identification Number)) is required to lock/unlock the display.

•

Accessing the Message Box of Another Extension

Listening to voice messages left by callers using a Message button for another extension is available only when voice messages have been left in the message box.

•

Moving From SVM to DISA

When a call is answered by SVM but the caller wants to call another extension instead of leaving a message, it is possible to access DISA (DISA OGM 01 will be played) by dialing the Operator Call feature number. This allows the caller to call another extension via DISA or access the DISA AA service. The OGM feature for the card/block to which the SVM mailbox belongs must be enabled via system programming.

[Recording Greeting Messages]

•

If an extension user tries to record a new greeting message to his message box when the total recording time or number of messages has reached its limit, the user will hear a reorder tone.

•

It is not recommended to record music when creating a greeting message.

[SVM Remote Access from CO Line]

•

Whether Walking COS is available or not can be set through system programming.

If the PBX uses analog CO lines without the CPC service, it is strongly recommended to prohibit Walking

COS access. If an extension user who is accessing his message box through an analog line goes on-hook while the voice messages are being played, the line will remain connected until all voice messages finish playing. This is because a reorder tone cannot be detected from an analog line while playing voice messages.

•

The first digit of the Walking COS feature number must be entered before the greeting message finishes playing.

•

When accessing SVM through a CO line, it is possible to change message boxes (e.g., to leave a message in another user’s message box after listening to one’s own messages). However, a user can only access the message boxes of other extensions assigned to the same card/block. For example, if the user accesses a message box belonging to card/block 1 first, then the user can only access the message boxes of other extensions belonging to card/block 1. If the user tries to access the message box of another extension belonging to a different card, the user will hear a reorder tone. While a reorder tone is heard, it is possible to retry another call by pressing " ".

Installation Manual References

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

3.3.1 IPCMPR Card

3.7.1 OPB3 Card (KX-TDA0190)

3.7.6 ESVM4 Card (KX-TDA0194)

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 309

16.1.9 Syslog Record Management

KX-TDE600

3.3.1 IPCEMPR Card

3.9.1 OPB3 Card (KX-TDA0190)

3.9.5 ESVM4 Card (KX-TDA0194)

PC Programming Manual References

2.5.4 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Delete All Recording

2.5.5 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage

3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property— SVM Feature

3.44 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property— SVM Feature

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous

→ SVM—Recording Time

→ SVM—Dial Tone Continuous Time

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Simplified Voice Message Access

5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection

→ Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Silence

→ Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Continuous

→ Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Cyclic

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6— Display Lock / SVM Lock

6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6— SVM Lock

6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message

7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM

Feature Manual References

4.1.4 Dial Tone

20.1.1 Walking COS

10.1.4 Local Alarm Information

Operating Manual References

1.3.63 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)

3.1.2 Personal Programming

16.1.9 Syslog Record Management

Description

By connecting this PBX to a Syslog server over a LAN, it is possible to output local alarm information (major alarms/minor alarms) to a external PC.

Conditions

•

To be able to use this feature, through system programming, it is required to enable this feature, register the IP address of the Syslog server, and to select whether major/minor are sent.

310 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

PC Programming Manual References

13.1 [11-1] Main—Syslog

Feature Manual References

16.1.9 Syslog Record Management

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 311

16.1.9 Syslog Record Management

312 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Section 17 Features and Configurations—T

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 313

17.1.1 T1 Line Service

17.1 T

17.1.1 T1 Line Service

Description

A T1 line carries twenty-four 64 kbps-voice channels at 1.5 Mbps, and can be used as a public or private line.

Voice is digitized by Pulse Code Modulation (PCM).

Channel Type

[LCOT/GCOT/DID/TIE/OPX]

The T1 card supports five different channel types to provide connection at minimum expense. One of the five channel types can be assigned to any one of the T1 card’s 24 channels individually, according to usage rates and customer needs.

T1 Features

The following table shows the features available for each channel type:

Feature

Channel Type

LCOT

GCOT

DID

TIE (E & M)

OPX

(1) TIE (2) DID (3) DIL (4) OPX (5) ANI

Available

[Explanation]

(1) TIE

(2) DID

(3) DIL

Feature

TIE Line Service

Direct Inward Dialing

(DID)

Direct In Line (DIL)

Description

Refer to the TIE Line Service feature. (

13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES)

Refer to the DID feature. (

® 4.1.6 DID (Direct Inward

Dialing))

Refer to the DIL feature. (

® 4.1.7 DIL (Direct In

Line))

314 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

17.1.2 TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station)

(4) OPX

(5) ANI

Feature

Off Premise Extension

(OPX)

Description

A single line telephone (SLT) which is installed off site can perform as if it were installed locally. The SLT makes and receives calls through the PBX. An extension number can be given to the OPX, and extension data such as Class of Service (COS) is also applied.

[Example]

Telephone Company

SLT

T1-LCOT T1-OPX

T1 Card

PBX

Extn.103

Automatic Number

Identification (ANI)

Extn.101

Extn.102

Dials "103".

Receives the caller’s number from a T1 line.

When the ANI number is received, it can be treated the same as a Caller ID number. (

® 3.1.3 Caller ID)

Conditions

•

If a T1 line is used as a public line, the channel type depends on the contract with the telephone company.

PC Programming Manual References

3.36 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port

3.37 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command

17.1.2 TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station)

Description

A ring tone is sent through an external pager (loudspeaker) when an incoming call is received. Any extension user can answer the call.

Conditions

•

Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied external pager

•

Floating Extension Number

A floating extension number can be assigned to an external pager (default: 600). An external pager is accessed by dialing its floating extension number.

•

Pager Volume

It is possible to change the volume level of an external pager through system programming.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 315

17.1.3 Tenant Service

Installation Manual References

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

3.10 Connection of Peripherals

KX-TDE600

3.12.1 Connection of Peripherals

PC Programming Manual References

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— TAFAS Answer

4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH

→ Paging—EPG 1 (External Pager 1)

→ Paging—EPG 2 (External Pager 2)

7.2 [5-2] External Pager

PT Programming Manual References

[700] External Pager Floating Extension Number

Operating Manual References

1.3.64 TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station)

17.1.3 Tenant Service

Description

Tenant service is a cost-effective method of providing PBX services to different offices or companies located in the same building, while using only one PBX.

Tenant Configuration

Tenant Members

Extensions are assigned to a tenant indirectly; they are assigned to extension user groups, and these extension user groups are assigned to tenants. An extension can belong to only one extension user group and an extension user group can belong to only one tenant, therefore an extension can belong to only one tenant. (

® 17.1.5 Time Service). The start and end times of each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) for each

Time Service

Time modes are used by many PBX features to determine how they will function during different times of day (

day of the week are programmed in a Time Table. Each Time Table has a number which corresponds to the tenant number of the tenant it serves. (Tenant 1 uses Time Table 1, etc.)

316 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

17.1.3 Tenant Service

[Example of Tenant Configuration]

Tenant 1 Tenant 2

Extn. User

Group 1

Extn. User

Group 2

Extn. User

Group 3

Extn. User

Group 4

Uses Time Table 1

Extn. User

Group 5

Extn. User

Group 6

Uses Time Table 2

System Management

Each of the following system management items can be assigned to each tenant.

Tenant Operator: Determines the destination for calls directed to the tenant’s operator. If no operator is designated, the PBX operator will serve as the tenant’s operator (

® 12.1.5 Operator Features).

® 8.6 [6-6] Tenant— Operator (Extension Number)

ARS Mode: Determines under which circumstances Automatic Route Selection (ARS) operates for calls made by the tenant’s extensions — either when a call is made using the Idle Line Access method, or when any CO Line Access method is used (

® 3.1.16 CO Line Access). The ARS mode for each

tenant can also be programmed to be the same ARS mode assigned to the entire PBX, or turned off

(

® 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)).

® 8.6 [6-6] Tenant— ARS Mode

Audio Source for Music on Hold: Determines the audio source for the Music on Hold heard by the tenant’s callers. Either a tone or a specific background music (BGM) number can be used. The audio source for each tenant can also be programmed to use the same audio source used for Music on Hold assigned to the entire PBX (

® 11.1.4 Music on Hold).

® 8.6 [6-6] Tenant— Music On Hold

System Speed Dialing: Determines whether each tenant uses the original set of common System

Speed Dialing numbers or that tenant’s private set (

® 16.1.7 Speed Dialing, System).

® 8.6 [6-6] Tenant— System Speed Dial

Hardware Requirement: An EMEC or MEC card

Call Blocking

Through Class of Service (COS) programming, it is possible to:

Prevent extensions of one tenant from calling extensions of another tenant. (Tenant-to-Tenant Call

Block)

Limit the trunk groups which can be used by the extensions of each tenant. (External Call Block)

Tenant-to-Tenant Call Block

Using Internal Call Block, certain features, such as making intercom calls, can be restricted based on the

COS assigned to extensions (

® 9.1.14 Internal Call Block). Well-planned COS programming can prevent

extensions of one tenant from:

–

Calling an extension or doorphone which belongs to another tenant

–

Picking up calls ringing at extensions belonging to another tenant (

® 3.1.8 Call Pickup)

–

Retrieving calls being held by another tenant (

® 3.1.4 Call Hold)

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 317

17.1.3 Tenant Service

[Programming Example: Internal Call Block]

Caller

Called Party

COS 1 COS 2 COS 3 COS 4 COS 5 COS 6

COS 1

COS 2

COS 3

COS 4

COS 5

COS 6

Block

In this example:

Internal Call Block is employed to block calls between certain tenants.

Each extension in a tenant is assigned a COS that is not assigned to extensions which belong to another tenant.

Extensions in Tenant 1 are either COS 1 or 2. They can make calls to extensions in Tenants 1, 2, and

Extensions in Tenant 2 are either COS 3 or 4. They can make calls to extensions in Tenants 1 and 2, but not 3.

Extensions in Tenant 3 are either COS 5 or 6. They can make calls to other extensions in Tenant 3 only.

Tenant 1

Extension User

Group 1

Tenant 3

Extension User

Group 5

COS

Extn. 100 Extn. 101

COS

Extension User

Group 2

Extn. 102 Extn. 103

Tenant 2

Extension User

Group 3

COS

Extn. 104 Extn. 105

COS

Extension User

Group 4

Extn. 108 Extn. 109

COS

Extension User

Group 6

COS

Extn. 110 Extn. 111

Extn. 106 Extn. 107

External Call Block

If multiple tenants are using the PBX, the External Call Block feature should be programmed to control which COS numbers are allowed to access which trunk groups. By preventing certain COS numbers from

318 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

17.1.3 Tenant Service

accessing certain trunk groups, each tenant can be given its own trunk groups which no other tenant can access.

[Programming Example: External Call Block]

COS

COS 1

COS 2

COS 3

COS 4

COS 5

COS 6

Trunk

Group 1

Block

Trunk

Group 2

Block

Trunk

Group 3

Block

Trunk

Group 4

Block

Trunk

Group 5

Block

Trunk

Group 6

Block

In this example:

External Call Block is employed to prevent tenants from accessing all trunk groups except the ones designated to them. Each extension in a tenant is assigned a COS that is not assigned to extensions which belong to another tenant.

Extensions in Tenant 1 are either COS 1 or 2. They can access trunk groups 1 and 2.

Extensions in Tenant 2 are either COS 3 or 4. They can access trunk groups 3 and 4.

Extensions in Tenant 3 are either COS 5 or 6. They can access trunk groups 5 and 6.

Trunk

Group 5

Trunk

Group 6

Trunk

Group 1

Tenant 1

Extension User

Group 1

Trunk

Group 2

PBX

Trunk

Group 3

Tenant 2

Extension User

Group 3

Trunk

Group 4

Tenant 3

Extension User

Group 5

COS

Extn. 100 Extn. 101

Extension User

Group 2

COS

Extn. 104 Extn. 105

Extension User

Group 4

COS

Extn. 108 Extn. 109

COS

Extension User

Group 6

Extn. 102 Extn. 103 Extn. 106 Extn. 107 Extn. 110 Extn. 111

Conditions

•

The following features used by incoming call distribution (ICD) group are determined by the tenant number assigned to them (

® 9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES):

–

The Music on Hold heard by a caller while waiting in a queue.

–

The Time Table used by the ICD group to determine the current time mode. An overflow destination and Queuing Time Table can be assigned for each time mode.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 319

17.1.4 Timed Reminder

PC Programming Manual References

4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM

→ PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

→ BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold

4.6 [2-4] Week Table

4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table

4.13 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block

4.14 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block

5.6 [3-2] Extension Group

5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main— Tenant Number

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Group

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Group

7.1 [5-1] Doorphone— Tenant Number

7.7 [5-5] External Sensor— Tenant No.

8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial

8.6 [6-6] Tenant

Section 10 [8] ARS

10.6 [8-5] Carrier—Authorization Code for Tenant

12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL— Tenant Number

12.3 [10-3] DID Table— Tenant Number

PT Programming Manual References

[001] System Speed Dialing Number

[006] Operator Assignment

[320] ARS Mode

[711] Music on Hold

Feature Manual References

® 12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)). A

17.1.4 Timed Reminder

Description

An extension can be preset to ring at a certain time, to act as a wake-up call or reminder. This feature can be programmed to activate only once, or daily. If the user answers the alarm call, a prerecorded voice message will be heard. If a message is not assigned, a special dial tone (dial tone 3) will be heard.

Timed reminders can be set in one of two ways:

•

By the extension user, from his or her own extension (Timed Reminder).

•

Remotely, by the hotel operator (Remote Wake-up Call).

Conditions

•

Be sure that the PBX clock is set to the correct time.

•

Only one timed reminder can be set for an extension at a time. Setting a new reminder clears the previous reminder. If both the extension user and the hotel operator set a timed reminder for the same extension, the timed reminder that was set most recently is effective.

•

Programmable Time

320 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

17.1.5 Time Service

The Alarm Ringing time, the number of alarm repeat times, and Interval time are programmable through system programming.

•

To use the voice message feature:

An extension assigned as a manager can record messages (

different message can be assigned for each time mode (

® 17.1.5 Time Service).

PC Programming Manual References

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf

→ Timed Reminder—Repeat Counter

→ Timed Reminder—Interval Time

→ Timed Reminder—Alarm Ringing Duration

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features

→ Remote Timed Reminder (Remote Wakeup Call)

→ Timed Reminder Set / Cancel

4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others— Timed Reminder—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8

4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 1— PT LCD—Time Display

7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 2— Timed Reminder Message—Day, Lunch, Break,

Night

8.2 [6-2] Hotel— SMDR for External Hotel Application 1—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call)

Feature Manual References

15.1.3 Room Status Control

Operating Manual References

1.3.65 Timed Reminder

1.3.72 Wake-up Call

17.1.5 Time Service

Description

Time modes are used by many PBX features to determine how they will function during different times of day.

For example, incoming calls can be directed to sales staff during the day and to a Voice Processing System

(VPS) at night, extension users can be prohibited from making long distance calls during lunch time, etc.

There are four time modes—day, lunch, break, and night. The start and end times of each time mode are programmed for each day of the week in a Time Table. Each Time Table has a number which corresponds to the tenant it serves, i.e., Tenant 1 uses Time Table 1, etc.

Time Service Switching Mode

The current time mode can switch automatically to another time mode at the preprogrammed time assigned in the Time Table. It is possible, however, to switch time modes manually.

Whether time modes are normally switched manually or automatically is determined through system programming. Each tenant is assigned a switching mode.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 321

17.1.5 Time Service

Time Mode

Switching

Automatic

Description Condition

Manual

The current time mode will switch automatically to another time mode at the time programmed in the tenant’s Time Table, and can be switched manually by pressing the

Time Service button or by dialing the

Time Service Switch feature number.

The current time mode will switch only when the Time Service button is pressed or when the Time Service

Switch feature number is dialed.

The current time mode (day/lunch/ break/night) and the switching mode

(automatic/manual) can be switched manually by an extension assigned as a manager, or by an extension whose Class of Service (COS) is authorized.

Time Table

Each tenant has a Time Table that is used when the tenant is in Automatic Time Service Switching mode.

Each Time Table has four basic modes—day, lunch, break, and night—and also provides for multiple "breaks", such as morning breaks and afternoon breaks, and multiple "days", such as the morning shift and the afternoon shift following lunch.

A tenant’s Time Table is programmed to control when each time mode starts (and therefore, ends) and can be programmed separately for each day of the week.

Each Time Table has a number which corresponds to the tenant number of the tenant it serves. (Tenant

1 uses Time Table 1, etc.)

[Programming Example: Time Table]

Time Schedule

MON

TUE

Day 1

Lunch

Day 2

Break 1 start

Break 1 end

Break 2 start

Break 2 end

Night

Day 1

Time Table No. (Tenant No.)

09:00

15:00

11:00

12:00

13:00

15:00

15:15

18:30

19:00

20:30

20:45

15:00

18:00

06:00

22:30 21:00

18:00

09:00

22:45

01:00

15:00

22:00

11:00

21:15

06:15

[Visualization of Time Schedule for Tenant 1]

Monday

00:00

Time Table No. 1

03:00 06:00 09:00 12:00

Night

15:00

Day 1 Lunch Day 2 Break 1

18:00 21:00 00:00

Tuesday

Night

Note that in this example, the day mode (Day 2) resumes automatically when the break mode (Break 1) ends.

322 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

17.1.5 Time Service

[Visualization of Time Schedule for Other Tenants]

00:00

Time Table No. 2

Monday

03:00 06:00 09:00 12:00 15:00

Time Table No. 3

Time Table No. 4

18:00 21:00 00:00

Tuesday

Note that time modes can be arranged as they are needed (for example, night mode can occur in the morning and afternoon, if necessary) and not all time modes need to be used in a tenant’s time schedule.

Also note that Tenant 4’s Break 1 is followed by the night mode because no end time is programmed for the break.

Features Using Time Service

The following features can be programmed separately for each time mode:

Destination of incoming CO line calls (Direct In Line (DIL)/Direct Inward Dialing (DID)) (

® 4.1.7 DIL

(Direct In Line),

® 4.1.6 DID (Direct Inward Dialing))

Destination of calls handled by Intercept Routing (

® 9.1.11 Intercept Routing)

Destination of calls that are overflowed while waiting in a queue for an available agent of an incoming call distribution (ICD) group (

® 9.1.5 ICD Group Features—Overflow)

Destination of incoming doorphone calls (

® 12.1.5 Operator Features)

Destination of Operator Calls (

Toll Restriction (TRS) level of each COS

COS numbers which are permitted/restricted to access certain trunk groups (External Call Block) (

3.1.16 CO Line Access)

Outgoing Message (OGM) for Timed Reminder (

® 17.1.4 Timed Reminder)

Queuing Time Table used by an ICD group (

® 9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing)

Intercept time for Intercept Routing—No Answer (

® 9.1.11 Intercept Routing)

Intercept time for DISA Intercept Routing—No Answer (

Access))

[Programming Example: DID Table]

The DID Table can be programmed to direct calls to a different destination for each time mode based on the number dialed by the caller. Calls can, for example, be directed to an ICD group during the day mode, or to the Voice Mail (VM) service of a VPS during the lunch and night modes.

Location

DID No.

123-4567

123-2468

Tenant

(Time

Table) No.

Day

105

210

DID Destination

Lunch Break

150

200

105

210

Night

150

200

Explanation:

A CO line call with the DID number "123-4567" is received at 20:00.

The call will be handled by Time Table 1.

The current time mode is "night" (shown in "Programming Example: Time Table", above).

The call is directed to extension 150, which is a floating extension number used by the VPS

(programming not shown here).

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 323

17.1.5 Time Service

[Programming Example: DIL Table]

The DIL Table can be programmed to direct calls to a different destination for each time mode based on the CO line receiving the call. Calls can, for example, be directed to an ICD group during the day mode, or to the Voice Mail (VM) service of a VPS during the lunch and night modes.

Port No.

(CO Line No.)

Tenant (Time

Table) No.

Day

105

210

DIL Destination

Lunch Break

150

200

105

210

Night

150

200

Explanation:

A call is received at 20:00 on CO line 01.

The call will be handled by Time Table 1.

The current time mode is "night" (shown in "Programming Example: Time Table", above).

The call is directed to extension 150, which is a floating extension number used by the VPS

(programming not shown here).

Holiday Mode

The PBX can also accommodate 24 different holidays. The start and end date of each holiday can be programmed, and all holidays are assigned a single time mode. For example, if the "night" mode is assigned as the time mode for holidays, and a holiday begins December 31st and ends January 1st, all PBX features will use their "night" settings from 0:00 A.M. on December 31st until 0:00 A.M. on January 1st.

Time Service Button

A flexible button can be customized as one of the following Time Service buttons:

Day/Night button

Day/Night/Lunch button

Day/Night/Break button

Day/Night/Lunch/Break button

These buttons can be used to switch the current time mode: pressing the Day/Night button will toggle between the day and night modes, for example.

Each Time Service button will display the current time mode using a different light pattern or color, as shown below.

Light Pattern

Off

Red on

Green on

Slow green flashing

Slow red flashing

Current Time Mode

Day

Night

Lunch

Break

Holiday

Note

Pressing a Time Service button will change the current time mode only if the COS assigned to the extension is authorized to do so or if the extension is assigned as a manager. All other extension users can press this button on their proprietary telephones (PTs) to display the current time mode.

324 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

17.1.5 Time Service

Conditions

•

The start times of the following time modes can be specified through PC programming as well as PT programming.

–

Day 1 and 2

–

Lunch

–

Night

The start and end times of the following break modes can be specified through PC programming only.

–

Break 1

–

Break 2

–

Break 3

Note that if an end time is programmed for a break, the day mode will start or resume at this time, as shown previously in "Visualization of Time Schedule for Tenant 1" example. If no end time is programmed, the break will continue until the start of the next time mode, as shown in Time Table 4 in "Visualization of Time

Schedule for Other Tenants".

•

Time Service Switching Mode (Automatic/Manual) Button

Any flexible button can be customized as the Time Service Switching Mode (Automatic/Manual) button.

PC Programming Manual References

4.6 [2-4] Week Table

4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Time Service (Day / Lunch / Break / Night) Switch

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Time Service Switch

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

→ Type

→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service)

→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)

→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)

6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

→ Type

→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service)

→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)

→ Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console

→ Type

→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service)

→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)

→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)

PT Programming Manual References

[101] Time Service Switching Mode

[102] Time Service Starting Time

[514] Time Service Manual Switching

Feature Manual References

17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)

® 5.1.1 EFA (External Feature Access))

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 325

17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)

Operating Manual References

1.3.66 Time Service

2.1.6 Time Service Mode Control

17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)

Description

Toll Restriction (TRS) can prohibit extension users from making certain CO line calls, based on the Class of

Service (COS) assigned to them.

® 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS

® 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

® [602] Class of Service

Each COS is assigned a TRS level for each time mode; level 1 grants the highest level of authorization, allowing all CO line calls to be made, and level 7 grants the lowest level of authorization, prohibiting all CO line calls from being made. TRS levels 2 through 6 are used to restrict calls by combining preprogrammed Denied and

Exception Code Tables, explained below.

Each COS can also have a separate TRS level applicable to calls made using System Speed Dialing.

A TRS check is applied each time a dialed number is sent to a CO line after an extension user goes off-hook and seizes a line.

326 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)

[Flowchart]

An extension user tries to make a CO line call.

Was the number dialed using

System Speed Dialing?

Checks the TRS level of the extension's COS in the current time mode.

Yes

Is TRS Override by

System Speed Dialing enabled?

Yes

Checks the TRS level of the extension's COS for

System Speed Dialing.

Level 7

Level 1

What is the TRS level?

Levels 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

Is the dialed number found in an applicable Denied Code Table?

Yes

Is the dialed number found in an applicable Exception Code Table?

Yes

The call is denied.

The user hears a reorder tone.

The call is permitted.

Denied Code Tables

Denied Code Tables are preprogrammed lists containing the first few digits (leading number) of telephone numbers which may not be called. All outgoing CO line calls made by TRS level 2 through 6 users are compared to at least one Denied Code Table, and when the leading number of a dialed telephone number (not including the CO Line Access number) matches an entry found in the applicable table, the call is denied.

There are five Denied Code Tables. Each table applies to a corresponding TRS level as well as the level(s) preceding it, as explained below.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 327

17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)

Exception Code Tables

Exception Code Tables are preprogrammed lists of leading digits or complete telephone numbers which are checked against every dialed number prohibited by a Denied Code Table. When a user dials a number prohibited by a Denied Code Table, it is compared to at least one Exception Code Table. If the dialed number matches an entry found in the applicable Exception Code Table, the call is permitted.

There are five Exception Code Tables. Each table applies to a corresponding TRS level as well as the level(s) preceding it, as explained below.

TRS Override by System Speed Dialing

When TRS Override by System Speed Dialing is enabled for the PBX, each COS has an additional TRS level applicable only to calls made using System Speed Dialing.

® 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level for System Speed Dialing

® [300] TRS Override by System Speed Dialing

This allows extension users to use System Speed Dialing to make CO line calls which are normally prohibited by the TRS level of their assigned COS. If, for example, a user’s TRS level is 7, that user normally cannot make any CO line calls. However, if the same user’s TRS level for System Speed Dialing is level 1, the user can make a CO line call to any number stored in System Speed Dialing.

TRS Level

The TRS level is determined by the telephone codes set in the Denied Code Tables and Exception Code

Tables.

As shown in the table below, the Denied Code Tables for the higher levels are applied to all levels below it, and the Exception Code Tables for the lower levels are applied to all levels above it.

Denied Code Tables

Exception Code Tables

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Not Programmable

Table for Level 2

Tables for Levels 2 and 3

Tables for Levels 2 through 4

Tables for Levels 2 through 5

Tables for Levels 2 through 6

Not Programmable

Tables for Levels 2 through 6

Tables for Levels 3 through 6

Tables for Levels 4 through 6

Tables for Levels 5 and 6

Table for Level 6

Not Programmable

® 9.1 [7-1] Denied Code—

Denied Code Tables—Level 2–Level 6

® [301] TRS Denied Code

® 9.2 [7-2] Exception Code—

Exception Code Tables—Level 2–Level 6

® [302] TRS Exception Code

[Usage Example] Using this method, certain outgoing CO line calls (e.g., international/cellular phone/long distance) can be restricted as in the example below:

Restricted Allowed

Level 1

Level 2

(Boss)

•

International Calls

No restriction

•

Countries where Clients are

Located

•

Cellular Phone Calls

•

Long Distance Calls

•

Local Calls

328 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)

Level 3

(Secretary)

Restricted

•

International Calls

•

Cellular Phone Calls

Allowed

•

Boss’s Cellular Phone

•

Long Distance Calls

•

Local Calls

•

Local Calls

Level 4

(Operator)

•

International Calls

•

Cellular Phone Calls

•

Long Distance Calls

: : :

In this example, a level 1 user can make any CO line calls. A level 2 user can make international calls to the countries where clients are located, and can also make cellular phone/long distance/local calls. A level 3 user cannot make international/cellular phone calls apart from to the boss’s cellular phone, but can make long distance/local calls. A level 4 user cannot make any international/cellular phone/long distance calls, but can make local calls.

To set TRS as in the example above, it is necessary to program the Denied Code and Exception Code Tables as follows:

Denied Code Tables Exception Code Tables

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

011

1123755

Not Programmable

Leading number to deny international calls

Leading number to deny cellular phone calls

Leading number to deny long distance calls

011xx

1123755xx xx

–

Not Programmable

Leading number for countries to be allowed

Boss’s cellular phone number

Not required

[Programming Example: COS Settings]

COS

Day

TRS Level

Lunch Break

1 1

2 2

Night

TRS Level for System

Speed Dialing

® 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—

TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

® [501] TRS Level

® 9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous—

TRS Override by System Speed Dialing

® [509] TRS Level for System Speed Dialing

TRS Settings for Each Level

Through system programming, it is possible to select a different method of TRS. With this method, each level has its own separate set of denied codes and exception codes, which are only applied to that level.

® 9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous— TRS Table Mode for Level N (N=2_6)

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 329

17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Denied Code Tables

Not Programmable

Table for Level 2

Table for Level 3

Table for Level 4

Table for Level 5

Table for Level 6

Not Programmable

Exception Code Tables

Not Programmable

Table for Level 2

Table for Level 3

Table for Level 4

Table for Level 5

Table for Level 6

Not Programmable

® 9.1 [7-1] Denied Code—

Denied Code Tables—Level 2–Level 6

® [301] TRS Denied Code

® 9.2 [7-2] Exception Code—

Exception Code Tables—Level 2–Level 6

® [302] TRS Exception Code

[Usage Example] Using this method, it is possible to restrict certain CO line calls (e.g., international/cellular phone/long distance) on a department basis, as follows:

Restricted

Level 1

Level 2

(Engineering)

Level 3

(Overseas Sales)

Level 4

(Accounting)

•

International Calls

Cellular Phone Calls

International Calls

Long Distance Calls

Allowed

No restriction

•

Country where Factory is

Located

•

Cellular Phone Calls

•

Long Distance Calls

•

Local Calls

•

Company Cellular Phone

•

International Calls

•

Long Distance Calls

•

Local Calls

•

Cities where Clients are

Located

•

Cellular Phone Calls

•

Local Calls

In this example, a level 1 user can make any CO line calls. A level 2 user can only make international calls to the country where the factory is located, and can also make cellular phone/long distance/local calls. A level 3 user can only make cellular phone calls to the company cellular phone, and can also make any international/ long distance/local calls. A level 4 user cannot make any international calls or most long distance calls, but can make long distance calls to cities where clients are located, cellular phone calls and local calls.

To set TRS as in the example above, it is necessary to program the Denied Code and Exception Code Tables as follows:

Denied Code Tables Exception Code Tables

Level 1 Not Programmable Not Programmable

330 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

011

1123755

011

Denied Code Tables

Leading number to deny international calls

Leading number to deny cellular phone calls

Leading number to deny international and long distance calls

011xx

1123755xx xx

1315

1530

1123755

Exception Code Tables

Leading number for country to be allowed

Number for cellular phones to be allowed

Long distance numbers for states/cities to be allowed, and leading number of cellular phones

: :

Conditions

CAUTION

The software contained in the TRS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to recognize newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service.

Failure to upgrade the on-premise PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognize the new codes as they are established will restrict the customer and the users of the PBX from gaining access to the network and to these codes.

KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA.

•

TRS checks are performed for all calls made by:

–

Any CO line access (Idle Line Access, Trunk Group Access, S-CO Line Access)

–

Automatic Route Selection (ARS)

•

The PBX can also be programmed to perform a TRS check for numbers that contain non-digits ( or #).

By default, the PBX ignores ("No Check") any non-digits that are dialed, which is useful in preventing unauthorized calls which could possibly be made using certain telephone company exchanges.

9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous— TRS Check for Dial "* #"

•

TRS can also be programmed to check digits that are dialed after External Feature Access, such as when trying to transfer a call to an outside party. (

9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous— TRS Check after EFA

•

Host PBX Access Code/Special Carrier Access Code

TRS checks can be carried out on telephone numbers dialed using a Host PBX Access code (

® 8.1.5 Host

PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)) or Special Carrier Access

code (

® 16.1.5 Special Carrier Access Code).

Access Code is stored in the PBX

Access Code Type

Access Code is not stored in the PBX

Host PBX Access

Code

Special Carrier

Access Code

Access Code is dialed

TRS ignores the code and checks the remaining digits.

Access Code is not dialed

Number dialed is not a

CO line call, so TRS does not check the number.

TRS checks the entire number.

•

ARS

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 331

17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)

If ARS is applied to a dialed number, TRS will check the user-dialed number, not the modified number produced by ARS. You do not need to program ARS-modified numbers in any of the TRS Tables.

Additionally, when using ARS, TRS will ignore the Host PBX Access code or Special Carrier Access code.

•

Dialing Digit Restriction during Conversation

TRS can also limit the number of digits which may be dialed by an extension user while the user is engaged on a received CO line call. If the number of dialed digits exceeds the limit, the line will be disconnected.

9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous— Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits

•

It is possible to select through system programming whether the CO line is disconnected when the

Inter-digit time expires without the TRS check being completed.

9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous— Mode when Dial Time-out before TRS Check

–

If no disconnection is chosen, the TRS check will also be performed after the Inter-digit time expires.

–

If disconnection is chosen, the line will be disconnected when the CO line Inter-digit time expires. This also prevents EFA from being used.

This setting applies to all CO lines.

•

When one of the following features is used, the TRS level of the extension can be temporarily changed. If two or more of these features are used simultaneously (Dial Tone Transfer is used while the extension is locked, for example), the TRS level of the feature with the highest priority is applied for the duration of the call. The numbers below (1 through 4) indicate the priority of each feature, with 1 having the highest priority, and 4 having the lowest.

Dial Tone Transfer (

® 4.1.5 Dial Tone Transfer)

TRS Override by System Speed Dialing

Verification Code Entry/Walking COS (

® 19.1.1 Verification Code Entry, ® 20.1.1 Walking COS)

Extension Dial Lock (

PC Programming Manual References

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS

→ TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night

→ TRS Level for System Speed Dialing

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

→ Type

→ Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS

6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

→ Type

→ Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console

→ Type

→ Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)

9.1 [7-1] Denied Code

9.2 [7-2] Exception Code

9.3 [7-3] Special Carrier

9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous

PT Programming Manual References

[300] TRS Override by System Speed Dialing

[301] TRS Denied Code

[302] TRS Exception Code

[501] TRS Level

[509] TRS Level for System Speed Dialing

[602] Class of Service

332 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Feature Manual References

3.1.16 CO Line Access

16.1.7 Speed Dialing, System

17.1.5 Time Service

® 13.1.30 PT Programming) (five

17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 333

17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)

334 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Section 18 Features and Configurations—U

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 335

18.1.1 Upgrading the Software

18.1 U

18.1.1 Upgrading the Software

Description

It is possible to upload software from a PC to the PBX to upgrade the following:

Data File Storing Area

Main Processing (IPCMPR/IPCEMPR) software data

Default system programming data for each country/area

Operating system data area on IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card.

Country/area data area on the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card.

Language data for PT display Each language data area on the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card.

There are two types:

Type 1: Proprietary Telephone (PT) display except for PT system programming (

languages max.)

Type 2: PT system programming data (one language max.)

LPR (software on a slot card) software data Flash ROM on the appropriate optional services card (e.g.,

DHLC, DLC, T1, PRI, etc.)

Cell Station (CS) software data Flash ROM on the CS

Conditions

•

The software version of the IPCMPR/IPCEMPR card can be confirmed through system programming.

Installation Manual References

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

3.3.1 IPCMPR Card

KX-TDE600

3.3.1 IPCEMPR Card

PC Programming Manual References

3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary

PT Programming Manual References

[190] Main Processing (MPR) Software Version Reference

336 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Section 19 Features and Configurations—V

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 337

19.1.1 Verification Code Entry

19.1 V

19.1.1 Verification Code Entry

Description

An extension user can enter a verification code when calling from his own or any other extension, to change the Toll Restriction (TRS) level (

® 17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)) or to identify the call for accounting and billing

purposes. A verification code personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature.

Conditions

CAUTION

Keeping PINs secret.

Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.

Changing PINs regularly.

•

When a CO line call is made using Verification Code Entry:

– the Class of Service of the specified extension is applied (

® 3.1.21 COS (Class of Service))

– the Itemized Billing code of the specified extension is applied (

® 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route

Selection))

–

+ verification code is recorded on SMDR as the call originator, instead of the extension number of the actual extension used (

® 16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)).

•

Verification Code Entry through DISA

This feature is also available through DISA. (

•

Verification Code PIN

A verification code PIN must be assigned for each verification code through system programming or through manager programming.

•

Verification Code PIN Lock

If the wrong PIN is entered three times, the line will be disconnected. If the wrong PIN is entered a preprogrammed number of times successively, the PIN for the verification code will be locked. Only an extension assigned as the manager can unlock it. In this case, the PIN will be unlocked and cleared.

[Example of Verification Codes and Their Programming]

Location

0001

0002

Code

1111

2222

Name

PIN

Tom Smith 1234

John White 9876543210

: :

COS

Itemized Billing

Code for ARS

2323

4545

® 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code—

Verification Code

® [120] Verification Code

® 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code—

User Name

® [121] Verification Code Name

® 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code—

Verification Code PIN

® [122] Verification Code Personal Identification Number (PIN)

® 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code—

COS Number

338 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

19.1.2 Virtual PS

® [123] Verification Code COS Number

® 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code—

Itemized Billing Code for ARS

PC Programming Manual References

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Extension PIN—Lock Counter

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— User Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS Itemized Code

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS Itemized Code

8.3 [6-3] Verification Code

PT Programming Manual References

[120] Verification Code

[121] Verification Code Name

[122] Verification Code Personal Identification Number (PIN)

[123] Verification Code COS Number

Feature Manual References

11.1.1 Manager Features

® 9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations

Operating Manual References

1.3.67 Verification Code Entry

3.2.2 Manager Programming

19.1.2 Virtual PS

Description

An extension number can be assigned for a portable station (PS) without registering the PS unit itself. This is known as temporary registration. If a forward destination is then assigned for this PS, all calls to that extension number will be forwarded to the assigned destination. Using this setting to forward calls to outside destinations or destinations at another PBX allows those destinations to receive calls as if they were within the PBX. In addition, depending on system programming, the forward destination can use some of the features of the PBX.

This can be especially useful for a cellular phone user, who can use his cellular phone as if it were his extension when he is away from his desk.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 339

19.1.2 Virtual PS

[Example]

Telephone Company

Outside Caller

PBX-1

TIE Line Network

PBX-2

TIE Line

Dials "201"

Virtual PS 1

Extn. 201

Fwd to outside destination

Virtual PS 2

Extn. 202

Fwd to destination at other PBX

The following features can be accessed using this method:

Outside Destinations in

Incoming Call Distribution

Group

Feature

Network ICD Group

PS Roaming by Network ICD

Group

Simplified Voice Message

Description & Reference

A virtual PS allows calls to an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group to be answered by outside destinations or extensions at another PBX.

Using virtual PSs in an ICD Group, up to 4 other PBXs can be called at the same time.

® 13.1.18 Private Network Features—Network ICD Group

One PS can be registered at up to 4 PBXs. Using virtual PSs in an

ICD Group, all 4 PBXs can be called simultaneously to search for the

PS.

® 13.1.19 Private Network Features—PS Roaming by Network ICD

Group

Registering a virtual PS as the first extension of an ICD Group provides the ICD Group with a dedicated message box that is not shared with an actual extension.

® 16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)

Conditions

•

To use this feature, call forwarding to CO lines must be enabled through COS programming.

340 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group

PC Programming Manual References

3.47 [1-2] Portable Station—PS Registration and De-registration

PT Programming Manual References

[690] PS Registration

Feature Manual References

® 4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb),

19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group

Description

A VPS can be connected to extension ports of the PBX. The extension ports make a group, called a VM group.

This group has a floating extension number. The VM group can be the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. When receiving a call, the VPS can greet the caller offering them the option to leave a message or dial a number to reach the desired party. The VPS can record the message for each extension and leave notification on the corresponding extension, if the called extension is not able to answer calls.

VM Group Type

Type Description

VM (DTMF) Group

VM (DPT) Group

A group of SLT ports which use the Voice Mail DTMF

Integration features.

A maximum of 2 (for KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 8 (for

KX-TDE600) groups can be assigned.

A group of DPT ports which use the Voice Mail DPT (Digital)

Integration features.

•

A maximum of 2 (for KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200) or 8 (for

KX-TDE600) KX-TVS/KX-TVP systems can be connected to the PBX.

•

A maximum of one VM (DPT) group per KX-TVS/

KX-TVP can be assigned.

•

A maximum of 12 ports (24 channels) of the VPS can form each group.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 341

19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group

[Example]

DPT

Port

VM (DPT) Group

Floating extn. no. 500 (default)

Extn.101 Extn.102 Extn.103 Extn.104

DPT

Port

DPT

Port

DPT

Port

DPT

Port

PBX

SLT

Port

VM (DTMF) Group

Floating extn. no. 200

Extn.201 Extn.202 Extn.203 Extn.204

SLT

Port

SLT

Port

SLT

Port

SLT

Port

VPS

(DPT [Digital] Integration)

VPS

(DTMF Integration)

VM (DTMF) Group Assignment:

The VPS is connected to the SLT ports of the PBX. These SLT ports, as well as VM (DTMF) Group settings, must be configured to allow DTMF Integration, as shown in the following [Programming Example of

Extension Port] and [Programming Example of VM (DTMF) Group].

VM (DPT) Group Assignment:

The VPS is connected to the DPT ports of the PBX. These DPT ports, as well as VM (DPT) group settings, must be configured to allow DPT (Digital) Integration, as shown in the following [Programming Example of

Extension Port] and [Programming Example of VM (DPT) Group].

[Programming Example of Extension Port]

Slot

Port Port Type Extn. No.

DPT

S-Hybrid

101

102

201

202

Type*

VM (DPT)

SLT

301

302

401

402

DPT Property

Unit No.

of VPS*

Not assignable

Port No.

of VPS*

Not assignable

VM (DPT) Group 1

VM (DPT) Group 2

VM (DTMF) Group 1

VM (DTMF) Group 2

*1 ® 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—

DPT Type—Type

® [601] Terminal Device Assignment

® 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—

DPT Type—VM Unit No.

® 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—

DPT Type—VM Port No.

342 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group

[Programming Example of VM (DTMF) Group]

VM (DTMF)

Group No.

Floating

Extension

No.

300

400

Group

Name

Company C

Company D

Service

Mode

Extension No. of

Port Connected to

VPS Port

301

302

303

401 402 403

® 5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings

[Programming Example of VM (DPT) Group]

VM (DPT) Group No.

Floating Extension No.

500

200

Group Name

Company A

Company B

® 5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—

Floating Extension No.

® [660] VM Group Floating Extension Number

® 5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—

Group Name

Incoming Calls to VM Group

When incoming calls are received at the floating extension number of the VM group, calls will hunt starting at the lowest VM port number. In this case, the FWD and DND settings (

® 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)) for each extension port are disregarded.

It is programmable whether the calls queue when all extension ports in the group are busy through system programming. If the queuing is disabled through system programming, the call will be redirected to the destination, assigned on the trunk group which receives the call, by the Intercept Routing feature.

Conditions

•

It is possible to call an extension (extension port) in a VM group directly. If the calls are routed directly to the extension in the group, it is possible to enable some features (e.g., FWD, Idle Extension Hunting) on the extension in the group.

The Voice Mail DTMF/DPT (Digital) Integration (e.g., command transmit) is also available on the extension.

•

One-touch Voice Mail Feature Access

It is possible to assign a One-touch Dialing button for direct access to a Voice Mail feature. (

12.1.4 One-touch Dialing) For example, to access a mailbox (mailbox number 123) of the VPS (extension

number 165) directly, assign "165#6123" to a One-touch Dialing button. When pressing this button, the outgoing message (OGM) of the mailbox will be heard.

•

All ports in a VM (DPT) group must be connected to a single DHLC or DLC card.

PC Programming Manual References

3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port

→ DPT Type—Type

→ DPT Type—VM Unit No.

→ DPT Type—VM Port No.

5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings

5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings

5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 343

19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

PT Programming Manual References

[601] Terminal Device Assignment

[660] VM Group Floating Extension Number

Feature Manual References

19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

Forwarding)) The PBX sends a mailbox number of the forwarding extension to the VPS. Therefore the

19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Description

A Panasonic VPS that supports DPT (Digital) Integration (e.g., the KX-TVP200) can be connected to this PBX in a tightly integrated fashion.

DPT (Digital) Integration features can be used when the VPS is connected through DPT ports of the PBX.

Feature Explanation

Automatic Configuration—Quick Setup

The PBX informs the VPS of its extension numbers and the floating extension numbers of the incoming call distribution groups so that the VPS can create mailboxes with this data automatically.

FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS

If an extension user sets FWD to the VPS, incoming calls are forwarded to the VPS. (

® 6.1.6 FWD (Call

caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox number.

Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS

If an extension user sets Intercept Routing to the VPS, the intercepted CO line calls will be redirected to the VPS (

® 9.1.11 Intercept Routing). If the "Intercept to Mailbox" setting is enabled through system

programming, the PBX sends the mailbox number of the intercepted extension to the VPS. Therefore the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox number.

5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings— Intercept to Mailbox

Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS

An extension user can transfer a call to a mailbox of the VPS so that the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the desired extension. (

® 3.1.10 Call Transfer) The extension user should use the Voice Mail

(VM) Transfer button, when transferring a call to the mailbox of the VPS. When the extension user presses this button and enters the desired extension number, the PBX will transfer the call to the VM group and dial the mailbox number of the desired extension number with the required command (after the VPS answers the call). Therefore the caller can leave a message without knowing the mailbox number.

Transfer Recall to a Mailbox of the VPS

If a call is transferred to an extension via the Automated Attendant (AA) service of the VPS and the call is not answered within a preprogrammed Transfer Recall time, the PBX sends the mailbox number of the transfer destination extension to the VPS. Therefore the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox number. The "Transfer Recall to Mailbox" setting should be enabled through system programming to use this feature.

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Recall—Transfer Recall

5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings— Transfer Recall to Mailbox

® [201] Transfer Recall Time

Listening to a Recorded Message (Direct Mailbox Access)

If the VPS receives a message, the VPS will set the Message Waiting feature (e.g., turning on the Message button light, and showing the number of messages waiting on the display of a 6-line display PT) on the corresponding telephone as notification. (

® 11.1.3 Message Waiting) Thereby, the VPS notifies the

344 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

extension user that there is a message waiting in his mailbox. When the Message button light turns on, pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the messages stored in his mailbox without dialing such as a mailbox.

When the extension user dials an extension number of the VM (DPT) extension port or the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group from his extension, he can listen to the messages stored in his mailbox without dialing his mailbox number (Direct Mailbox Access). It is possible to disable this feature by COS programming on the VPS.

VPS CO Line Service & Automatic Time Mode Notification for Incoming Call

Multiple tenants can share a single VPS; each tenant does not require a dedicated VPS port. If the destination of the incoming CO line call is a VM (DPT) group, the PBX sends the VM trunk group number and time mode (day/lunch/break/night) of the tenant (

® 17.1.5 Time Service) assigned for the call to the

VPS. Therefore the VPS can send the assigned message (company greeting) to the caller. Corresponding

VM trunk group number and tenant number are determined by the setting of the incoming CO line call as follows:

DIL/TIE: the setting of each CO line port (

® 4.1.7 DIL (Direct In Line), ® 13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK

FEATURES)

12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL

→

Tenant Number

→

VM Trunk Group No.

DID: the setting of each location number for DID (

® 4.1.6 DID (Direct Inward Dialing))

12.3 [10-3] DID Table

→

Tenant Number

→

VM Trunk Group No.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 345

19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

[Example]

For DIL Calls:

Each location number can have its VM trunk group number (message number) and tenant number.

[DIL Programming Example]

Port No.

(CO Line No.)

Day

105

102

DIL Destination

Lunch

100

Break

105

100

102

Night

100

VM Trunk Group

No.

Tenant No.

[VPS Programming—Programming Example of Trunk Group Assignment]

Trunk Group No.

Day

Lunch

Break

Night

Day

Lunch

Break

Night

Company Greeting No.

Incoming Call Service

Custom Service 11

Custom Service 29

Custom Service 31

Custom Service 12

Custom Service 21

Custom Service 15

Custom Service 42

Custom Service 30

· ·

Explanation:

A CO line call handled by DIL distribution reaches a VM (DPT) group directly or by the Intercept Routing feature. According to the [DIL Programming Example] and [VPS Programming—Programming Example of Trunk Group Assignment], a caller will hear a corresponding company greeting of the VPS.

Time mode (day/lunch/break/night) of the preprogrammed tenant is applied to the DIL destination and company greeting number.

346 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

[Example]

For DID Calls:

Each location number can have its VM trunk group number (message number) and tenant number.

[DID Programming Example]

Location

No.

DID No.

DID Destination

Day Lunch Break Night

DID Name

VM Trunk

Group No.

Tenant

No.

0001

0002

123-4567 105

123-2468

102

100

105

102

100

John White

Tom Smith

[VPS Programming—Programming Example of Trunk Group Assignment]

Trunk Group No.

Day

Lunch

Break

Night

Day

Lunch

Break

Night

Company Greeting No.

Incoming Call Service

Custom Service 11

Custom Service 29

Custom Service 31

Custom Service 12

Custom Service 21

Custom Service 15

Custom Service 42

Custom Service 30

· ·

Explanation:

A DID call reaches a VM (DPT) group directly or by the Intercept Routing feature. According to the [DID

Programming Example] and [VPS Programming—Programming Example of Trunk Group Assignment], a caller will hear a corresponding company greeting of the VPS.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 347

19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Time mode (day/lunch/break/night) of the preprogrammed tenant is applied to the DID destination and company greeting number.

CO Line Call

123-2468 123-4567

Sends the following information:

· VM Trunk Group: 1

· Time mode: Day

PBX

Intercept

Tenant 1

(Company A)

Sends the following information:

· VM Trunk Group: 2

· Time mode: Lunch

Tenant 2

(Company B)

VPS

(Floating Extn. No. 500)

Extn. 105 Extn. 102

Caller’s Identification Notification to the VPS

When receiving a CO line call, the PBX sends the caller’s identification number/name to the VPS.

DID Number Notification to the VPS

When receiving a CO line call with a DID number, the PBX sends the DID number to the VPS. The number will be sent to the VPS even if the call reaches the VPS after redirection by, for example, the Intercept

Routing feature.

10.

Status Notification to the VPS

After the call is redirected by the VPS, the PBX sends the status of the redirected extension (e.g., busy) to the VPS.

11.

Paging by the VPS

The VPS can perform the Paging feature using the recorded message. (

® 13.1.1 Paging)

12.

Live Call Screening (LCS)

A PT or PS user can monitor his own mailbox while a caller is leaving a message and, if desired, answer the call by pressing the LCS button. When the caller is leaving a message in the mailbox, monitoring can be carried out in two ways: each PT user can choose which through personal programming (Live Call

Screening Mode Set). PS users cannot choose the way: only Private mode is available for them.

Hands-free mode: The user can monitor the call automatically through the built-in speaker.

Private mode: The user will hear a warning tone. To monitor the call, the user goes off-hook with the handset, MONITOR button, or SP-PHONE button. However, PS users cannot monitor the call with the speakerphone.

® 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— LCS Answer Mode

13.

Two-way Recording into the VPS

A PT user can record a conversation into his own mailbox or another mailbox, while talking on the phone.

The Two-way Record button is used to record into one’s own mailbox. The Two-way Transfer button is used to record into someone else’s mailbox.

348 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

Note

Before recording a Two-way telephone conversation, you should inform the other party that the conversation will be recorded.

14.

VPS Data Control by the PBX

The date and time settings of the VPS are controlled by the PBX.

15.

Remote FWD Setting by the VM

Extension FWD settings can be programmed using the VPS.

This feature may not be supported depending on the software version of the VPS.

Conditions

[General]

•

When programming a KX-TVA series VPS, if there is no option to connect to a KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

PBX, select the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 PBX.

•

Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button

A flexible button can be customized as the Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button with the floating extension number of the VM group as the parameter.

[Live Call Screening (LCS)]

•

This feature is not available for SIP extensions.

•

If an SLT is connected in parallel to a PT, and if LCS is activated for the PT in Private mode, both the PT and SLT can be used to monitor calls while in idle status. The SLT will ring to indicate a message is being recorded. The call can be monitored with the SLT by going off-hook. To intercept the call, press the FLASH/

RECALL button or flash the hookswitch. (

® 5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)). If the user

•

LCS Button

A flexible button can be customized as the LCS button.

•

Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

To prevent unauthorized monitoring, it is recommended the LCS user assign an extension PIN. This PIN will be required when setting LCS (

forgets the PIN, it can be cleared by an extension assigned as the manager.

•

Each extension can be programmed to either end recording or continue recording the conversation after the call is intercepted, through personal programming (LCS Mode Set [After Answering]).

® 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4— LCS Recording Mode

® 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4— LCS Recording Mode

•

To use the LCS feature on a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, LCS can only be turned on or off from the wired telephone. In Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, setting LCS on/off from the PS has no effect. (

20.1.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)

[Two-way Recording into the VPS]

•

Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer Button

A flexible button can be customized as the Two-way Record or the Two-way Transfer button. An extension number can be assigned to the Two-way Transfer button so that it can be used as a one-touch record button for the mailbox of the specified extension. (One-touch Two-way Transfer Button).

•

When all of the VPS ports are busy:

Pressing the Two-way Record button sends a warning tone

Pressing the Two-way Transfer button followed by an extension number sends a warning tone.

[Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS]

•

When transferring a CO line call to a mailbox of the VPS, users should use the VM Transfer button.

If using a standard Transfer button, users must dial "#6" after accessing the VPS, and confirm that the desired mailbox has been reached, before going on hook to complete the transfer.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 349

19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration

PC Programming Manual References

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Recall—Transfer Recall

5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings

5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4

→ LCS Recording Mode

→ LCS Answer Mode

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

→ Type

→ Extension Number (for Two-way Record)

→ Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)

→ Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)

→ Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4— LCS Recording Mode

6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

→ Type

→ Extension Number (for Two-way Record)

→ Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)

→ Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)

→ Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console

→ Type

→ Extension Number (for Two-way Record)

→ Extension Number (for Two-way Transfer)

→ Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)

→ Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)

7.1 [5-1] Doorphone— VM Trunk Group Number

12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL

→ Tenant Number

→ VM Trunk Group No.

12.3 [10-3] DID Table

→ Tenant Number

→ VM Trunk Group No.

PT Programming Manual References

[201] Transfer Recall Time

Feature Manual References

® 3.1.10 Call Transfer). The extension user should use the

Operating Manual References

1.3.69 Voice Mail Features—LCS (Live Call Screening)

1.3.70 Voice Mail Features—Two-way Record

1.3.71 Voice Mail Features—Voice Mail Integration

3.1.2 Personal Programming

3.2.2 Manager Programming

350 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

Description

The PBX and the VPS connected to the PBX can transmit commands using DTMF signals to each other. The

PBX sends preprogrammed commands using DTMF to the VPS automatically to change the answering service between Voice Mail (VM) service mode and Automated Attendant (AA) service mode or to inform the extension status (e.g., busy). The VPS sends the commands to the PBX like an SLT.

The following answering services and features are available:

Voice Mail (VM) Service Mode

When a caller reaches the VPS, the VPS greets and guides the caller to leave a voice message for a specified mailbox.

[Example]

The VPS sends the message to the caller, "Thank you for calling Panasonic. Please enter the mailbox number of the person you wish to leave your message for."

The caller dials the mailbox number. Then, the dialed number is sent to the VPS via the PBX.

The VPS sends the personal greeting to the caller, "You have reached Mike’s voice mail. I am sorry

I cannot take your call right now. Please leave a message and I will call you back."

The caller leaves a message.

If the call reroutes to the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF) Group or the extension in the VM

(DTMF) group by such as the FWD feature, when the VPS answers the call, the PBX will dial the mailbox number of the corresponding group or extension and any other digits required to the VPS automatically using the caller-dialed number (Follow on ID). In this case, the caller can reach a mailbox without knowing the mailbox number.

[Available Features for Follow on ID] a.

FWD to a Mailbox

Intercept Routing to a Mailbox

Call Transfer to a Mailbox

Listening to a Message in a Mailbox

Automated Attendant (AA) Service Mode

The VPS greets and guides the caller to the desired extension directly without operator assistance.

® AA Service, AA ® VM Service

It is possible to switch the service mode assigned on the VPS port, from the VM service to AA service or vice versa.

System Explanation

Service Mode Assignment

Assign the service mode, VM service or AA service, to the VM (DTMF) group to correspond with the assignment of the VPS.

5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings— Type

DTMF Command Assignment

Assign the DTMF command to suit the VPS settings.

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 351

19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

→

VM DTMF Command—Recording Message

→

VM DTMF Command—Listening Message

→

VM DTMF Command—Switching to AA

→

VM DTMF Command—Switching to VM

Switching to VM

Switching to AA

Recording message

Listening message

Command (Default)

Note

H = Mailbox Number

VM Service a.

FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS

The PBX sends a mailbox number of the corresponding extension to the VPS when a call is forwarded from an extension to the VPS. Therefore the caller can leave a message for the called extension without knowing the mailbox number.

[FWD to the VPS Sequence Selection]

If an extension user sets FWD to the VPS, any incoming call will be forwarded to the VPS.

It is also possible to send the AA command, even in the VM service mode, when calls are forwarded so that the caller can be directed to an extension rather than a mailbox. This can be performed by selecting "AA" through system programming.

® 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings— Others—FWD to the VPS Sequence

Transmitted Command

Parameter

Answer by Mailbox

(Default)

None

In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode

Switching to VM command +

Recording message command

(#6 + H [H = Mailbox No.])

Recording message command

(H [H = Mailbox No.])

Switching to AA command (#8) Switching to AA command (#8)

(DTMF commands are not sent. Work with default of the VPS.)

Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS

The PBX sends a mailbox number of the corresponding extension to the VPS when a CO line call is intercepted from an extension to the VPS. Therefore the caller can leave a message for the called extension without knowing the mailbox number.

[Intercept Routing to the VPS Sequence Selection]

If an extension user sets Intercept Routing to the VPS, the intercepted CO line calls will be redirected to the VPS.

It is also possible to send the AA command, even in the VM service mode, when calls are intercepted so that the caller can be directed to an extension rather than a mailbox. This can be performed by selecting "AA" through system programming.

® 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings— Others—Intercept Routing to the VPS

Sequence

352 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

Parameter

Answer by Mailbox

None (Default)

[Example of a) & b)]

CO Line Call

Transmitted Command

In AA Service Mode In VM Service Mode

Switching to VM command +

Recording message command

(#6 + H [H = Mailbox No.])

Recording message command

(H [H = Mailbox No.])

Switching to AA command (#8) Switching to AA command (#8)

(DTMF commands are not sent. Work with default of the VPS.)

Operator

Transfer

PBX

Extn. 102

Sent "#6" + "102".

mailbox number

Switching to VM command

FWD, Intercept

VPS (In AA service mode)

VM Port 1 VM Port 2

VM (DTMF)

Group

VM Port X

VM Port 3

Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS

An extension user can transfer a call to a mailbox of the VPS so that the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the desired extension (

Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button, when transferring a call to the mailbox of the VPS. When the extension user presses this button and enters the desired extension number, the PBX will transfer the call to the

VM group and dial the mailbox number of the desired extension with the required command (after the

VPS answers the call). Therefore the caller can leave a message without knowing the mailbox number.

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

→

Type

→

Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)

6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

→

Type

→

Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console

→

Type

→

Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 353

19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

[Performance of Pressing the VM Transfer Button and Entering an Extension Number]

Transmitted Command

In AA Service Mode

Switching to VM command + Recording message command (#6 + H [H = Mailbox No.])

In VM Service Mode

Recording message command (H [H =

Mailbox No.])

[Example]

CO Line Call

PBX

Sent "#6" + "103".

mailbox number

Switching to VM command

Transfer with VM Transfer button + extension number (103)

Extension

(Operator)

VPS (In AA service mode)

VM Port 1 VM Port 2

VM (DTMF)

Group

VM Port X

VM Port 3

Listening to a Recorded Message

If the VPS receives a message, the VPS will set the Message Waiting feature on the corresponding telephone to notify the extension user that there is a message waiting in his mailbox. The Message button light of the extension will turn on (

® 11.1.3 Message Waiting), thereby notifying the extension

user that there is a message waiting in his mailbox. When the Message button light turns on, pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the messages stored in his mailbox without dialing such as a mailbox number. It is programmable whether the PBX or the VPS cancels the Message

Waiting feature (e.g., turning off the Message button light).

5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings— Others—Message Waiting Lamp Control

When the PBX is selected, the Message Waiting feature is canceled after the extension user has accessed the VPS. When the VPS is selected, the Message Waiting feature is canceled after the extension user has listened to messages stored in his mailbox.

[Performance of Pressing the MESSAGE Button]

Transmitted Command

In AA Service Mode

Switching to VM command + Listening message command

(#6 + H [H = Mailbox No.])

In VM Service Mode

Listening message command ( H [H =

Mailbox No.])

354 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

[Example]

PBX

Pressing the

MESSAGE button

Extn. 102

Sent "#6" + " ", "102".

Listening message command, mailbox number

Switching to VM command

VPS (In AA service mode)

Mailbox for

Extn. 102

AA Service

If the VPS transfers the call using the AA service, the PBX will inform the VPS of the status of the called destination with the preprogrammed DTMF status signal so that the VPS can confirm the status of the extension without listening to the system tones (e.g., ringback tone).

Assign the DTMF status signal to suit the VPS settings.

[DTMF Status Signals and Conditions]

Status

RBT (ringback tone)

BT (busy tone)

ROT (reorder tone)

DND (DND tone)

Answer

FWD VM RBT (FWD to

Voice Mail ringback tone)

FWD VM BT (FWD to

Voice Mail busy tone)

FWD EXT RBT (FWD to extension ringback tone)

Confirm (confirmation tone)

Disconnect

Condition

The PBX is ringing the corresponding extension.

The called extension is busy.

The dialed number is invalid.

The called extension has set DND. (

® 4.1.10 DND

(Do Not Disturb))

The called extension has answered the call.

The called extension has set FWD to VPS and the

PBX is calling another port of the VPS.

The called extension has set FWD to VPS and all ports of the VPS are busy.

The PBX is calling an extension other than the one dialed. FWD or Idle Extension Hunting (

® 9.1.9 Idle

Extension Hunting) may be assigned by the called

extension.

The PBX receives confirmation that the feature has been successfully set or canceled (e.g., Message

Waiting) on the extension.

The caller has hung up.

Default Command

5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

→

VM DTMF Status Signal—Ringback Tone

→

VM DTMF Status Signal—Busy Tone

→

VM DTMF Status Signal—Reorder Tone

→

VM DTMF Status Signal—DND Tone

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 355

19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

→

VM DTMF Status Signal—Answer

→

VM DTMF Status Signal—Confirm

→

VM DTMF Status Signal—Disconnect

→

VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to VM Ringback Tone

→

VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to VM Busy Tone

→

VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to Extension Ringback Tone

[Example]

Busy

Extn.

102

PBX

Transfer

Sent "2".

Busy

Status

VPS

An incoming call reaches the VPS. The VPS greets the caller: "Thank you for calling

Panasonic. If you know the extension number of the person you wish…".

The caller dials the extension number (extn.

102). The VPS will transfer the call to the extension via the PBX.

If the extension is not available, the PBX sends DTMF status signal of the extension

(busy status) to the VPS.

The VPS receives the DTMF status signal and send the appropriate message to the caller: "Sorry. The extension is busy. Would you like to leave a message…".

Conditions

•

Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button

A flexible button can be customized as the Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button with the floating extension number of the VM group as the parameter.

•

It is possible to assign the time period between when the VPS answers the call and the PBX sends the

Follow on ID to the VPS.

® 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings— Timing—Waiting Time before Sending Follow on

•

It is possible to assign the time period between when the VPS transfers the call using the AA service to the PBX and the PBX sends the DTMF status signal to the VPS.

® 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings— Timing—DTMF Length for VM

•

It is possible to select whether the mailbox number is the same as the extension number, or the mailbox number is programmable for each extension number and incoming call distribution group (Mailbox Access

ID).

® 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous— Programmed

Mailbox No.

® 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Programmed Mailbox No.

® 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Programmed Mailbox No.

•

The Inter-digit time for the DTMF command and for DTMF status signal is programmable.

® 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

→

Timing—Inter-digit Time

→

Timing—Waiting Time before Sending VM DTMF Status Signal

•

Data Line Security is set automatically on the extensions in the VM (DTMF) group to achieve proper recording. (

® 4.1.1 Data Line Security)

356 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

PC Programming Manual References

4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Voice Mail (Caller from VM to CO)—On-hook Wait Time

5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous— Programmed Mailbox No.

5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings

5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Programmed Mailbox No.

6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button

→ Type

→ Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Programmed Mailbox No.

6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button

→ Type

→ Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console

→ Type

→ Extension Number (for Voice Mail Transfer)

Feature Manual References

PIN (Personal Identification Number)) at another extension, to make the following types of call using his Class

Operating Manual References

1.3.71 Voice Mail Features—Voice Mail Integration

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 357

19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration

358 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Section 20 Features and Configurations—W

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 359

20.1.1 Walking COS

20.1 W

20.1.1 Walking COS

Description

A user can enter his extension number and extension personal identification number (PIN) (

® 5.1.6 Extension

of Service, including TRS level, overriding the other extension’s Class of Service.

•

CO line call

•

TIE line call

•

Intercom call

•

External Relay Control (

® 5.1.8 External Relay)

After performing Walking COS, the following features are also available for the specified extension:

•

Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) setting (

® 4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb), ® 6.1.6 FWD

(Call Forwarding))

•

Incoming Call Distribution Group Log-in/Log-out (

® 9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out)

•

Absent Message setting (

® 1.1.1 Absent Message)

•

Extension Dial Lock (

®5.1.4 Extension Dial Lock)

•

Time Service—Changing the Time Mode (day/lunch/break/night) (

® 3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation))

•

CLIP number setting (CLIP ID) (

Conditions

•

When a CO line call is made using Walking COS:

– the Class of Service of the specified extension is applied (

® 3.1.21 COS (Class of Service))

– the Itemized Billing code of the specified extension is applied (

® 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route

Selection))

– the specified extension number is recorded on SMDR as the call originator, instead of the extension number of the actual extension used (

® 16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)).

•

Walking COS is also available through DISA. (

•

Extension PIN

An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature (

(Personal Identification Number)). If the wrong PIN is entered three times, the line will be disconnected.

•

This feature can not be used for extensions which the extension being operated is prevented from calling by Internal Call Block. (

® 9.1.14 Internal Call Block)

PC Programming Manual References

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— User Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Remote Operation by Other Extension

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN

6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN

PT Programming Manual References

[005] Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)

360 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

20.1.2 Walking Extension

Feature Manual References

Operating Manual References

1.3.73 Walking COS

20.1.2 Walking Extension

Description

It is possible for an extension user to trade extension settings with another extension.

When Walking Extension is executed, all extension settings (extension number, Class of Service (COS),

One-touch Dialing memory, etc.) of the "old" extension are exchanged with the "new" extension.

This feature is useful when an extension user moves desks, or when an extension user has no permanent desk.

This feature is also known as Walking Station.

Conditions

•

This feature allows extension settings to be switched between PTs (including IP-PTs) and SLTs. Moving between tenants is also possible.

•

Incoming calls to your extension will reach you at your new location.

•

An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature. (

(Personal Identification Number))

•

If a DSS Console is connected to a PT and the DSS Console is continuously used with the PT after the

Walking Extension has been performed, the new extension number of the PT must be assigned as the paired extension through system programming.

•

If the Walking Extension feature is performed at the same time that the target extension is being programmed by PC, the Walking Extension feature may not work properly. (

® 13.1.6 PC Programming)

•

If this feature is performed using an extension with a Bluetooth wireless headset connected, the Bluetooth device cannot be used with the new extension. To use the Bluetooth wireless headset, register it to the new extension.

PC Programming Manual References

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Walking Extension

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN

6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Pair Extension

PT Programming Manual References

[007] DSS Console Paired Telephone

Feature Manual References

9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 361

20.1.3 Walking Extension, Enhanced

Operating Manual References

1.3.74 Walking Extension

20.1.3 Walking Extension, Enhanced

Description

It is possible to use the Walking Extension feature with extensions in Service-in (functions normally) and

Service-out (cannot make CO line calls or receive calls) modes, allowing extensions and locations (i.e., telephones) to be utilized more efficiently. Extensions can be set to Service-out mode when the extension user is not using the extension or to prevent calls from being made or received when no one is using the location.

The extension can then be changed to Service-in mode when the extension user wishes to use the extension.

Enhanced Walking Extension can be utilized as follows:

–

When a single extension user uses multiple telephones

Extension users can switch locations with a Service-out extension. This allows extension users to use their settings at another location while the previous location is in service-out mode. This is ideal for when extension users need to work at multiple locations, such as another department, branch office, or at home.

–

When multiple extension users use the same telephone

Extension users can change the service status of their Service-out extension to Service-in mode and switch locations with another extension with a simple operation. This is ideal for when the same telephone is used by multiple extension users who work in shifts.

Service-out mode

When an extension is in Service-out mode, the DND and Extension Lock features are set on the extension, preventing the extension from making CO line calls and receiving calls.

[Example]

Extension settings can be used at other locations as follows:

Main Office

Extn. 101

Service-in

Service-out

Extn. 101

Service-out

Service-in

Extn. 102

Service-out

Service-in Service-out Service-out

Branch Office

Service-out Service-out Service-in

Extn. 102

Service-out

Extn. 102

Service-out

Extn. 101

Service-in

Explanation:

The extension user of extension 101 changes to Service-out mode at the main office. He then changes his extension to Service-in mode and switches extension settings at the branch office.

Virtual Locations

Instead of assigning all extensions to telephones, it is possible to store unused extensions (i.e., Service-out mode) on a preinstalled extension card (i.e., settings are made but no physical location is utilized). When the

362 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

20.1.4 Whisper OHCA

extension needs to be used, the extension can switch locations and service status with an extension on a physical location (i.e., a location with a telephone).

[Example]

Extension settings can be switched allowing multiple extension users to use the same telephone as follows:

Virtual

Location

Extn. 101

Service-in

Service-out

Extn. 101

Service-out

Extn. 101

Service-out

Service-in Service-out Service-in

Extn. 102

Service-out

Virtual

Location

Extn. 102

Service-out

Virtual

Location

Service-in

Extn. 102

Service-in

Explanation:

The extension user of extension 101 changes to service out mode. The extension user of extension 102 switches extension settings and changes his extension to Service-in mode.

Conditions

•

This feature is not available for PSs, T1 OPX extensions, and SIP extensions.

•

An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature. (

(Personal Identification Number))

PC Programming Manual References

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Walking Extension

Feature Manual References

20.1.2 Walking Extension

Operating Manual References

1.3.75 Walking Extension, Enhanced

20.1.4 Whisper OHCA

Description

An extension user can speak to a busy extension through the handset.

Conditions

•

Class of Service (COS) programming determines which extensions can use this feature.

•

This feature is available when the calling and called extension use one of the following telephones:

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 363

20.1.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

–

KX-DT300 series

–

KX-T7600 series

–

KX-T7400 series

–

IP-PT

•

If the Whisper OHCA feature cannot be used due to COS or telephone type, a call waiting tone will be sent to the called extension. (

® 3.1.12 Call Waiting Tone)

•

If the called extension does not use a KX-DT300, KX-T7600, or KX-T7400 series telephone or an IP-PT, but forces Whisper OHCA, the announcement may be heard by the other party.

•

It is possible to enable Whisper OHCA on any telephone, however, it may not function properly (the caller’s voice may be heard by both callers, for example).

•

While an extension is receiving a Whisper OHCA, if the extension user places the current CO line call on hold or transfers the current intercom call or CO line call, the Whisper OHCA will become disabled and the calling extension will hear a ringback tone.

•

While an extension is receiving a Whisper OHCA, if the extension user places the current intercom call on hold, the called extension can talk to the calling extension through the handset.

PC Programming Manual References

4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature

→ BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override

→ BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— OHCA / Whisper OHCA

Feature Manual References

® 3.1.18 Conference, ® 5.1.3 Executive Busy Override, ®

Operating Manual References

1.3.13 Call Waiting Tone

20.1.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

Description

A portable station (PS) can be used in parallel with a wired telephone, i.e., a digital proprietary telephone (DPT), analog proprietary telephone (APT), or single line telephone (SLT), allowing an extension user to make or receive calls with either the wired telephone or the PS. The PS will use the same extension number as the wired telephone, and many of the wired telephone’s extension settings (Call Forwarding [FWD], Class of

Service [COS], etc.) are also used by the PS.

This mode is similar to XDP Parallel mode used to pair DPTs with SLTs. (

® 5.1.7 Extension Port

Configuration)

In order to use a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel mode, the mode must be turned on using the PS.

364 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

20.1.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

[Example of Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, XDP Parallel Mode]

PBX

CSIF Card

Cell Station

DHLC Card Extension Card

DPT

Wireless Phone

(or any SLT)

XDP Parallel Mode

Extn. 102

Wired Telephone

(APT, DPT, SLT)

Wireless XDP

Parallel Mode

Extn. 103

Conditions

•

Whether or not a PS is allowed to pair itself with a wired telephone is determined by the COS assigned to the extension number of the wired telephone.

•

Wireless XDP Parallel mode can be turned on or off using the PS only.

•

To switch between the wired telephone and the PS during a conversation, simply go off-hook with the other telephone. Alternatively, to seize a separate line, use another method, such as pressing a CO or

INTERCOM button.

In addition, going off-hook with the other telephone seizes a separate line when the extension is:

Engaged in a conference call. (

13.1.14 Privacy Release)

Screening a call using Live Call Screening (LCS) or when recording a conversation using Two-way

Record. (

Receiving an Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA). (

Announcement))

Being monitored by another extension. (

® 3.1.6 Call Monitor)

When the extension has a call on consultation hold. (

® 5.1.3 Executive Busy Override)

•

When a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel mode is on a call, other extension users cannot perform the following features when they call this extension:

–

Executive Busy Override (

–

Whisper OHCA (

® 20.1.4 Whisper OHCA)

•

When a PS is paired with a wired telephone, most of the extension settings assigned to the wired telephone

(extension number, extension name, etc.) will be used by the PS, and the PS will use its own extension settings once again when Wireless XDP Parallel mode is canceled. Note, however, that the following extension settings of the wired telephone are copied to the extension settings of the PS when Wireless

XDP Parallel mode is activated, and will remain in effect for the PS after the mode is canceled.

–

Call Waiting Setting (

® 3.1.11 CALL WAITING FEATURES)

–

FWD/Do Not Disturb (DND) Setting (

® 4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb), ® 6.1.6 FWD (Call

Forwarding))

–

Call Pickup Deny Setting (

® 3.1.8 Call Pickup)

–

Executive Busy Override Deny Setting (

® 5.1.3 Executive Busy Override)

–

Itemized Billing Code for Automatic Route Selection (ARS) (

® 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route

Selection))

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 365

20.1.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

–

Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) Number and CLIP Number Selection (

® 3.1.15 CLIP

(Calling Line Identification Presentation))

–

Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) and Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR)

Settings (

® 3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation))

–

Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) (

® 5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification

Number))

–

COS Programming (

® 3.1.21 COS (Class of Service))

–

Extension User Group (

® 3.1.7 Call Park, ® 3.1.10 Call

–

Transfer Recall Destination for Call Transfer and Call Park (

Transfer)

•

The PS will retain its original settings for the following items even when in Wireless XDP Parallel mode.

These settings can be set on the wired telephone and PS independently, and the settings can be different.

–

Ring Tone Pattern Table Selection (

® 15.1.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection)

–

Preferred Line Assignment—Incoming (

® 10.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming)

–

Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing (

® 10.1.3 Line Preference—Outgoing)

–

Hot Line Setting (

® 8.1.6 Hot Line)

–

Display Language (

® 4.1.9 Display Information)

–

ISDN Bearer Mode (

® 9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES)

–

Flexible Button Assignment (

® 6.1.3 Flexible Buttons)

–

Transfer Recall Destination for Call Transfer and Call Park (The setting assigned to the wired telephone will first be copied to the PS’s extension settings, then can be changed for the PS if necessary.) (

3.1.7 Call Park,

® 5.1.5 Extension Feature Clear)

If an extension number is required when changing any PS settings while in Wireless XDP Parallel mode, use the original extension number assigned to the PS, not the extension number of the paired (wired) telephone.

•

If the Extension Feature Clear is performed, the corresponding extension data for both the wired telephone and the PS will be cleared. (

•

When a call arrives, both the wired telephone and the PS will ring. However, when one of the following settings is made, only the telephone which was used to make the setting will ring.

–

Automatic Callback Busy (

® 1.1.4 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on))

–

Transfer Recall (

–

Hold Recall (

® 3.1.4 Call Hold)

–

Call Park Recall (

® 3.1.7 Call Park)

PC Programming Manual References

3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— DPT Type—Type

3.47 [1-2] Portable Station—PS Registration and De-registration

4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set / Cancel

4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Accept Wireless XDP

Parallel Mode Set by PS

6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Wireless XDP

PT Programming Manual References

[515] Wireless XDP Parallel Mode for Paired Telephone

Feature Manual References

13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone

366 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Operating Manual References

1.3.77 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

20.1.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 367

20.1.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode

368 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Section 21 Appendix

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 369

21.1 Capacity of System Resources

System

Item

Absent Message—Extension

Absent Message—System

Call Park Zone

Conference

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 KX-TDE600

1 x 16 characters

8 x 16 characters

100

3–8 parties per conference

(32 parties total)

Each shelf: 3–8 parties per conference (32 parties total)

32 digits, 1000 entries

1–5 digits

COS

DID Table

Extension number

Extension Personal Identification Number

(PIN)

Host PBX Access Code

Number of Characters of Name

Printing message

Queuing Time Table

Ring Tone Pattern Plan

Simultaneous Programmers

SMDR Call Storage

Special Carrier Access Code

Tenant

Time Service Holiday

Verification Code

Verification Code Personal Identification

Number (PIN)

10 digits, 1 entry/extension

10 digits, 10 entries/trunk group

64 128

• one system programmer + 63 personal programmers

• one manager programmer + 63 personal programmers

•

64 personal programmers

200 calls (10 000 calls w/

IPCMEC card)

16 digits, 20 entries

1000 calls (20 000 calls w/

IPCMEC card)

16 digits, 100 entries

8 32

4 digits, 1000 entries

10 digits, 1000 entries

Dialing

Item

Emergency Call

Hot Line

Personal Speed Dialing

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 KX-TDE600

32 digits, 10 entries

32 digits

32 digits, 100 entries/extn.

370 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Item

Quick Dialing

Redial

System Speed Dialing

Groups

Item

Call Pickup Group

Idle Extension Hunting Group

Incoming Call Distribution Group

Paging Group

PS Ring Group

Trunk Group

VM (DPT) Group

VM (DTMF) Group

TRS

Item

TRS Level

TRS Denied Code

TRS Exception Code

ARS

Item

Routing Plan Table

Leading Number Table

Leading Number Exception Table

ARS Carrier

Itemized Billing Code

Authorization Code for Tenant

Authorization Code for Trunk Group

Document Version 2009-12

21.1 Capacity of System Resources

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 KX-TDE600

8 digits, 4080 entries

32 digits

32 digits, 1000 entries/tenant

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 KX-TDE600

64 96

64 (16 extensions/group) 128 (16 extensions/group)

128 (128 extensions/group)

32 96

2 groups x 12 ports (24 channels)

2 groups x 32 channels

8 groups x 12 ports (24 channels)

8 groups x 32 channels

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 KX-TDE600

16 digits, 100 entries/level

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 KX-TDE600

16 entries

16 digits, 1000 entries

16 digits, 200 entries

48 entries

10 48

10 digits

16 digits

10 digits

Feature Manual 371

21.1 Capacity of System Resources

Call Log and Message Waiting

Item

Outgoing Call Log—PT

Outgoing Call Log—PS

Incoming Call Log—PT

Incoming Call Log—PS + Incoming Call

Distribution Group

Message Waiting—PS + Incoming Call

Distribution Group

Message Waiting—PT + SLT

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

100 records/extn.

1520 records/system

100 records/extn.

640 records/system

100 records/extn.

3040 records/system

100 records/extn. or group

Total 2048 records/system

256

512

Voice Message

Item

Outgoing Message (OGM)

OGM Total Recording Time

Simplified Voice Message (SVM)

SVM Total Recording Time

KX-TDE600

100 records/extn.

3200 records/system

100 records/extn.

2560 records/system

100 records/extn.

6400 records/system

100 records/extn. or group

Total 6400 records/system

640

1032

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 KX-TDE600

MSG4 Card: 8 minutes; ESVM4 Card: 20 minutes

(at High recording quality)

IPCMPR/IPCEMPR Card: 125 messages;

ESVM4 Card: 250 messages per card/block

20, 60, or 120 minutes (depending on the recording quality)

Hospitality Features

Item

Hotel Operator

Networking

Item

TIE Line Routing and Modification Table

Leading Number

PBX Code

NDSS: Monitored PBXs

NDSS: Registered Extensions for Monitor

PBX

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

KX-TDE600

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

32 entries

3 digits

7 digits

250

KX-TDE600

372 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

21.1 Capacity of System Resources

CTI

Item

PC Console

PC Phone

Password

Item

System Password for Installer

System Password for Administrator—for PC

Programming

System Password for User—for PC

Programming

System Password for Administrator—for PT

Programming

System Password for User—for PT

Programming

Manager Password

Programmer Code

Item

Installer Level Programmer Code

Administrator Level Programmer Code

User Level Programmer Code

KX-TDE100

KX-TDE200

128

KX-TDE600

128

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

4 – 10 characters

KX-TDE600

4 – 10 characters

4 – 10 digits

KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200

4 – 16 characters

0 – 16 characters

KX-TDE600

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 373

21.2 Tones/Ring Tones

Tone Patterns (Default)

1 s

Confirmation Tone 1

Confirmation Tone 2

Confirmation Tone 3

Confirmation Tone 4

Confirmation Tone 5

Dial Tone 1

Dial Tone 2

Dial Tone 3

Dial Tone 4

Busy Tone

Reorder Tone

Ringback Tone 1

Ringback Tone 2

DND Tone

CO Line Call Limit

Warning Tone

374 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Tone Patterns (Default)

Hold Alarm Tone

Call Waiting Tone 1

1 s

Call Waiting Tone 2

Ring Tone Patterns (Default)*

1 s

Single

Double

Triple

S-Double

15 s

21.2 Tones/Ring Tones

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 375

21.3 Supported Management Information Base (MIB) Table

21.3 Supported Management Information Base (MIB)

Table

System Group (1.3.6.1.2.1.1)

Object ID

sysDescr

Item

sysObjectID sysUpTime sysContact sysName sysLocation sysService

Description

Information of Hardware type and Software version of the

Device.

Object identifier of this product.

Elapsed time since the system was restarted.

Device Administrator.

Name of Device.

Installation Location of Device.

Support Layer.

Interface Group (1.3.6.1.2.1.2)

Object ID

2.1.5

2.1.6

2.1.7

2.1.8

2.1.9

2.1

2.1.1

2.1.2

2.1.3

2.1.4

ifNumber

IfTable (NA)

IfEntry (NA) ifIndex ifDescr ifType ifMtu

Item

ifSpeed ifPhysAddress ifAdminStatus ifOperStatus ifLastChange

2.1.10

2.1.11

2.1.12

2.1.14

2.1.15

ifInOctets ifInUcastPkts ifInNUcastPkts ifInErrors ifInUnKnownProtos

Description

The number of Network Devices.

Management Table by each Network Device.

Components of ifTable.

Each interface identifier.

Explanation of Interface.

Type of Interface.

Maximum Datagram Length which can be sent/received.

Maximum Transfer Speed.

Physical Address (MAC Address).

The desired state of the interface.

The current operational state of the interface.

The value of sysUpTime at the time the interface entered its current operational state (up or down).

The number of Octets received.

The number of Unicast Packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.

The number of Non Unicast Packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.

The number of inbound Packets that contained errors.

The number of Packet received which are discarded because of an unknown/unsupported protocol.

376 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Object ID

2.1.16

2.1.17

Item

ifOutOctets ifOutUcastPkts

2.1.18

ifOutNUcastPkts

2.1.21

2.1.22

ifOutQLen ifSpecific

IP Group (1.3.6.1.2.1.4)

Object ID

ipForwarding

Item

3 ipDefaultTTL ipInReceives ipnHdrErrors ipInAddrError ipInUnknownProtos ipInDiscards ipInDelivers ipOutRequests ipReasmTimeout ipReasmReqds ipReasmOKs ipReasmFails ipFragOKs ipFragFails ipFragCreates

Document Version 2009-12

21.3 Supported Management Information Base (MIB) Table

Description

The number of Octets transmitted.

The number of Unicast Packets which are received from upper protocol.

The number of Non Unicast Packets which are received from upper protocol.

The length of the output packet queue (in packets).

Relevant MIB object identifier.

Description

The value which indicates operation availability as a router

(whether Datagram is transferred or not).

Default value for IP Packet TTL (Time to Live).

The total number of Packets received (including packet received in error).

The number of Packets discarded due to errors in their header.

The number of Packets discarded because IP Address of the destination was invalid.

The number of Packets discarded because the protocol was unknown/unsupported.

The number of incoming Packets discarded because of an insufficient reception buffer.

The total number of Packets received (including ICMP) normally.

The total number of IP Packets (ICMP) which are tried to be transmitted (relay Packet is not included).

The maximum number of seconds required in the buffer to rebuild a fragmented Packet.

The number of Packets that required rebuilding from a fragmented state.

The number of Packets that were rebuilt correctly from a fragmented state.

The number of Packets that could not be rebuilt correctly from a fragmented state.

The number of Packets that were fragmented correctly.

The number of Packets that could not be fragmented correctly.

The number of IP datagrams created due to fragmentation.

Feature Manual 377

21.3 Supported Management Information Base (MIB) Table

Object ID

Item

ipAddrTable (NA)

20.1

20.1.1

20.1.2

20.1.3

20.1.4

20.1.5

IpAddrEntry (NA)

IpAdEntAddr

IpAdEntIfindex

IpAdEntNetMask ipAdEntBcastAddr

IpAdEntReasmMaxSize

ICMP Group (1.3.6.1.2.1.5)

Object ID Item

1 cmpInMsgs

8 icmpInErrors icmpInEchos icmpInEchoReps icmpOutMsgs icmpOutErrors

22 icmpOutEchos icmpOutEchoReps

TCP Group (1.3.6.1.2.1.6)

Object ID Item

tcpRtoAlgorithm tcpRtoMin tcpRtoMax tcpMaxConn tcpActiveOpens tcpPassiveOpens

Description

Management Table of addressing information relevant to this entity’s IP addresses.

Components of ipAddrTable.

IP Address.

Index value of the Interface which is assigned to IP address.

The Subnet Mask associated with IP address.

Broadcast Address Value associated with IP Address.

The size of the largest IP Datagram which can be sent/ received through IP Address.

Description

The total number of ICMP messages received (excluded, with error).

The total number of ICMP messages received which contained error.

The total number of ICMP echo request messages received.

The total number of ICMP echo answering messages received.

The number of ICMP messages which were sent.

The number of ICMP messages which were not sent because of error.

The number of ICMP Echo request messages sent.

The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent.

Description

The algorithm used to determine the timing of retransmitting when a response was unacknowledged.

Minimum value permitted for retransmission timeout (in milliseconds).

Maximum value permitted for retransmission timeout (in milliseconds).

Maximum number of TCP connections which can be supported.

The total number of Active open TCP connections.

The total number of Passive open TCP connections.

378 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

21.3 Supported Management Information Base (MIB) Table

Object ID

15 tcpAttemptFails tcpEstabResets tcpInSegs tcpOutSegs tcpRetransSegs tcpInErrs tcpOutRsts

Item Description

The total number of connections error.

The total number of resets.

The total number of segments received.

The total number of segments sent.

The total number of segments retransmitted.

The total number of segments received in error.

The total number of TCP segments sent containing the

RST flag (reset connection).

UDP Group (1.3.6.1.2.7)

Object ID Item

udpInDatagrams udpNoPorts udpInError udpOutDatagrams

Description

The total number of UDP Datagrams received.

The total number of received UDP Datagrams for which there was no application at the destination port.

The total number of received UDP Datagrams which contained error.

The total number of UDP Datagrams sent.

SNMP Group (1.3.6.1.2.1.11)

Object ID

Item Description

snmpInPkts The total number of SNMP messages received.

snmpOutPkts The total number of SNMP messages sent.

snmpInBadVersions The total number of received SNMP messages of which version is unsupported.

snmpInBadCommunityNames The total number of SNMP messages with unknown

Community Name.

snmpInASNParseErrs snmpInTotalReqVars snmpInGetRequests snmpInGetNexts snmpOutTooBigs

The total number of SNMP messages with incorrect OID type.

The total number of Objects which have been retrieved value successfully.

The total number of Get-Request which have been accepted and processed (e.g. Data extract by using snmpget/snmpwalk command).

The total number of Get-Next which have been accepted and processed (for at the time of following a layer-tree by using snmpwalk command).

The total number of sent SNMP messages which returned an error of "TooBig".

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 379

21.3 Supported Management Information Base (MIB) Table

Object ID

Item

snmpOutNoSuchNames snmpOutGenErrs snmpOutGetResponses snmpOutTraps snmpEnableAuthenTraps

Description

The total number of sent SNMP messages which returned an error of "NoSuchName".

The total number of sent SNMP messages which returned an error of "GenErr".

The total number of GetResponse sent.

The total number of TRAP sent.

Indicates whether the SNMP agent process is permitted to generate authentication failure traps.

380 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

21.4.2 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 2.01xx

21.4 Revision History

21.4.1 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version

2.0xxx

New Contents

•

13.1.16 Private Network Features—Centralized Voice Mail

PBX Code Method

Changed Contents

•

•

•

•

•

9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)

21.4.2 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version

2.01xx

New Contents

•

Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX

Changed Contents

•

Transfer Recall for Call Transfer without Announcement

•

3.1.23 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)

KX-DT300 series DPT compatibility

•

13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone

KX-HGT100 Feature Numbers

•

Bluetooth compatibility

•

16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

KX-HGT100 compatibility

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 381

21.4.3 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version 3.0xxx

21.4.3 KX-TDE100/KX-TDE200 PMMPR Software File Version

3.0xxx

New Contents

•

3.1.1 CA (Communication Assistant)

•

Override using an Itemized Billing Code for ARS

–

–

Common Extension Numbering for Multiple PBXs

•

13.1.26 PS Connection

–

IP Cell Station

Changed Contents

•

2.1.1 BGM (Background Music)

Added support for OGMs

•

3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)

•

3.1.23 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)

•

DISA Call Transfer from Outside Destination

–

Walking COS Through DISA

–

•

Added support for SIP extensions

•

11.1.4 Music on Hold

Added support for OGMs

•

•

13.1.5 PC Console/PC Phone

Music on Hold and BGM features added

•

•

14.1.2 Quick Setup

Updated for the latest software version

•

15.1.3 Room Status Control

•

16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

•

•

3.1.1 CA (Communication Assistant)

•

21.2 Tones/Ring Tones

382 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

21.4.4 KX-TDE600 PGMPR Software File Version 3.0xxx

Tone (for Music on Hold) deleted

21.4.4 KX-TDE600 PGMPR Software File Version 3.0xxx

New Contents

•

•

Override using an Itemized Billing Code for ARS

–

–

Common Extension Numbering for Multiple PBXs

•

13.1.26 PS Connection

–

IP Cell Station

Changed Contents

•

2.1.1 BGM (Background Music)

Added support for OGMs

•

3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)

•

3.1.23 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)

•

DISA Call Transfer from Outside Destination

–

Walking COS Through DISA

–

•

Added support for SIP extensions

•

11.1.4 Music on Hold

Added support for OGMs

•

13.1.5 PC Console/PC Phone

Music on Hold and BGM features added

•

•

14.1.2 Quick Setup

Updated for the latest software version

•

16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension

•

•

® Automated Attendant 77, 351

•

21.2 Tones/Ring Tones

Tone (for Music on Hold) deleted

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 383

21.4.4 KX-TDE600 PGMPR Software File Version 3.0xxx

384 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Index

Document Version 2009-12 Feature Manual 385

Index

Absent Message 14

Account Code Entry 15

Alarm Information, Local 178

Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice 165

Alternate Receiving/Calling Mode (Ring/Voice)

Override 130

Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice 165

Appendix 369

ARS

® Automatic Route Selection 16

Authorization Code 20

Automated Attendant (AA) 77, 351

Automatic Call Hold 37

Automatic Call Park 42

Automatic Call Waiting 48

Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) 22

Automatic Extension Release 23

Automatic Log-out 146

Automatic Number Identification (ANI) 32

Automatic Privacy 221

Automatic Redial 284

Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public CO Lines 268

Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX 168

Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 16

Automatic Station Release

® Automatic Extension

Release 23

Automatic Time Adjustment 23

Background Music (BGM) 26, 189

BGM

® Background Music 26, 189

BGM—External 26

Bluetooth Module 168

Boss & Secretary feature 117

Busy on Busy 150

Busy Override Deny, Executive 91

Busy Override, Executive 91

Busy Station Signaling (BSS)

® Call Waiting 48

Buttons, Fixed 102

Buttons, Flexible 105

CA (Communication Assistant) 30

Call Directory—Extension Dialing 165

Call Directory—Speed Dialing 303

Call Distribution Port Group 30

Call Forwarding (FWD) 115

Call Forwarding—QSIG (CF—QSIG) 261

Call Hold 36

Call Hold Retrieve Deny 37

Call Hold, Automatic 37

Call Log, Incoming 38

Call Log, Outgoing 284

Call Monitor 41

Call Park 42

Call Park Recall 42

Call Park Retrieve Deny 42

Call Pickup 43

Call Pickup Group 44, 124

Call Pickup, Directed 43

Call Splitting 44

Call Transfer 45

Call Transfer with Announcement 45

Call Transfer without Announcement 45

Call Transfer—QSIG (CT—QSIG) 264

Call Transfer—Screened

® Call Transfer with

Announcement 45

Call Transfer—Unscreened

® Call Transfer without

Announcement 45

Call Waiting Caller ID (Visual Caller ID) 49

CALL WAITING FEATURES 48

Call Waiting Tone 50

Callback Busy, Automatic (Camp-on) 22

Caller ID 32

Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution 51, 157

Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) 32, 53

Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP)—QSIG 262

Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) 53

Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)—QSIG 263

Calling Name Identification Presentation (CNIP)—

Calling Name Identification Restriction (CNIR)—QSIG 263

Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection 62

Capacity of System Resources 370

Carrier Access Code, Special 302

CCBS—QSIG

® Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber—

QSIG 260

CDPG

® Call Distribution Port Group 30

CELLULAR PHONE FEATURES 51

Cellular Phone XDP Parallel 147

Centralized Voice Mail 246

CF—QSIG

® Call Forwarding—QSIG 261

Circular Hunting 156

Class of Service (COS) 61

CLI

® Calling Line Identification Distribution 51, 157

CLIP

® Calling Line Identification Presentation 32, 53

CLIP—QSIG

® Calling Line Identification Presentation—

® Calling Line Identification Restriction 53

CLIR

CLIR—QSIG

® Calling Line Identification Restriction—

CNIP—QSIG

® Calling Name Identification Presentation—

CNIR—QSIG

® Calling Name Identification Restriction—

CO Line Call Limitation 57

CO Line Access 55

Code Entry, Verified 338

COLP

® Connected Line Identification Presentation 53

COLP—QSIG

® Connected Line Identification Presentation

—QSIG 262

COLR

® Connected Line Identification Restriction 53

COLR—QSIG

® Connected Line Identification Restriction—

Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) 62

Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—

QSIG 260

Conference 58

Confirmation Tone 59

Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP) 53

Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP)—

Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR) 53

386 Feature Manual Document Version 2009-12

Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR)—

Connected Name Identification Presentation (CONP)—

Connected Name Identification Restriction (CONR)—